ML020920552: Difference between revisions

From kanterella
Jump to navigation Jump to search
(StriderTol Bot insert)
 
(StriderTol Bot change)
 
Line 17: Line 17:


=Text=
=Text=
{{#Wiki_filter:Final Submittal
{{#Wiki_filter:Final Submittal  
                  (Blue Paper)
(Blue Paper)  
  Reactor Operator Written Examination
Reactor Operator Written Examination  
    OCONEE EXAM
OCONEE EXAM  
50-269, 270, 287/2002-301
50-269, 270, 287/2002-301  
FEBRUARY 11 - 15, 2002
FEBRUARY 11 - 15, 2002


                                OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                      02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                        1 POINT
1 POINT  
32. Which one of the following contains completely correct statements with respect to
32. Which one of the following contains completely correct statements with respect to  
    RBCU operation following an ES actuation?
RBCU operation following an ES actuation?  
    A. RB Aux fans receive a start signal, upon an ES signal, RBCUs are in low speed,
A. RB Aux fans receive a start signal, upon an ES signal, RBCUs are in low speed,  
      LPSW-565 (RB AUX FANS COOLERS INLET) opens and LPSW-566 ("B" RBCU
LPSW-565 (RB AUX FANS COOLERS INLET) opens and LPSW-566 ("B" RBCU  
      ISOLATION) closes restoring full LPSW flow to the "B" RBCU.
ISOLATION) closes restoring full LPSW flow to the "B" RBCU.
    B. RBCUs receive a signal from ES 1 & 2, all RBCUs go to low speed, LPSW-565 (RB
B. RBCUs receive a signal from ES 1 & 2, all RBCUs go to low speed, LPSW-565 (RB  
      AUX FANS COOLERS INLET) opens and LPSW-566 ("B" RBCU ISOLATION)
AUX FANS COOLERS INLET) opens and LPSW-566 ("B" RBCU ISOLATION)  
      closes restoring full LPSW flow to the "B" RBCU.
closes restoring full LPSW flow to the "B" RBCU.
    C. Fusible dropout plates will drop ifthe RB air temperature heats up to a temperature
C. Fusible dropout plates will drop if the RB air temperature heats up to a temperature  
      between 150°F and 165 0 F, One second after the fusible dropout plates drop, the
between 150°F and 165 0F, One second after the fusible dropout plates drop, the  
      RBCU fans swap to high speed.
RBCU fans swap to high speed.
    D. RBCUs receive a signal from ES 5 & 6, all RBCUs go to low speed, and the RBCU
D. RBCUs receive a signal from ES 5 & 6, all RBCUs go to low speed, and the RBCU  
      LPSW outlet valves go full open.
LPSW outlet valves go full open.
    A) D
A) D  
    EO: 4 and 5.2
EO: 4 and 5.2  
    K/A: 022A301 (4.1/4.3)
K/A: 022A301 (4.1/4.3)  
    Reference: Vol IV, OP-OC-PNS-RBC Pages 16 and 18 of 23.
Reference: Vol IV, OP-OC-PNS-RBC Pages 16 and 18 of 23.
    Author: RFA
Author: RFA


                                OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                      02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                          1 POINT
1 POINT  
33. The following conditions exist on Unit #1:
33. The following conditions exist on Unit #1:  
        - Rx Power = 100%
- Rx Power = 100%  
        - PZR level = 220"
- PZR level = 220"  
        - LDST level = 70"
- LDST level = 70"  
        - LDST Pressure = 35 psig
- LDST Pressure = 35 psig  
    Which ONE of the following MIMIMUM actions should be taken?
Which ONE of the following MIMIMUM actions should be taken?  
    SEE ATTACHMENT: (LDST Pressure vs. Level & TS's)
SEE ATTACHMENT: (LDST Pressure vs. Level & TS's)  
    A. Declare both trains of HPI inoperable and be in mode 3 within 12 hours.
A. Declare both trains of HPI inoperable and be in mode 3 within 12 hours.
    B. Declare both trains of HPI inoperable and restore at least 1 train within 72 hours.
B. Declare both trains of HPI inoperable and restore at least 1 train within 72 hours.
    C. Declare both trains of HPI inoperable and be in mode 3 within 12 hours AND
C. Declare both trains of HPI inoperable and be in mode 3 within 12 hours AND  
      decrease RCS pressure to < 800 psig.
decrease RCS pressure to < 800 psig.
    D. No actions required.
D. No actions required.
    A)A
A) A  
    A. Correct - P/T is above and to left of curve in 1108/01. Per
A. Correct - P/T is above and to left of curve in 1108/01. Per  
    same encl. in 1108/01, both trains of HPI should be declared
same encl. in 1108/01, both trains of HPI should be declared  
    inoperable and TS 3.5.2 (BB3.5.2-6 applies)
inoperable and TS 3.5.2 (BB3.5.2-6 applies)  
    K/A: 022AA101 (3.4/3.3)
K/A: 022AA101 (3.4/3.3)  
    T1G2, T1G2
T1G2, T1G2  
    Bank/Modified
Bank/Modified  
    Reference: Facility updated question bank 4 PNS113501       PNS113501
Reference:  
                  TS 3.5.1, 3.5.2 (B3.5.2-6).
Facility updated question bank 4 PNS113501  
PNS113501  
TS 3.5.1, 3.5.2 (B3.5.2-6).


                              OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                      02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                        1 POINT
1 POINT  
1. Shutdown margin has been reduced with the intent of going critical and reactor startup
1. Shutdown margin has been reduced with the intent of going critical and reactor startup  
  has been temporarily suspended.
has been temporarily suspended.
  In accordance with the Controlling procedure for Unit Startup (OP/1,2,3/A1 102/01),
In accordance with the Controlling procedure for Unit Startup (OP/1,2,3/A1 102/01),  
  which one of the following describes the MINIMUM required operator actions?
which one of the following describes the MINIMUM required operator actions?  
  A. Insert CRDs to group 1 at 50% and calculate a shutdown margin per PT/1 103/015,
A. Insert CRDs to group 1 at 50% and calculate a shutdown margin per PT/1 103/015,  
      Reactivity balance Calculation.
Reactivity balance Calculation.
  B. Limit SG levels to < 40 inches on Startup Range and maintain >1%delta K/K
B. Limit SG levels to < 40 inches on Startup Range and maintain >1%delta K/K  
      Shutdown Margin for 200 F RCS temperature with a Xenon free core.
Shutdown Margin for 200 F RCS temperature with a Xenon free core.
  C. Insert CRDs to group 1 at 50% and limit SG levels to < 40 inches on Startup Range.
C. Insert CRDs to group 1 at 50% and limit SG levels to < 40 inches on Startup Range.
  D. Calculate a shutdown margin per PT/1 103/015, Reactivity balance Calculation and
D. Calculate a shutdown margin per PT/1 103/015, Reactivity balance Calculation and  
      maintain >1%delta K/K Shutdown Margin for 200 F RCS temperature with a Xenon
maintain >1%delta K/K Shutdown Margin for 200 F RCS temperature with a Xenon  
      free core.
free core.


                              OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                        02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                          1 POINT
1 POINT  
A)A
A) A  
Distractor Analysis:
Distractor Analysis:  
When in mode 3 or higher, maintain the following:
When in mode 3 or higher, maintain the following:  
Limit SG levels to < 40 inches on Stertup Range OR maintain >1%delta K/K Shutdown Margin
Limit SG levels to < 40 inches on Stertup Range OR maintain >1%delta K/K Shutdown Margin  
for 200 F RCS temperature with a Xenon free core.
for 200 F RCS temperature with a Xenon free core.
This prevents accidental criticality caused by a MS line break overcooling.
This prevents accidental criticality caused by a MS line break overcooling.
Ifshutdown margin has been reduced with intent of going critical and reactor Startup is
If shutdown margin has been reduced with intent of going critical and reactor Startup is  
suspended (this does not apply during ZPPT) then:
suspended (this does not apply during ZPPT) then:  
Insert CRDs to group 1 at 50% and calculate a shutdown margin per PT/1 103/015, Reactivity
Insert CRDs to group 1 at 50% and calculate a shutdown margin per PT/1 103/015, Reactivity  
balance Calculation.
balance Calculation.
Inserting rods to group 1 at 50% will place the reactor in a condition of being shutdown by the
Inserting rods to group 1 at 50% will place the reactor in a condition of being shutdown by the  
worth of the safety rods, while having further shutdown capability with the remaining worth of
worth of the safety rods, while having further shutdown capability with the remaining worth of  
Group 1.
Group 1.
Reference: Lesson Plans Vol 2, OP-OC-CP-01 1, page 11 of 43.
Reference: Lesson Plans Vol 2, OP-OC-CP-01 1, page 11 of 43.
EO - 23
EO - 23  
K/A: 001A411 (3.5/4.1)
K/A: 001A411 (3.5/4.1)  
RO/SRO: Both
RO/SRO: Both  
Level: C
Level: C  
Author: rfa
Author: rfa


                                OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                      02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                        1 POINT
1 POINT  
2. The unit is operating at 80% power when it is determined that the Control Rods (CRs)
2. The unit is operating at 80% power when it is determined that the Control Rods (CRs)  
  are in the restricted area due to a momentary continuous rod withdrawal . A calculation
are in the restricted area due to a momentary continuous rod withdrawal . A calculation  
  has been completed that indicates RCS boron concentration will have to be increased
has been completed that indicates RCS boron concentration will have to be increased  
  from 435 ppm to 460 ppm to return CRs to an acceptable position. The following
from 435 ppm to 460 ppm to return CRs to an acceptable position. The following  
  conditions exist for CBAST:
conditions exist for CBAST:  
        - CBAST concentration = 11,240 ppm
- CBAST concentration = 11,240 ppm  
        - CBASTvolume = 13,200 gal.
- CBASTvolume = 13,200 gal.
        - RCS Hot Volume = 59,860 gals
- RCS Hot Volume = 59,860 gals  
        - RCS Cold Volume = 88,000 gals
- RCS Cold Volume = 88,000 gals  
  Which ONE of the following is the volume of CBAST that will have to be added to the
Which ONE of the following is the volume of CBAST that will have to be added to the  
  RCS to accomplish this concentration change?
RCS to accomplish this concentration change?  
  A. 117 gallons
A. 117 gallons  
  B. 139 gallons
B. 139 gallons  
  C. 173 gallons
C. 173 gallons  
  D. 204 gallons
D. 204 gallons  
  Answer B
Answer B  
  A. calculated using 13,200 ppm and hot volume (59860)
A. calculated using 13,200 ppm and hot volume (59860)  
  B. correct - 11 240(X)+435(59860)=460(59860+X)
B. correct - 11 240(X)+435(59860)=460(59860+X)  
  C. calculated using 13,200 ppm and cold volume (88,000)
C. calculated using 13,200 ppm and cold volume (88,000)  
  D. calculated using 11,240 ppm and cold volume
D. calculated using 11,240 ppm and cold volume  
  K/A: 001AK103 (3.9/4.0)
K/A: 001AK103 (3.9/4.0)  
  T1G2, T1GI
T1G2, T1GI  
  Bank
Bank  
  Reference: Facility updated question bank 26 CP050102 CP050102
Reference:  
Facility updated question bank 26 CP050102 CP050102


                                OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                        02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                          1 POINT
1 POINT  
3. The following conditions exist:
3. The following conditions exist:  
      - A reactor startup is in progress.
- A reactor startup is in progress.
      - Control rod groups 1 through 3 are fully withdrawn.
- Control rod groups 1 through 3 are fully withdrawn.
      - Group 4 rod withdrawal is stopped at 48%
- Group 4 rod withdrawal is stopped at 48%  
      - Source range NI counts are 540 cps and slowly increasing on NI-1 and NI-2
- Source range NI counts are 540 cps and slowly increasing on NI-1 and NI-2  
      - Start-up rate is 0.2 DPM and constant on NI-1 and NI-2
- Start-up rate is 0.2 DPM and constant on NI-1 and NI-2  
      - All rod motion has been stopped for 20 seconds
- All rod motion has been stopped for 20 seconds  
  Which of the following states the appropriate actions for the conditions stated above?
Which of the following states the appropriate actions for the conditions stated above?  
  A.         Monitor the increasing count rate and verify power stabilizes below the point
A.  
              of adding heat before continuing rod withdrawal.
Monitor the increasing count rate and verify power stabilizes below the point  
  B.         Insert group 4 control rods, verify a Shutdown Margin of more than 1%
of adding heat before continuing rod withdrawal.
              exists and inform the Reactor Engineer of plant conditions.
B.  
  C.         Insert groups 1 through 4 to group I at 50% withdrawn, request Chemistry
Insert group 4 control rods, verify a Shutdown Margin of more than 1%  
              to resample the RCS for boron concentration, and calculate a SDM.
exists and inform the Reactor Engineer of plant conditions.
  D.         Trip the reactor and enter the EOP's, perform the Immediate Manual
C.  
              Actions tab, and transfer to Unanticipated Nuclear Power tab.
Insert groups 1 through 4 to group I at 50% withdrawn, request Chemistry  
  A) C
to resample the RCS for boron concentration, and calculate a SDM.
  Reasons
D.  
  A.         The indications in the stem of this question show that the reactor has
Trip the reactor and enter the EOP's, perform the Immediate Manual  
              achieved criticality on Safety Rods. Continued power increase should not be
Actions tab, and transfer to Unanticipated Nuclear Power tab.
              permitted.
A) C  
  B.         Insertion of all safety rods is required for these conditions. Insertion of
Reasons  
              only group 4 rods is not adequate.
A.  
  C.         Correct Answer: In accordance with PT/1 103/15, Reactivity Balance
The indications in the stem of this question show that the reactor has  
              Calculation.
achieved criticality on Safety Rods. Continued power increase should not be  
  D.         Immediate tripping of reactor is not required. If reactor was tripped transfer to
permitted.
              UNPP would not be performed.
B.  
  Reference: EP/I1A/1800/001, EOP Immediate manual Actions tab.
Insertion of all safety rods is required for these conditions. Insertion of  
                OP/I/A/1 102/001, Controlling Procedure for Unit SU.
only group 4 rods is not adequate.
                PT/1103/15, Reactivity Balance Calculation
C.  
Correct Answer: In accordance with PT/1 103/15, Reactivity Balance  
Calculation.
D.  
Immediate tripping of reactor is not required. If reactor was tripped transfer to  
UNPP would not be performed.
Reference: EP/I1A/1800/001, EOP Immediate manual Actions tab.
OP/I/A/1 102/001, Controlling Procedure for Unit SU.
PT/1103/15, Reactivity Balance Calculation


                              OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                        02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                        1 POINT
1 POINT  
4. Which one of the following set of conditions will cause a regulating control rod group
4. Which one of the following set of conditions will cause a regulating control rod group  
  asymmetric runback?
asymmetric runback?  
  Assume in all cases a 9" asymmetric fault also occurred.
Assume in all cases a 9" asymmetric fault also occurred.
  A. If a group 5 rod drops, causing a group 5 in limit, and NI power is >60% or if a
A. If a group 5 rod drops, causing a group 5 in limit, and NI power is >60% or if a  
      group 7 rod drops causing a group 7 in limit and group 6 rods are > 80% an
group 7 rod drops causing a group 7 in limit and group 6 rods are > 80% an  
      asymmetric runback will occur.
asymmetric runback will occur.
  B. If a group 6 rod drops, causing a group 6 in limit and the remainder of group 6 rods
B. If a group 6 rod drops, causing a group 6 in limit and the remainder of group 6 rods  
      are > 80% withdrawn, an asymmetric runback will occur. The runback will continue
are > 80% withdrawn, an asymmetric runback will occur. The runback will continue  
      to 55% even if the 9" asymmetric fault clears before reaching 55%.
to 55% even if the 9" asymmetric fault clears before reaching 55%.
  C. If a group 5 rod drops, causing a group 5 in limit, and NI power is >80% or if a
C. If a group 5 rod drops, causing a group 5 in limit, and NI power is >80% or if a  
      group 6 rod drops, causing a group 6 in limit and group 5 rods are > 60%
group 6 rod drops, causing a group 6 in limit and group 5 rods are > 60%  
      withdrawn, an asymmetric runback will occur.
withdrawn, an asymmetric runback will occur.
  D. If a group 7 rod drops causing a group 7 in limit and the remainder of group 7 rods
D. If a group 7 rod drops causing a group 7 in limit and the remainder of group 7 rods  
      are > 80% withdrawn, an asymmetric runback will occur. The runback will continue
are > 80% withdrawn, an asymmetric runback will occur. The runback will continue  
      to 55% even if the 9" asymmetric fault clears before reaching 55%.
to 55% even if the 9" asymmetric fault clears before reaching 55%.
  A)A
A) A  
  Reference: Lesson Plans Vol VIII, OP-OC-IC-CRI , page 26 of 62.
Reference: Lesson Plans Vol VIII, OP-OC-IC-CRI , page 26 of 62.
  EO - 9
EO - 9  
  K/A: 001 K507 (3.3/4.0)
K/A: 001 K507 (3.3/4.0)  
  RO/SRO: BOTH
RO/SRO: BOTH  
  Level: C
Level: C  
  Author: rfa
Author: rfa


                                OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                        02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                        1 POINT
1 POINT  
5. The initial power escalation following a refueling outage is being performed. The
5. The initial power escalation following a refueling outage is being performed. The  
  reactor power level is stabilized to perform testing. The following indications are
reactor power level is stabilized to perform testing. The following indications are  
  available to the operator at the control board:
available to the operator at the control board:
  NI-5           26.0%
NI-5  
  NI-6          29.0%
NI-6
  NI-7          26.0%
NI-7
  NI-8          29.0%
NI-8
  T-hot Loop A     588.50 F
26.0%  
  T-hot Loop B     588.00 F
29.0%  
  T-cold Loop A     570.00 F
26.0%  
  T-cold Loop B     569.50 F
29.0%
  Tave               579.00 F
T-hot Loop A  
  Generator output 320 MWe
588.50 F  
  Which of the following is an accurate estimate of the thermal power level of the
T-hot Loop B  
  reactor at this point?
588.00 F  
  SEE ATTACHMENT: Encl.13.12 (Loop deltaT vs. Rx Power)
T-cold Loop A  
                            Encl.13.13 (Gross Load vs. Rx Power)
570.00 F  
  A.         668 MWt
T-cold Loop B  
  B.          745 MWt
569.50 F  
  C.          899 MWt
Tave  
  D.         1078 MWt
579.00 F  
Generator output 320 MWe
Which of the following is an accurate estimate  
reactor at this point?
of the thermal power level of the
SEE ATTACHMENT: Encl.13.12 (Loop deltaT vs. Rx Power)  
Encl.13.13 (Gross Load vs. Rx Power)
A.
B. 
C.
668 MWt  
745 MWt  
899 MWt
D.  
1078 MWt


                            OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                    02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                      1 POINT
1 POINT  
A) D
A) D  
Reasons:
Reasons:  
A, B, C. Due to the change in Tcold on a power increase, the NIs will need calibrating
A, B, C. Due to the change in Tcold on a power increase, the NIs will need calibrating  
at approximately 25% power increments. Using alternate indications, such as core
at approximately 25% power increments. Using alternate indications, such as core  
delta-T is a more accurate indication of power level. A core delta-T of 18.50 F indicates
delta-T is a more accurate indication of power level. A core delta-T of 18.50 F indicates  
a power level of approximately 42% with a corresponding thermal power level of
a power level of approximately 42% with a corresponding thermal power level of  
approximately 1070 MWt.
approximately 1070 MWt.
A.     Ifthe student uses the value of power displayed on NI 5 and NI 7, this
A.  
      answer will be obtained.
If the student uses the value of power displayed on NI 5 and NI 7, this  
      (.26 X 2568 MWt = 668 MWt)
answer will be obtained.
B.     Ifthe student uses the highest value of power displayed on NI 6 and NI 8,
(.26 X 2568 MWt = 668 MWt)  
      this answer will be obtained.
B.  
      (.29 X 2568 MWt = 745 MWt)
If the student uses the highest value of power displayed on NI 6 and NI 8,  
C.     If the student uses use enclouse 12.13, Gross Load vs Reator Power,
this answer will be obtained.
      320 MWe = 35% reactor power.
(.29 X 2568 MWt = 745 MWt)  
      Thermal, this answer will be obtained.
C.  
      (35% power X 2568 MWt = 898.8 = 899 MWe)
If the student uses use enclouse 12.13, Gross Load vs Reator Power,  
D.     18.50 on 4 RCP curve - 42% power 42% x 2568 = 1078.56 = 1079 MWt
320 MWe = 35% reactor power.
OC reference: OP/1AN1102/001, Controlling procedure for unit SU.
Thermal, this answer will be obtained.
                OP/I/A/1 102/004, Operation at power
(35% power X 2568 MWt = 898.8 = 899 MWe)  
                PT/600/01, Periodic Instrument Surveillance
D.  
18.50 on 4 RCP curve - 42% power 42% x 2568 = 1078.56 = 1079 MWt  
OC reference: OP/1AN1102/001, Controlling procedure for unit SU.
OP/I/A/1 102/004, Operation at power  
PT/600/01, Periodic Instrument Surveillance


                                                                        I
Enclosure 13.13  
                                                                          I
Gross Load Vs. Reactor Power
                          Enclosure 13.13               PT/1/A/0600/001
PT/1/A/0600/001  
                                                        Page I of I
Page I of I
                  Gross Load Vs. Reactor Power
900
                                                                I0OD
800
                                                                900
7D0
    900
600
                                                                800
500
    800
400
                                                                700
300
    7D0
200
                                                                600
100
    600
0
2 500
I0OD
0(D
900
                                                                400
800
    400
700
                                                                300
600
    300
400  
                                                                200
300  
    200
200
                                                                100
100
    100
0
      0                                                          0
100
                30 40         50         60   70 80 90     100
Reactor Power (%FP)
        0 10 20
I
                      Reactor Power (%FP)
I
2
0 (D
10
20
30  
40  
50  
60  
70  
80  
90
0


                                  Enclosure 13.12                                                 PT/1/A/0600/001
Enclosure 13.12  
                                  Unit 1 Cycle 20                                                  Page 1 of I
Unit 1 Cycle 20
                            Loop AT Vs. Reactor Power
Loop AT Vs. Reactor Power
  lii
PT/1/A/0600/001  
  100
Page 1 of I
    90
:7mpu* I IM
    80
lii  
                          :7mpu*
100  
                                      IIM
90  
    70
80  
U.
70  
    80
80  
50   .    . .
50
                  - .1
rr
                      rr t=4'
t=4'
                      ..             .;.~ .     .1   1
;.~
                                                                              SPump Curye
.
                                                          tW
.
                          T3+K
.
        I
..  
            kl                                        La:A
.
                                                                H iiLl &#xfd;:IE:.7iz,
.
    40                                                                        4
.1  
                                                      7d -
1
            R-H
10
    30
15
                                                    P
T3+K
    20
20
                                                                                          ...--     -
25
    10
tW
                                                                        4     - T           ...
30
                                        -4-
35
      0
40
                10      15        20            25            30          35          40    45        50
Loop Oelta-T (degrees F)
        0
- .1
                                      Loop Oelta-T (degrees F)
U. 
I
40
30
20
10
0
0
45
50
La:A  
iiLl &#xfd;:IE:.7iz,  
7d -
4
R-H  
P  
...--
-
-4-
4  
-
T  
...
H
I
SPump Curye
kl


                                OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                        02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                          1 POINT
1 POINT  
6. Given the following plant conditions:
6. Given the following plant conditions:  
        - Reactor is at 70% power.
- Reactor is at 70% power.
        - ICS Reactor Bailey and Diamond stations are in MANUAL.
- ICS Reactor Bailey and Diamond stations are in  
        - All other ICS stations are in AUTOMATIC.
- All other ICS stations are in AUTOMATIC.
        - Group 5 rod 6 is dropped fully into the core.
- Group 5 rod 6 is dropped fully into the core.
  Which of the following indicates the core power distribution CONCERN, and the Tave
MANUAL.
    parameter response?
Which of the following indicates the core power distribution CONCERN, and the Tave  
  ASSUME NO OPERATOR ACTIONS
parameter response?  
  A.           Negative Quadrant Power Tilt; Tave decreases and remains low.
ASSUME NO OPERATOR ACTIONS  
  B.           Negative Quadrant Power Tilt; Tave decreases and returns to setpoint.
A.  
  C.           Positive Quadrant Power Tilt; Tave decreases and remains low.
Negative Quadrant Power Tilt; Tave decreases and remains low.
  D.           Positive Quadrant Power Tilt; Tave decreases and returns to setpoint.
B.  
  A) D
Negative Quadrant Power Tilt; Tave decreases and returns to setpoint.
  NB/C. QPT will become more negative in the quadrant the rod is dropped into but the
C.  
  main operator limit concern is the flux shift and the positive QPT for the other 3
Positive Quadrant Power Tilt; Tave decreases and remains low.
  quadrants. Tave will return to setpoint as MFW has Tave control with the reactor in
D.  
  manual.
Positive Quadrant Power Tilt; Tave decreases and returns to setpoint.
  D. CORRECT; As the rod is fully dropped into the core, power distribution is changed
A) D  
  between the quadrants. The quadrant that the rod is dropped into is poisoned and the
NB/C. QPT will become more negative in the quadrant the rod is dropped into but the  
  flux decreases and shifts the flux to the other quadrants. The quadrant that contains
main operator limit concern is the flux shift and the positive QPT for the other 3  
  the dropped rod will indicate a negative QPT value and the other quadrants will indicate
quadrants. Tave will return to setpoint as MFW has Tave control with the reactor in  
  positive. These positive quadrants are producing most of the power and is the
manual.
  operators main power distribution limit concern. Tave will return to setpoint as MFW
D. CORRECT; As the rod is fully dropped into the core, power distribution is changed  
  has Tave control with the reactor in manual.
between the quadrants. The quadrant that the rod is dropped into is poisoned and the  
  Reference: AOP Vol 1 of 2, AP/1/A/1700/015
flux decreases and shifts the flux to the other quadrants. The quadrant that contains  
the dropped rod will indicate a negative QPT value and the other quadrants will indicate  
positive. These positive quadrants are producing most of the power and is the  
operators main power distribution limit concern. Tave will return to setpoint as MFW  
has Tave control with the reactor in manual.
Reference: AOP Vol 1 of 2, AP/1/A/1700/015


                                  OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                          02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                            1 POINT
1 POINT  
7. Unit 2 plant conditions:
7. Unit 2 plant conditions:  
      - Reactor power = 55%
- Reactor power = 55%  
      - RCS Tave = 579&deg;F
- RCS Tave = 579&deg;F  
      - 2B2 RCP AC Oil Lift Pump operating:
- 2B2 RCP AC Oil Lift Pump operating:  
          - Pressure = 700 psig
- Pressure = 700 psig  
      - 2A CC Pump operating:
- 2A CC Pump operating:  
          - CRD Outlet Hdr flow = 150 gpm
- CRD Outlet Hdr flow = 150 gpm  
          - Total CC flow = 890 gpm
- Total CC flow = 890 gpm  
  Which ONE of the following describes why the 2B2 Reactor Coolant Pump will NOT
Which ONE of the following describes why the 2B2 Reactor Coolant Pump will NOT  
  start at this time?
start at this time?  
                        is too
is too  
  A. RCS temperature / high
A. RCS temperature / high  
  B. Reactor power / high
B. Reactor power / high  
  C. Oil lift pressure / low
C. Oil lift pressure / low  
  D. CC flow / low
D. CC flow / low  
  A) B
A) B  
  A. Incorrect - RCS temperature is > 325 0 F which is required to start the 4th RCP. If
A. Incorrect - RCS temperature is > 3250F which is required to start the 4th RCP. If  
      RCS temperatutre was < 3250F this would be a correct answer.
RCS temperatutre was < 3250F this would be a correct answer.
  B. Correct - Reactor power should be < 50% to start any RCP. Rx Power must be
B. Correct - Reactor power should be < 50% to start any RCP. Rx Power must be  
      below 50% to satisfy the start interlock circuitry.
below 50% to satisfy the start interlock circuitry.
  C. Incorrect - Oil lift press is > 600 psig which meets the requirement of the start
C. Incorrect - Oil lift press is > 600 psig which meets the requirement of the start  
      interlock. If Oil Lift Pressure was < 600 psig this would be a correct answer.
interlock. If Oil Lift Pressure was < 600 psig this would be a correct answer.
  D. Incorrect - CC flow is > 575 gpm If Total CC flow was < 575 gpm this would be a
D. Incorrect - CC flow is > 575 gpm If Total CC flow was < 575 gpm this would be a  
      correct answer. To answer correctly the student must know that the interlock is fed
correct answer. To answer correctly the student must know that the interlock is fed  
      from TOTAL flow and not CRD RETURN flow.
from TOTAL flow and not CRD RETURN flow.
  K/A: 003K402 (2.5/2.7)
K/A: 003K402 (2.5/2.7)  
  T2G1, T2G1
T2G1, T2G1  
  Bank
Bank  
  Reference:     Facility updated question bank 5 PNS061403 PNS061403
Reference:  
Facility updated question bank 5 PNS061403 PNS061403


                                    OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                            02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                              1 POINT
1 POINT
8. Which one of the following DW solutions is correct assuming the operator wants to
8. Which one of the following DW solutions  
  lower the RCS from 1500 ppm B to 1300 ppm B. The RCS is hot and has a volume of
lower the RCS from 1500 ppm B to 1300  
  59860 gallons?
59860 gallons?
  The operator has just added 500 gallons of "A" BHUT at 1700 ppmB
is correct assuming the operator wants to
  Assume DW added is at 0 ppmB
ppm B. The RCS is hot and has a volume of
  A. 8566 gallons of DW
The operator has just added 500 gallons of "A" BHUT at 1700 ppmB  
  B. 9209 gallons of DW
Assume DW added is at 0 ppmB  
  C. 9363 gallons of DW
A. 8566 gallons of DW  
  D. 9863 gallons of DW
B. 9209 gallons of DW  
  A)C
C. 9363 gallons of DW  
  Distractor Analysis:
D. 9863 gallons of DW  
  a.     8566 gal. (uses feed and bleed formula without consideration for ,,A' BHUT addition) - incorrect
A) C  
  b.      9209 gal. (uses wrong ppmB, 1300, for calculating XA" BHUT addition) - incorrect
Distractor Analysis:
  C.      9363 gal. [(1 500)(59860)+(1700)(500)+(0)(V3)=(1 300)(59860+500+V3)] - correct answer
8566 gal. 
  d.      9863 gal. (uses total make-up volume.. .without subtracting ,,A" BHUT volume) - incorrect
9209 gal. 
  Reference: Lesson Plans Vol 2, OP-OC-CP-016, page 14 of 43.
9363 gal.
  EO - 5.1
9863 gal.
  K/A: 004A404 (3.2/3.6)
(uses feed and bleed formula without consideration for ,,A' BHUT addition) - incorrect  
  RO/SRO: Both
(uses wrong ppmB, 1300, for calculating XA"  
  Level: C
BHUT addition) - incorrect  
  Author: rfa
[(1 500)(59860)+(1700)(500)+(0)(V3)=(1 300)(59860+500+V3)] - correct answer  
(uses total make-up volume.. .without subtracting ,,A" BHUT volume) - incorrect
Reference: Lesson Plans Vol 2, OP-OC-CP-016, page 14 of 43.
EO - 5.1  
K/A: 004A404 (3.2/3.6)  
RO/SRO: Both  
Level: C  
Author: rfa
a. 
b. 
C. 
d.


                                OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                        02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                        1 POINT
1 POINT  
9. Given the following plant conditions:
9. Given the following plant conditions:  
      - 100% power.
- 100% power.
      - "1B" HPI pump is in operation.
- "1B" HPI pump is in operation.
      - LDST Level "2" is selected.
- LDST Level "2" is selected.
  Which of the following describes the response of the HPI system if the LDST level "1"
Which of the following describes the response of the HPI system if the LDST level "1"  
  transmitter fails low?
transmitter fails low?  
  A.         Only 1HP-24, "IA" HPI BWST suction, will receive an open signal.
A.  
  B.         Only 1HP-25, "1B" HPI BWST suction, will receive an open signal.
Only 1HP-24, "IA" HPI BWST suction, will receive an open signal.
  C.         Both 1HP-24 and 1HP-25, "1A" AND "1B" HPI BWST suction, will receive
B.  
              an open signal.
Only 1HP-25, "1B" HPI BWST suction, will receive an open signal.
  D.         Neither 1HP-24, "1A" HPI BWST suction NOR 1HP-25, "IB" HPI BWST
C.  
              suction, will receive an open signal.
Both 1 HP-24 and 1 HP-25, "1A" AND "1 B" HPI BWST suction, will receive  
  A) D
an open signal.
  Reference: Vol IV, HPI System
D.  
  C/A
Neither 1HP-24, "1A" HPI BWST suction NOR 1HP-25, "IB" HPI BWST  
suction, will receive an open signal.
A) D  
Reference: Vol IV, HPI System  
C/A


                                OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                        02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                          1 POINT
1 POINT  
10. Given the following:
10. Given the following:  
      - Reactor power = 100%
- Reactor power = 100%  
      - All ICS stations in AUTOMATIC
- All ICS stations in AUTOMATIC  
      - RCS boron concentration = 1050 ppm
- RCS boron concentration = 1050 ppm  
      - "IA" BHUT = 1245 ppmB
- "IA" BHUT = 1245 ppmB  
      - "IB" BHUT = <10 ppmB
- "IB" BHUT = <10 ppmB  
      - Group 7 CRs @ 88% withdrawn
- Group 7 CRs @ 88% withdrawn  
      - Group 7 CRs rod worth = -.0068%Aik/o%
- Group 7 CRs rod worth = -.0068%Aik/o%  
      - Differential Boron worth = -. 0078%Ak/kIppm
- Differential Boron worth = -.0078%Ak/kIppm  
    (ASSUME: RCS hot volume of 59860 gallons)
(ASSUME: RCS hot volume of 59860 gallons)  
    Which ONE of the following will be the Group 7 (% withdrawn) rod position that
Which ONE of the following will be the Group 7 (% withdrawn) rod position that  
    resulted from an addition of 1900 gallons from "IA" BHUT to the RCS?
resulted from an addition of 1900 gallons from "IA" BHUT to the RCS?  
    A. 91%
A. 91%  
    B. 93%
B. 93%  
    C. 95%
C. 95%  
    D. 100%
D. 100%


                              OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                      02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                        1 POINT
1 POINT
A) C
A) C
A. Incorrect: See calculation below
A.
B. Incorrect: Reverses coefficient values for rods and boron.
B. 
C. Correct: (59860)(1050) + (1245)(1900) = (Cf)(61760)
C.
                  RCS           + A BHUT         = (Cf) ( RCS final volume)
Incorrect: See calculation below  
              Cf = 1056 ppmB
Incorrect: Reverses coefficient values for rods and boron.
            RCS boron increase from 1050 to 1056 = 6 ppmB increase
Correct: (59860)(1050) + (1245)(1900) = (Cf)(61760)  
            6 ppmB x .0078 = .0468%deltaK/K
RCS  
              .0468 / .0068 = 6.88 % rod motion (outward)
+ A BHUT  
            88% + 6.88% = 95%
= (Cf) ( RCS final volume)  
D. Incorrect: Uses RCS final volume of 59860 in calculation.
Cf = 1056 ppmB  
K/A: 004K105 (2.7/3.2)
RCS boron increase from 1050 to 1056 = 6 ppmB increase
SRO - T2G1
6 ppmB x .0078 = .0468%deltaK/K  
Bank
.0468 / .0068 = 6.88 % rod motion (outward)  
Reference:     Facility updated question bank 7 CP050105 CP050105
88% + 6.88% = 95%  
D. Incorrect: Uses RCS final volume of 59860 in calculation.
K/A: 004K105 (2.7/3.2)  
SRO -T2G1  
Bank  
Reference:  
Facility updated question bank 7 CP050105 CP050105  
C/A
C/A


                                  OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                          02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                            1 POINT
1 POINT  
11. Which one of the following group of action(s) is/are correct given the following plant
11. Which one of the following group of action(s) is/are correct given the following plant  
    conditions?
conditions?  
            - Control rod 3 in group 7 has dropped to the bottom and stuck.
- Control rod 3 in group 7 has dropped to the bottom and stuck.
            - Control rod 4 in group 4 has misaligned 8 inches and stuck.
- Control rod 4 in group 4 has misaligned 8 inches and stuck.
            - ICS is in AUTO.
- ICS is in AUTO.
            - An ASYMM. FAULT caused the reactor to run back to 60% then it stopped.
- An ASYMM. FAULT caused the reactor to run back to 60% then it stopped.
    A. Verify greater than or equal to one dropped rod and trip the reactor.
A. Verify greater than or equal to one dropped rod and trip the reactor.
    B. Verify the reactor is critical and if so then ensure all control rods are inserted to at
B. Verify the reactor is critical and if so then ensure all control rods are inserted to at  
        least group 1 at 50% WD.
least group 1 at 50% WD.
    C. Initiate a power reduction to 55% FP.
C. Initiate a power reduction to 55% FP.
    D. Ensure ICS re-ratios feedwater to establish approximately 0 Delta Tc.
D. Ensure ICS re-ratios feedwater to establish approximately 0 Delta Tc.
    A)C
A) C  
    Distractor Analysis:
Distractor Analysis:  
    Distractor d is for abnormal RCP operation.
Distractor d is for abnormal RCP operation.
    Distractors a and b are for a misaligned rod > 9 inches.
Distractors a and b are for a misaligned rod > 9 inches.
    Reference: AP/1/A/1700/015, Unit 1, Vol 1 electronic ref - OX002RG, page 1 of 5.
Reference: AP/1/A/1700/015, Unit 1, Vol 1 electronic ref - OX002RG, page 1 of 5.
    EO - 8 and 9, LP Vol VIII, OP-OC-IC-CRI, page 8 of 62
EO - 8 and 9, LP Vol VIII, OP-OC-IC-CRI, page 8 of 62  
    EO - 8, LP Vol I, OP-OC-CP-018, page 3 of 22
EO - 8, LP Vol I, OP-OC-CP-018, page 3 of 22  
    K/A: 005AA203 (3.5.4.4)
K/A: 005AA203 (3.5.4.4)  
    RO/SRO: Both
RO/SRO: Both  
    Level: C
Level: C  
    Author: rfa
Author: rfa


                                  OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                          02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                          1 POINT
1 POINT  
12. Unit 1 is experiencing a loss of component cooling (CC). Which one of the following
12. Unit 1 is experiencing a loss of component cooling (CC). Which one of the following  
    AUTOMATIC action(s) should have occurred given that:
AUTOMATIC action(s) should have occurred given that:  
            - Letdown Temperature is 138 0 F.
- Letdown Temperature is 1380F.
            - CRD stator temperatures are 190'F.
- CRD stator temperatures are 190'F.
            - CC flow = 500 gpm
- CC flow = 500 gpm  
            - CC Surge Tank Level = 30 inches decreasing.
- CC Surge Tank Level = 30 inches decreasing.
    A. The standby CC pump should have started AND 1HP-5 should have closed.
A. The standby CC pump should have started AND 1HP-5 should have closed.
    B. The standby CC pump should have started AND the reactor should have tripped.
B. The standby CC pump should have started AND the reactor should have tripped.
    C. ALL RCP seal return valves should have closed AND the reactor should have
C. ALL RCP seal return valves should have closed AND the reactor should have  
        tripped.
tripped.
    D. ALL RCP seal return valves should have closed AND 1HP-5 should have closed.
D. ALL RCP seal return valves should have closed AND 1HP-5 should have closed.
    A)A
A) A  
    Distractor Analysis:
Distractor Analysis:  
    The standby CC pump should starts at 575 gpm CC total flow decreasing.
The standby CC pump should starts at 575 gpm CC total flow decreasing.
    1HP-5 closes at letdown temperature > 135 degrees F.
1HP-5 closes at letdown temperature > 135 degrees F.
    All RCP seal return valves close upon loss of both RCP seal injection and CC with RCS
All RCP seal return valves close upon loss of both RCP seal injection and CC with RCS  
    pressure > 400 psig.
pressure > 400 psig.
    IfIAAT >/= two CRD stator temperatures > 180 degrees F then MANUALLY trip the reactor.
If IAAT >/= two CRD stator temperatures > 180 degrees F then MANUALLY trip the reactor.
    Reference: API1IAI1700/020, Unit 1, Vol 1 electronic ref - OX002GX, page 1 of 11.
Reference: API1IAI1700/020, Unit 1, Vol 1 electronic ref - OX002GX, page 1 of 11.
    EO - 17 and 18, LP Vol IV,OP-OC-PNS-CC, page 7 of 23
EO - 17 and 18, LP Vol IV, OP-OC-PNS-CC, page 7 of 23  
    K/A: 008K303 (4.1/4.2)
K/A: 008K303 (4.1/4.2)  
    RO/SRO: Both
RO/SRO: Both  
    Level: C
Level: C  
    Author: rfa
Author: rfa


                                OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                        02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                          1 POINT
1 POINT  
13. Unit 1 conditions:
13. Unit 1 conditions:  
    Time = 0812:
Time = 0812:  
        "* RCS pressure = 1700 psig, decreasing
"*  
        "* All SCMs indicate 00 F.
RCS pressure = 1700 psig, decreasing  
    Time =   0815:
"*  
        "*   CETCs = 584 0 F
All SCMs indicate 00F.
        "*   RCS pressure = 1370 psig, decreasing
Time = 0815:  
        "*   ALL SCMs = 0&deg;F
"*  
        "*   Reactor Power level = 0%
CETCs = 5840F
        "*   All RCPs running; pump amps are cycling
"*  
    Which ONE of the following is the correct operator action?
RCS pressure = 1370 psig, decreasing  
    A.         Leave all RCPs running
"*  
    B.         Trip all RCPs immediately
ALL SCMs = 0&deg;F  
    C.         Trip all RCPs after two minutes
"*  
    D.         Reduce the number of running RCPs to one RCP/loop operation
Reactor Power level = 0%  
    A)A
"*  
    A. Correct: RCPs would be left running because amps not normal
All RCPs running; pump amps are cycling  
    B. Incorrect: Per OMP 1-18, Rule 2 and EOP LOSCM - trip all RCPs if reactor power
Which ONE of the following is the correct operator action?  
      Is < 1% and amps are normal and stable.
A.  
    C. Incorrect: Trip all RCPs. Two minutes would be allowed if saturated following RCP
Leave all RCPs running  
      restart.
B.  
    D. Incorrect: Trip all RCPs. no guidance on securing selectd RCPs
Trip all RCPs immediately  
    Reference: EOPs, Immediate manual Actions tab
C.  
                AP/l/A/1700/16, RCP Abnormal Procedure (Units 2 and 3 only)
Trip all RCPs after two minutes  
D.  
Reduce the number of running RCPs to one RCP/loop operation  
A)A  
A. Correct:  
RCPs would be left running because amps not normal  
B. Incorrect:  
Per OMP 1-18, Rule 2 and EOP LOSCM - trip all RCPs if reactor power  
Is < 1% and amps are normal and stable.
C. Incorrect: Trip all RCPs. Two minutes would be allowed if saturated following RCP  
restart.
D. Incorrect: Trip all RCPs. no guidance on securing selectd RCPs  
Reference: EOPs, Immediate manual Actions tab  
AP/l/A/1700/16, RCP Abnormal Procedure (Units 2 and 3 only)


                                OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                        02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                        1 POINT
1 POINT  
14. Which one of the following correctly list some of the 7 (seven) events which Oconee
14. Which one of the following correctly list some of the 7 (seven) events which Oconee  
    has made provisions to prevent a reactor vessel overpressurizarion at low
has made provisions to prevent a reactor vessel overpressurizarion at low  
    temperatures?
temperatures?  
    A. HP-120 fails open, Temporary loss of DHR, All pressurizer heaters erroneously
A. HP-120 fails open, Temporary loss of DHR, All pressurizer heaters erroneously  
        energized or failed on.
energized or failed on.
    B. Inadvertent HPI initiation, Erroneous opening of a CFT discharge valve, Failure of
B. Inadvertent HPI initiation, Erroneous opening of a CFT discharge valve, Failure of  
        the PORV.
the PORV.
    C. HP-120 fails open, Temporary loss of DHR, Failure of the PORV.
C. HP-120 fails open, Temporary loss of DHR, Failure of the PORV.
    D. Inadvertent HPI initiation, Erroneous opening of a CFT discharge valve, Both trains
D. Inadvertent HPI initiation, Erroneous opening of a CFT discharge valve, Both trains  
        of LTOP are out of service.
of LTOP are out of service.
    A)A
A) A  
    Reference: Lesson Plans Vol 2, OP-OC-CP-017, page 8 of 28.
Reference: Lesson Plans Vol 2, OP-OC-CP-017, page 8 of 28.
    EO - 2
EO - 2  
    K/A: 010K403 (3.8/4.1)
K/A: 010K403 (3.8/4.1)  
    RO/SRO: Both
RO/SRO: Both  
    Level: M
Level: M  
    Author: rfa
Author: rfa


                                OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                      02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                        1 POINT
1 POINT  
15. The following Core Flood Tank parameters exist:
15. The following Core Flood Tank parameters exist:  
    "A" CFT
"A" CFT  
            - Pressure = 629 psig
- Pressure = 629 psig  
            - Level = 13.04 ft.
- Level = 13.04 ft.
    "B" CFT
"B" CFT  
            - Pressure = 619 psig
- Pressure = 619 psig  
            - Level = 12.06 ft.
- Level = 12.06 ft.
    Which ONE of the following describes the adverse effect of the CFT(s) during a large
Which ONE of the following describes the adverse effect of the CFT(s) during a large  
    LOCA?
LOCA?  
    CFT "A"           / CFT "B"
CFT "A"  
    A. may inject nitrogen into the RCS / will dump an inadequate borated water volume.
/ CFT "B"  
    B. will dump an inadequate volume of borated water / will dump at too low of an RCS
A. may inject nitrogen into the RCS / will dump an inadequate borated water volume.
        pressure.
B. will dump an inadequate volume of borated water / will dump at too low of an RCS  
    C. may inject nitrogen into the RCS / will dump borated water at too high of an RCS
pressure.
        pressure
C. may inject nitrogen into the RCS / will dump borated water at too high of an RCS  
    D. will dump borated water at too low of an RCS pressure / will dump an inadequate
pressure  
        amount of borated water.
D. will dump borated water at too low of an RCS pressure / will dump an inadequate  
amount of borated water.


                              OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                    02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                      1 POINT
1 POINT  
A) A
A) A  
A. Correct - "A" CFT pressure is too high >625 psig and will cause the tank to dump
A. Correct - "A" CFT pressure is too high >625 psig and will cause the tank to dump  
  too early and at a higher RCS pressure this will cause nitrogen intrusion into the
too early and at a higher RCS pressure this will cause nitrogen intrusion into the  
    RCS. "B" CFT level is too low which will cause inadequate borated volume to refill
RCS. "B" CFT level is too low which will cause inadequate borated volume to refill  
  the hot spot of the core.
the hot spot of the core.
B. Incorrect - "A" CFT has adequate water volume at 13.04 ft. "B" CFT pressure is
B. Incorrect - "A" CFT has  
  OK.
OK. 
C. Incorrect - First part is true, Second part incorrect because pressure is within
C. Incorrect - First part is
    procedural limit.
procedural limit. 
D. Incorrect - "A" CFT will dump too soon and at too high of an RCS pressure not too
D. Incorrect - "A" CFT will
    low. "B" CFT will dump an inadequate amount because level is to low.
low. "B" CFT will dump
K/A: 011EA109 (4.3/4.3)
adequate water volume at 13.04 ft. "B" CFT pressure is  
T1G2, T1G1
true, Second part incorrect because pressure is within  
Bank
dump too soon and at too high of an RCS pressure not too  
Reference: Facility updated question bank question 45 PNS051702 PNS051702
an inadequate amount because level is to low.
K/A: 011EA109 (4.3/4.3)  
T1G2, T1G1  
Bank  
Reference:  
Facility updated question bank question 45 PNS051702 PNS051702


                                  OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                        02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                          1 POINT
1 POINT
16. Immediately following actuation of ES channels 7 and 8, each RBS header should be
16. Immediately following actuation of ES channels 7  
    throttled to approximately:
throttled to approximately:
    A. 800
and 8, each RBS header should be
    B. 1000
A. 800  
    C. 1200
B. 1000  
    D. 1500
C. 1200  
    A) D
D. 1500  
    A. Incorrect,
A) D
    B. Incorrect, Throttle to this number after swap to RBES.
A.
    C. Incorrect,
B. 
    D. Correct, per EOP
C. 
D.
Incorrect,  
Incorrect, Throttle to this number after swap to RBES.
Incorrect,  
Correct, per EOP


                                OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                        02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                          1 POINT
1 POINT  
17. Which one of the following combinations will result in ALL CRD motors being
17. Which one of the following combinations will result in ALL CRD motors being  
    de-energized?
de-energized?  
    SEE ATTACHMENT: CRD Power Supplies One Line Diagram
SEE ATTACHMENT: CRD Power Supplies One Line Diagram  
    A. Primary breaker "A", DC breaker D, and F contactors open. The "A" breaker
A. Primary breaker "A", DC breaker D, and F contactors open. The "A" breaker  
        de-energizes the "C" DC hold bus, and one set of SCR's to the regulating groups.
de-energizes the "C" DC hold bus, and one set of SCR's to the regulating groups.
        The "D" breaker trip de-energizes the other set of regulating group SCRs by
The "D" breaker trip de-energizes the other set of regulating group SCRs by  
        removing their gating POWER.
removing their gating POWER.
    B. DC breaker, "D", and the "F" contactors open. This scheme de-energizes both DC
B. DC breaker, "D", and the "F" contactors open. This scheme de-energizes both DC  
        hold buses, and both sets of regulation group SCRs by removing their gating
hold buses, and both sets of regulation group SCRs by removing their gating  
        POWER.
POWER.
    C. Primary breaker "B", DC breaker D, and F contactors open. The "B" breaker
C. Primary breaker "B", DC breaker D, and F contactors open. The "B" breaker  
        de-energizes the "C" DC hold bus, and one set of SCR's to the regulating groups.
de-energizes the "C" DC hold bus, and one set of SCR's to the regulating groups.
        The "D"breaker trip de-energizes the other set of regulating group SCRs by
The "D" breaker trip de-energizes the other set of regulating group SCRs by  
        removing their gating SUPPLIES.
removing their gating SUPPLIES.
    D. DC breaker, "D", and the "F" contactors open. This scheme de-energizes both DC
D. DC breaker, "D", and the "F" contactors open. This scheme de-energizes both DC  
        hold buses, and both sets of regulation group SCRs by removing their gating
hold buses, and both sets of regulation group SCRs by removing their gating  
        SUPPLIES.
SUPPLIES.
    A)A
A) A  
    REFERENCE REQUIRED: A one line diagram of the CRD groups power supplies.
REFERENCE REQUIRED: A one line diagram of the CRD groups power supplies.
    Reference: Lesson Plans Vol VIII, OP-OC-IC-RPS, page 45 of 56.
Reference: Lesson Plans Vol VIII, OP-OC-IC-RPS, page 45 of 56.
    EO - 20.2
EO - 20.2  
    K/A: 012K201 (3.3/3.7)
K/A: 012K201 (3.3/3.7)  
    RO/SRO: BOTH
RO/SRO: BOTH  
    Level: C
Level: C  
    Author: rfa
Author: rfa


  z
z
1;
1;


                                OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                        02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                        1 POINT
1 POINT  
18. Which one of the following is correct concerning the RPS "MANUAL BYPASS"?
18. Which one of the following is correct concerning the RPS "MANUAL BYPASS"?  
    A.       Takes both channels out of "MANUAL BYPASS" when the second RPS
A.  
              channel is placed in "MANUAL BYPASS".
Takes both channels out of "MANUAL BYPASS" when the second RPS  
    B.       The first RPS channel in "MANUAL BYPASS" will trip the second RPS
channel is placed in "MANUAL BYPASS".
              channels Reactor Trip Module, ifthat channel is placed in "MANUAL
B.  
              BYPASS".
The first RPS channel in "MANUAL BYPASS" will trip the second RPS  
    C.       The first RPS channel placed in "MANUAL BYPASS" administratively
channels Reactor Trip Module, if that channel is placed in "MANUAL  
              prevents placing any additional channels in "MANUAL BYPASS".
BYPASS".
    D.       The reactor trips if a second RPS channel is placed in "MANUAL BYPASS".
C.  
    A) C
The first RPS channel placed in "MANUAL BYPASS" administratively  
    A. Admin and electrical interlock prevent two channels in bypass at same time see (C.)
prevents placing any additional channels in "MANUAL BYPASS".
    B. Admin and electrical interlock prevent two channels in bypass at same time see (C.)
D.  
    C. CORRECT: this interlock will actuate a relay that will prevent any of the remaining
The reactor trips if a second RPS channel is placed in "MANUAL BYPASS".
    three channels to be placed in bypass.
A) C  
    D. Admin and electrical interlock prevent two channels in bypass at same time see (C.)
A. Admin and electrical interlock prevent two channels in bypass at same time see (C.)  
    Reference: Vol VIII, RPS
B. Admin and electrical interlock prevent two channels in bypass at same time see (C.)  
C. CORRECT: this interlock will actuate a relay that will prevent any of the remaining  
three channels to be placed in bypass.
D. Admin and electrical interlock prevent two channels in bypass at same time see (C.)
Reference: Vol VIII, RPS


                                  OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                        02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                          1 POINT
1 POINT  
19. Which one of the following correctly describes the operation of the LPI Trip Bistable?
19. Which one of the following correctly describes the operation of the LPI Trip Bistable?  
    A. It allows for manual bypassing when RC pressure is < 900 psig. Once tripped, it
A. It allows for manual bypassing when RC pressure is < 900 psig. Once tripped, it  
        must be manually reset. Its output is fed through an "OR" gate to digitial channels 3
must be manually reset. Its output is fed through an "OR" gate to digitial channels 3  
        &4.
&4.
    B. Once tripped, it must be manually reset. The bypass is automatically removed when
B. Once tripped, it must be manually reset. The bypass is automatically removed when  
        RC pressure increases above 550 psig. Its output is fed through an "OR" gate to
RC pressure increases above 550 psig. Its output is fed through an "OR" gate to  
        digitial channels 3 & 4.
digitial channels 3 & 4.
    C. It allows for manual bypassing when RC pressure is < 550 psig. The bypass is
C. It allows for manual bypassing when RC pressure is < 550 psig. The bypass is  
        automatically removed when RC pressure increases above 900 psig.
automatically removed when RC pressure increases above 900 psig.
    D. It will trip if RC pressure decreases below 550 psig unless bypassed. Once tripped,
D. It will trip if RC pressure decreases below 550 psig unless bypassed. Once tripped,  
        it must be manually reset.
it must be manually reset.
    A) D
A) D  
    Reference: Lesson Plans Vol VIII, OP-OC-IC-ES, page 15 of 33.
Reference: Lesson Plans Vol VIII, OP-OC-IC-ES, page 15 of 33.
    EO - 3.1
EO - 3.1  
    K/A: 013A301 (3.7/3.9)
K/A: 013A301 (3.7/3.9)  
    RO/SRO: BOTH
RO/SRO: BOTH  
    Level: C
Level: C  
    Author: rfa
Author: rfa


                                  OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                        02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                          1 POINT
1 POINT  
20. Given the following plant conditions:
20. Given the following plant conditions:  
        - The reactor is shutdown.
- The reactor is shutdown.
        - The "HPI BYPASS PERMIT" Stat Alarm is in.
- The "HPI BYPASS PERMIT" Stat Alarm is in.
        - At 1700 psig, the operator bypasses all three channels for both trains of HPI.
- At 1700 psig, the operator bypasses all three channels for both trains of HPI.
        - An RCP seal leak then develops, causing the operator to trip the affected RCP
- An RCP seal leak then develops, causing the operator to trip the affected RCP  
          and increase the plant cooldown rate.
and increase the plant cooldown rate.
        - RCS pressure decreases to 900 psig.
- RCS pressure decreases to 900 psig.
        - Reactor Building pressure increases to 3.4 psig
- Reactor Building pressure increases to 3.4 psig  
    Select the appropriate ES response:
Select the appropriate ES response:  
    A.         HPI initiates on low RCS pressure due to the RCS leak.
A.  
    B.         HPI initiates on high reactor building pressure.
HPI initiates on low RCS pressure due to the RCS leak.
    C.         LPI initiates on low RCS pressure due to the RCS leak.
B.  
    D.         RBS initiates on high reactor building pressure.
HPI initiates on high reactor building pressure.
    A) B
C.  
    A. HPI was bypassed and will not actuate on RCS pressure.
LPI initiates on low RCS pressure due to the RCS leak.
    B. CORRECT: HPI will actuate on high RB pressure even if bypassed.
D.  
    C. LPI will actuate on high RB pressure. The low RCS pressure LPI setpoint is not
RBS initiates on high reactor building pressure.
      actuated at this pressure
A) B  
    D. RBS will not trip at this pressure.
A. HPI was bypassed and will not actuate on RCS pressure.
    Reference: Lesson Plan, IC-ES: Page 14 and 15
B. CORRECT: HPI will actuate on high RB pressure even if bypassed.
C. LPI will actuate on high RB pressure. The low RCS pressure LPI setpoint is not  
actuated at this pressure  
D. RBS will not trip at this pressure.
Reference: Lesson Plan, IC-ES: Page 14 and 15


                                    OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                            02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                            1 POINT
1 POINT  
21. From the group below, which ONE of the following lists of signals would NOT provide
21. From the group below, which ONE of the following lists of signals would NOT provide  
    an initiating logic path to generate a Load Shed signal?
an initiating logic path to generate a Load Shed signal?  
        1. ES 1 actuation
1. ES 1 actuation  
        2. MFB #1 undervoltage for 23 seconds
2. MFB #1 undervoltage for 23 seconds  
        3. MFB #2 undervoltage for 22 seconds
3. MFB #2 undervoltage for 22 seconds  
        4. Breakers NI and El open
4. Breakers NI and El open  
        5. Startup and normal source undervoltage
5. Startup and normal source undervoltage  
        6. STAR relay
6. STAR relay  
    A. 5and6
A. 5and6  
    B. 2and3
B. 2and3  
    C. 1,2, and 4
C. 1,2, and 4  
    D. 1,3, and 6
D. 1,3, and 6  
    A) D
A) D  
    A. Incorrect - This path would satisfy the   logic for load shed
A. Incorrect - This path would satisfy the logic for load shed  
    B. Incorrect - This path would satisfy the   logic for load shed via a MFBMP signal
B. Incorrect - This path would satisfy the logic for load shed via a MFBMP signal  
    C. Incorrect - This path would satisfy the   logic for load shed
C. Incorrect - This path would satisfy the logic for load shed  
    D. Correct - MFB #1 would be energized       and the logic would not be completed.
D. Correct - MFB #1 would be energized and the logic would not be completed.
    Note:
Note:  
    #1 logic path - A, E
#1 logic path - A, E  
    #2 logic path - A, B and D
#2 logic path - A, B and D  
    #3 logic path - B and C
#3 logic path - B and C  
    K/A: 013K101 (4.2/4.2)
K/A: 013K101 (4.2/4.2)  
    T2G1, T2G1
T2G1, T2G1  
    Bank
Bank  
    Reference:     Facility updated question bank 65 EL050501 EL050501
Reference:  
Facility updated question bank 65 EL050501 EL050501


                                OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                        02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                          1 POINT
1 POINT  
22. Which ONE of the following identifies the rod position indicating (RPI) system selected
22. Which ONE of the following identifies the rod position indicating (RPI) system selected  
    on the Control Rod Position Indication Panel for normal monitoring and describe why
on the Control Rod Position Indication Panel for normal monitoring and describe why  
    this one is selected?
this one is selected?  
    A. ABSOLUTE - allows immediate verification that all control rods are fully inserted on
A. ABSOLUTE - allows immediate verification that all control rods are fully inserted on  
        a reactor trip.
a reactor trip.
    B. ABSOLUTE - allows continuous monitoring of sequence fault conditions during
B. ABSOLUTE - allows continuous monitoring of sequence fault conditions during  
        control rod motion.
control rod motion.
    C. RELATIVE - allows immediate verification that all control rods are fully inserted on a
C. RELATIVE - allows immediate verification that all control rods are fully inserted on a  
        reactor trip.
reactor trip.
    D. RELATIVE-- allows continuous monitoring of sequence fault conditions during
D. RELATIVE-- allows continuous monitoring of sequence fault conditions during  
        control rod motion.
control rod motion.
    A)A
A) A  
    A. Correct - API reed switch array provides physical position of rods.
A. Correct - API reed switch array provides physical position of rods.
    B. Incorrect - Sequence fault monitoring is provided and by RPI.
B. Incorrect - Sequence fault monitoring is provided and by RPI.
    C. Incorrect - RPI will not respond to rod insertion on reactor trip due to CRD
C. Incorrect - RPI will not respond to rod insertion on reactor trip due to CRD  
        de-energizing... step motor of RPI will not respond because CRD phases are not
de-energizing... step motor of RPI will not respond because CRD phases are not  
        energized.
energized.
    D. Incorrect - RPI will not respond as indicated in "C" above.
D. Incorrect - RPI will not respond as indicated in "C" above.
    K/A: 014A102 (3.2/3.6)
K/A: 014A102 (3.2/3.6)  
    RO - T2G2
RO - T2G2  
    Bank
Bank  
    Reference: Facility updated question bank question 36 IC020601     IC020601
Reference: Facility updated question bank question 36 IC020601  
IC020601


                                  OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                          02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                          1 POINT
1 POINT  
23. Following a loss of off site power, what are the indications, if any, that Control Rod
23. Following a loss of off site power, what are the indications, if any, that Control Rod  
    groups 1 through 7 are fully inserted?
groups 1 through 7 are fully inserted?  
    A.       The CRD panel is de-energized, there are no indications that CRD groups 1
A.  
              through 7 are fully inserted.
The CRD panel is de-energized, there are no indications that CRD groups 1  
    B.       All in-limit lights on the position indication panel and the diamond control
through 7 are fully inserted.
              panel are on.
B.  
    C.       Only the in-limit lights on the position indication panel are on.
All in-limit lights on the position indication panel and the diamond control  
    D.       Only the in-limit lights on the diamond control panel are on.
panel are on.
    A) B
C.  
    Reasons:
Only the in-limit lights on the position indication panel are on.
    B. Correct, All lights would be operable.
D.  
    Reference: Vol V, OP/O/A/1 105/009, Control Rod Drive System
Only the in-limit lights on the diamond control panel are on.
A) B  
Reasons:  
B. Correct, All lights would be operable.
Reference: Vol V, OP/O/A/1 105/009, Control Rod Drive System


                                OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                        02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                          1 POINT
1 POINT
24.
24.
    Given the following plant conditions:
Given the following plant conditions:  
        - A power increase is in progress.
- A power increase is in progress.
        - Group 7 rods are at 50% withdrawn
- Group 7 rods are at 50% withdrawn  
        - Rod 7-4 is stuck at 47% withdrawn.
- Rod 7-4 is stuck at 47% withdrawn.
        - PI panel indication is selected to RPI.
- PI panel indication is selected to RPI.
    Which one of the following would indicate that rod 7-4 is NOT moving?
Which one of the following would indicate that rod 7-4 is NOT moving?  
    A.       Individual control rod position indication on PI panel.
A.  
    B.       Individual control rod position indication on the plant computer.
Individual control rod position indication on PI panel.
    C.       Control rod group average indication on the plant computer.
B.  
    D.       Individual control rod position on zone reference indication.
Individual control rod position indication on the plant computer.
    A) D
C.  
    Reason:
Control rod group average indication on the plant computer.
    A. & B.   With RPI selected neither the PI panel or plant computer will
D.  
              indicate actual rod position, only rod position as a function of field
Individual control rod position on zone reference indication.
              rotation.
A) D  
    C.       The group average cannot determine which particular rod is not moving.
Reason:  
    D. CORRECT: the zone reference would show all the other rods at the 50% zone
A. & B.  
    reference point and rod 7-4 would not have reached the 50 % level.
With RPI selected neither the PI panel or plant computer will  
    Reference: Vol VIII, Control Rod Indication
indicate actual rod position, only rod position as a function of field  
                AOP Vol 1, AP/1/A/1700/015
rotation.
                MEM
C.  
The group average cannot determine which particular rod is not moving.
D. CORRECT: the zone reference would show all the other rods at the 50% zone  
reference point and rod 7-4 would not have reached the 50 % level.
Reference: Vol VIII, Control Rod Indication  
AOP Vol 1, AP/1/A/1700/015  
MEM


                                OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                        02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                          1 POINT
1 POINT  
25. Which one of the following is correct following a power supply failure to the NIs?
25. Which one of the following is correct following a power supply failure to the NIs?  
    A. It causes a complete loss of output signal and computer alarms fail high.
A. It causes a complete loss of output signal and computer alarms fail high.
    B. It causes a complete loss of output signal and statalarms fail in the NO alarm state.
B. It causes a complete loss of output signal and statalarms fail in the NO alarm state.
    C. It causes a complete loss of output signal and statalarms actuate.
C. It causes a complete loss of output signal and statalarms actuate.
    D. Statalarms fail in the NO alarm state and computer alarms fail high.
D. Statalarms fail in the NO alarm state and computer alarms fail high.
    A) C
A) C  
    Reference: Lesson Plans Vol VIII, OP-OC-IC-NI, page 39 of 41.
Reference: Lesson Plans Vol VIII, OP-OC-IC-NI, page 39 of 41.
    EO - 27.1
EO - 27.1  
    K/A: 015A201 (3.5/3.9)
K/A: 015A201 (3.5/3.9)  
    RO/SRO: BOTH
RO/SRO: BOTH  
    Level: M
Level: M  
    Author: rfa
Author: rfa


                                OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                        02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                          1 POINT
1 POINT
26. Which one of the following is the correct response for a reactor at 100% RTP with a
26. Which one of the following is the correct response for a reactor at 100%  
    +25% axial power imbalance?
+25% axial power imbalance?
    Power at the top of the core is approximately     % and at the bottom it is       %
RTP with a
    A. 25/75
Power at the top of the core is approximately  
    B. 75/25
% and at the bottom it is  
    C. 63/37
%  
    D. 37/63
A. 25/75  
    A) C
B. 75/25  
    Distractor Analysis:
C. 63/37  
    Improved TS defines Axial Power Imbalance as follows. The power at the top half of the core,
D. 37/63  
    expressed as a percentage of RTP minus the power in the bottom half of the core, expressed
A) C  
    as a percentage of RTP.
Distractor Analysis:  
    Top half minus bottom half = imbalance.
Improved TS defines Axial Power Imbalance as follows. The power at the top half of the core,  
    Solution:     a - b = 25%
expressed as a percentage of RTP minus the power in the bottom half of the core, expressed  
                  a + b = 100%
as a percentage of RTP.
    a = 62.5, b = 37.5
Top half minus bottom half = imbalance.
    Reference: Lesson Plans Vol 2, OP-OC-CP-01 8, page 6 of 22.
Solution:
    EO - 1
a - b = 25%  
    K/A: 015A304 (3.3/3.5)
a + b = 100%
    RO/SRO: Common
a = 62.5, b = 37.5  
    Level: C
Reference: Lesson Plans Vol 2, OP-OC-CP-01 8, page 6 of 22.
    Author: rfa
EO - 1  
K/A: 015A304 (3.3/3.5)  
RO/SRO: Common  
Level: C  
Author: rfa


                              OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                      02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                        1 POINT
1 POINT  
27. Unit 2 conditions:
27. Unit 2 conditions:  
    INITIAL CONDITIONS:
INITIAL CONDITIONS:  
      - Reactor power = 45%
- Reactor power = 45%  
    CURRENT CONDITIONS:
CURRENT CONDITIONS:  
      - Reactor power = 45%
- Reactor power = 45%  
      - All RCPs operating
- All RCPs operating  
      - 2B2 RCP experiences a 9% impeller degradation (instantaneously)
- 2B2 RCP experiences a 9% impeller degradation (instantaneously)  
    Which ONE of the following is the correct signal the ICS will receive for Tave input?
Which ONE of the following is the correct signal the ICS will receive for Tave input?  
    A. Loop A Tave
A. Loop A Tave  
    B. Loop B Tave
B. Loop B Tave  
    C. Tave is blocked to the ICS
C. Tave is blocked to the ICS  
    D. An average of Loop A and B Tave
D. An average of Loop A and B Tave  
    A)D
A) D  
    K/A: 015AK105 (2.7/3.3)
K/A: 015AK105 (2.7/3.3)  
    TIG1, T1G1
TIG1, T1G1  
    Bank
Bank  
    Reference: Facility updated question bank question 53 IC083202 IC083202
Reference:  
                  ASYMMETRIC ROD RUNBACK LOGIC OP-OC-CRI-5.
Facility updated question bank question 53 IC083202 IC083202  
ASYMMETRIC ROD RUNBACK LOGIC OP-OC-CRI-5.


                                OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                        02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                          1 POINT
1 POINT  
28. Which one of the following groups of power reduction rates is correct when an
28. Which one of the following groups of power reduction rates is correct when an  
    automatic load limit is received?
automatic load limit is received?  
    A. Loss of RC flow - 20%/min, Loss of RCPs - 25%/min, Maximum Runback 20%/min.
A. Loss of RC flow - 20%/min, Loss of RCPs - 25%/min, Maximum Runback 20%/min.
    B. Loss of FWP - 20%/min, Loss of RC flow - 25%/min, Loss of RCPs - 20%/min.
B. Loss of FWP - 20%/min, Loss of RC flow - 25%/min, Loss of RCPs - 20%/min.
    C. Loss of RC flow - 20%/min, Loss of RCPs - 25%/min, Maximum Runback 25%/min.
C. Loss of RC flow - 20%/min, Loss of RCPs - 25%/min, Maximum Runback 25%/min.
    D. Loss of FWP - 25%/min, Loss of RC flow - 25%/min, Loss of RCPs - 20%/min.
D. Loss of FWP - 25%/min, Loss of RC flow - 25%/min, Loss of RCPs - 20%/min.
    A)A
A) A  
    Reference: Lesson Plans Book IIof II,Vol III, OP-OC-STG-ICS, page 27-28.
Reference: Lesson Plans Book II of II, Vol III, OP-OC-STG-ICS, page 27-28.
    EO - 3.2
EO - 3.2  
    K/A: 015K105 (3.9/3.9)
K/A: 015K105 (3.9/3.9)  
    RO/SRO: BOTH
RO/SRO: BOTH  
    Level: M
Level: M  
    Author: rfa
Author: rfa


                                OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                        02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                          1 POINT
1 POINT  
29. Which one of the following statements is correct concerning the Smart Automatic
29. Which one of the following statements is correct concerning the Smart Automatic  
    Signal Selector (SASS)?
Signal Selector (SASS)?  
    A. If PZR level #1 is selected then the SASS input will be from that selected level
A. If PZR level #1 is selected then the SASS input will be from that selected level  
        channel and the second SASS input will be from level #3. If level #2 is selected
channel and the second SASS input will be from level #3. If level #2 is selected  
        then the second SASS input defaults to level #1. If level #3 is selected and #3
then the second SASS input defaults to level #1. If level #3 is selected and #3  
        fails, SASS will automatically select PZR level 2, and the operator will have the
fails, SASS will automatically select PZR level 2, and the operator will have the  
        ability to manually select PZR level #1.
ability to manually select PZR level #1.
    B. If PZR level #3 is selected then the SASS input will be from that selected level
B. If PZR level #3 is selected then the SASS input will be from that selected level  
        channel and the second SASS input will be from level #1. If level #2 is selected
channel and the second SASS input will be from level #1. If level #2 is selected  
        then the second SASS input defaults to level #1. Iflevel #1 is selected and #1 fails,
then the second SASS input defaults to level #1. If level #1 is selected and #1 fails,  
        SASS will automatically select PZR level 3, and the operator will have the ability to
SASS will automatically select PZR level 3, and the operator will have the ability to  
        manually select PZR level #2.
manually select PZR level #2.
    C. If PZR level #1 or 2 is selected then the SASS input will be from that selected level
C. If PZR level #1 or 2 is selected then the SASS input will be from that selected level  
        channel and the second SASS input will be from level #3. If level #2 is selected
channel and the second SASS input will be from level #3. If level #2 is selected  
        then the second SASS input defaults to level #1. If level #1 is selected and #1
then the second SASS input defaults to level #1. If level #1 is selected and #1  
        fails, SASS will automatically select PZR level 2.
fails, SASS will automatically select PZR level 2.
    D. If PZR level #1 or 2 is selected then the SASS input will be from that selected level
D. If PZR level #1 or 2 is selected then the SASS input will be from that selected level  
        channel and the second SASS input will be from level #3. If level #3 is selected
channel and the second SASS input will be from level #3. If level #3 is selected  
        then the second SASS input defaults to level #1. If level #3 is selected and #3
then the second SASS input defaults to level #1. If level #3 is selected and #3  
        fails, SASS will automatically select PZR level 1.
fails, SASS will automatically select PZR level 1.
    A) D
A) D  
    Reference: Lesson Plans Vol VIII, OP-OC-IC-RCI , page 20 of 62.
Reference: Lesson Plans Vol VIII, OP-OC-IC-RCI , page 20 of 62.
    EO - 3
EO - 3  
    K/A: 016A301 (2.9/2.9)
K/A: 016A301 (2.9/2.9)  
    RO/SRO: BOTH
RO/SRO: BOTH  
    Level: C
Level: C  
    Author: rfa
Author: rfa


                                  OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                          02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                            1 POINT
1 POINT  
30. Given the following RCS instruments, during full power operation:
30. Given the following RCS instruments, during full power operation:
          INSTRUMENT                     INITIAL          FINAL (rapid change)
INSTRUMENT  
          PZR Level Ch 1                 220                  208
PZR Level Ch 1  
          RCS Tcold (NR)                 555                  557
RCS Tcold (NR)  
          PZR Temp                       648                  665
PZR Temp  
          RCS Press (NR)                 2155                2135
RCS Press (NR)  
    Which instrument would the Smart Auto Signal Selector (SASS) module perform an
Which instrument would  
    automatic TRANSFER?
automatic TRANSFER?
    A.        PZR Level
INITIAL
    B.        RCS Tcold
220
    C.        PZR Temp
555
    D.        RCS Press
648
    A) A
2155
    A. CORRECT, Pressurizer Level is only one SASS controlled.
FINAL (rapid change)
    B. Non SASS controlled.
208
    C. Non SASS controlled.
557
    D. Non SASS controlled.
665
    Reference: Vol. VIII, Instrumentation & Controls, Reactor Coolant Instrumentation
2135
the Smart Auto Signal Selector (SASS) module perform an
PZR Level  
RCS Tcold  
PZR Temp  
RCS Press
CORRECT, Pressurizer  
Non SASS controlled.
Non SASS controlled.
Non SASS controlled.
Level is only one SASS controlled.
Reference: Vol. VIII, Instrumentation & Controls, Reactor Coolant Instrumentation
A. 
B. 
C. 
D.
A) A
A. 
B. 
C. 
D.


                                OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                        02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                        1 POINT
1 POINT  
31. Which one of the following is a correct list of RCS pressure indications and a portion of
31. Which one of the following is a correct list of RCS pressure indications and a portion of  
    what they feed?
what they feed?  
    A. RCS WR Pressure "A" feeds: WR Recorder, pressurizer spray and heaters.
A. RCS WR Pressure "A" feeds: WR Recorder, pressurizer spray and heaters.
    B. RCS WR Pressure "A" feeds: WR Recorder, LPI interlock, and pressurizer heaters.
B. RCS WR Pressure "A" feeds: WR Recorder, LPI interlock, and pressurizer heaters.
    C. RCS NR Pressure "A" feeds: NR Recorder, pressurizer spray, heaters and PORV.
C. RCS NR Pressure "A" feeds: NR Recorder, pressurizer spray, heaters and PORV.
    D. RCS NR Pressure "A" feeds: NR Recorder, pressurizer spray, LPI interlock, and
D. RCS NR Pressure "A" feeds: NR Recorder, pressurizer spray, LPI interlock, and  
        PORV.
PORV.
    A)C
A) C  
    Reference: Lesson Plans Vol 2, OP-OC-CP-01 2, page 24 of 32.
Reference: Lesson Plans Vol 2, OP-OC-CP-01 2, page 24 of 32.
    EO - 22 (OP-OC-lC-RCI, Vol VIII, Page 9 of 62)
EO - 22 (OP-OC-lC-RCI, Vol VIII, Page 9 of 62)  
    K/A: 016K403 (2.8/2.9) ( NNIS Pressure Input to control systems)
K/A: 016K403 (2.8/2.9) ( NNIS Pressure Input to control systems)  
    RO/SRO: Both
RO/SRO: Both  
    Level: M
Level: M  
    Author: rfa
Author: rfa


                    Enclosure 3.39
Enclosure 3.39
                                                OP/O/A/ 108/001
LDST Pressure Vs. Level (All Units)
          LDST Pressure Vs. Level (All Units)  Page 1 of 2
OP/O/A/ 108/001  
                (Instrument Error Included)
Page 1 of 2
    100
(Instrument Error Included)
    90
LDST Indicated Level (inches)
    80
100  
    70
90  
  Co
80  
    60
70
  C)
60
'-4
50
  Co
40
  (A 50
Co  
C.)
C)  
'-4
'-4  
H
Co  
Co
(A  
    40
C.)  
'-4  
H  
Co  
A
A
    30
30  
    20
20  
    10
10  
      0
0
        LDST Indicated Level (inches)
11040261.tcw  
                                              110 40261.tcw
Rev. 5  
                                              Rev. 5
RTR 1/18/01
                                              RTR 1/18/01


                                        Enclosure 3.39                       OP/O/A/I 108/001
Enclosure 3.39  
                            LDST Pressure Vs. Level (All Units)               Page 2 of 2
OP/O/A/I 108/001  
1. Minimum LDST level when a HPI Pump is operating is 55" OR actions should be take to increase
LDST Pressure Vs. Level (All Units)  
  LDST level > 55". (3)
Page 2 of 2  
2. When HPI Pumps are operating: (3)
1. Minimum LDST level when a HPI Pump is operating is 55" OR actions should be take to increase  
  2.1   LDST pressure and level should be within limits of "LDST Pressure Vs. Level" curves to
LDST level > 55". (3)  
          prevent gas from entering HPI Pumps in event of HPI Emergency Injection.
2.  
          *   Normal LDST operation pressure should NOT exceed 50 psig.
When HPI Pumps are operating: (3)  
          "* "LDST Pressure Vs. Level" curves are also located on OAC.
2.1  
  2.2   IF LDST pressure CANNOT be maintained &#x17d;_0 psig, a LDST vent path must be established.
LDST pressure and level should be within limits of "LDST Pressure Vs. Level" curves to  
          *   (1)(2)(3)GWD-19 (LDST VENT) AND (1)(2)(3)GWD-20 (LDST Vent Blk) must be
prevent gas from entering HPI Pumps in event of HPI Emergency Injection.
              open.
*  
3. If LDST Pressure Vs. Level is above and to the left of Curve 1, then declare BOTH trains of HPI
Normal LDST operation pressure should NOT exceed 50 psig.
  INOPERABLE.
"* "LDST Pressure Vs. Level" curves are also located on OAC.
  3.1   Immediately depressurize LDST below Curve 1.
2.2  
  3.2   Refer to TS 3.0.3 for shutdown requirements.
IF LDST pressure CANNOT be maintained &#x17d;_ 0 psig, a LDST vent path must be established.
  3.3   Make notifications as required by OMP 1-14 (Notifications).
*  
4. If LDST Pressure Vs. Level is below and the right of Curve 2, then perform the following:
(1)(2)(3)GWD-19 (LDST VENT) AND (1)(2)(3)GWD-20 (LDST Vent Blk) must be  
  4.1   Pressurize LDST back into normal operating region of the "LDST Pressure Vs. Level" curve
open.
          unless LDST is being depressurized intentionally by an approved procedure.
3. If LDST Pressure Vs. Level is above and to the left of Curve 1, then declare BOTH trains of HPI  
CAUTION:     If LDST Pressure Vs. Level is below and to the right of curve 2, it may be possible to
INOPERABLE.
            draw a vacuum in LDST resulting in HPI Pump damage due to inadequate NPSH. This
3.1  
            could occur even though sufficient LDST level exists.
Immediately depressurize LDST below Curve 1.
  4.2   Carry a note on the Turnover Sheet to the effect that if a transient occurs which requires
3.2  
          additional HPI flow, immediately open (1)(2)(3)HP-24 and (1)(2)(3)HP-25 to provide an
Refer to TS 3.0.3 for shutdown requirements.
          adequate suction source to HPI Pumps.
3.3  
Make notifications as required by OMP 1-14 (Notifications).
4.  
If LDST Pressure Vs. Level is below and the right of Curve 2, then perform the following:  
4.1  
Pressurize LDST back into normal operating region of the "LDST Pressure Vs. Level" curve  
unless LDST is being depressurized intentionally by an approved procedure.
CAUTION:  
If LDST Pressure Vs. Level is below and to the right of curve 2, it may be possible to  
draw a vacuum in LDST resulting in HPI Pump damage due to inadequate NPSH. This  
could occur even though sufficient LDST level exists.
4.2  
Carry a note on the Turnover Sheet to the effect that if a transient occurs which requires  
additional HPI flow, immediately open (1)(2)(3)HP-24 and (1)(2)(3)HP-25 to provide an  
adequate suction source to HPI Pumps.


                                                                              LCO Applicability
LCO Applicability  
                                                                                            3.0
3.0
3.0 LIMITING CONDITION FOR OPERATION (LCO) APPLICABILITY
3.0 LIMITING CONDITION FOR OPERATION (LCO) APPLICABILITY  
LCO 3.0.1         LCOs shall be met during the MODES or other specified conditions in the
LCO 3.0.1  
                  Applicability, except as provided in LCO 3.0.2 and LCO 3.0.7.
LCOs shall be met during the MODES or other specified conditions in the  
LCO 3.0.2         Upon discovery of a failure to meet an LCO, the Required Actions of the
Applicability, except as provided in LCO 3.0.2 and LCO 3.0.7.
                  associated Conditions shall be met, except as provided in LCO 3.0.5 and
LCO 3.0.2  
                  LCO 3.0.6.
Upon discovery of a failure to meet an LCO, the Required Actions of the  
                  If the LCO is met or is no longer applicable prior to expiration of the
associated Conditions shall be met, except as provided in LCO 3.0.5 and  
                  specified Completion Time(s), completion of the Required Action(s) is not
LCO 3.0.6.
                  required, unless otherwise stated.
If the LCO is met or is no longer applicable prior to expiration of the  
LCO 3.0.3         When an LCO is not met and the associated ACTIONS are not met, an
specified Completion Time(s), completion of the Required Action(s) is not  
                  associated ACTION is not provided, or if directed by the associated
required, unless otherwise stated.
                  ACTIONS, the unit shall be placed in a MODE or other specified
LCO 3.0.3  
                  condition in which the LCO is not applicable. Action shall be initiated
When an LCO is not met and the associated ACTIONS are not met, an  
                  within 1 hour to place the unit, as applicable, in:
associated ACTION is not provided, or if directed by the associated  
                  a.     MODE 3 within 12 hours;
ACTIONS, the unit shall be placed in a MODE or other specified  
                  b.     MODE 4 within 18 hours; and
condition in which the LCO is not applicable. Action shall be initiated  
                  c.     MODE 5 within 37 hours.
within 1 hour to place the unit, as applicable, in:  
                  Exceptions to this Specification are stated in the individual Specifications.
a.  
                  Where corrective measures are completed that permit operation in
MODE 3 within 12 hours;  
                  accordance with the LCO or ACTIONS, completion of the actions
b.  
                  required by LCO 3.0.3 is not required.
MODE 4 within 18 hours; and  
                  LCO 3.0.3 is only applicable in MODES 1, 2, 3, and 4.
c.  
LCO 3.0.4         When an LCO is not met, entry into a MODE or other specified condition
MODE 5 within 37 hours.
                  in the Applicability shall not be made except when the associated
Exceptions to this Specification are stated in the individual Specifications.
                  ACTIONS to be entered permit continued operation in the MODE or other
Where corrective measures are completed that permit operation in  
                  specified condition in the Applicability for an unlimited period of time.
accordance with the LCO or ACTIONS, completion of the actions  
                  This Specification shall not prevent changes in MODES or other specified
required by LCO 3.0.3 is not required.
                  conditions in the Applicability that are required to comply with ACTIONS
LCO 3.0.3 is only applicable in MODES 1, 2, 3, and 4.
                  or that are part of a shutdown of the unit.
LCO 3.0.4  
OCONEE UNITS 1, 2, & 3                 3.0-1               Amendment Nos. 300, 300, & 300
When an LCO is not met, entry into a MODE or other specified condition  
in the Applicability shall not be made except when the associated  
ACTIONS to be entered permit continued operation in the MODE or other  
specified condition in the Applicability for an unlimited period of time.
This Specification shall not prevent changes in MODES or other specified  
conditions in the Applicability that are required to comply with ACTIONS  
or that are part of a shutdown of the unit.
Amendment Nos. 300, 300, & 300
OCONEE UNITS 1, 2, & 3
3.0-1


                                                                              LCO Applicability
LCO Applicability  
                                                                                            3.0
3.0
3.0 LCO APPLICABILITY
3.0 LCO APPLICABILITY  
LCO 3.0.4         Exceptions to this Specification are stated in the individual Specifications.
LCO 3.0.4  
  (continued)
Exceptions to this Specification are stated in the individual Specifications.
                  LCO 3.0.4 is only applicable for entry into a MODE or other specified
(continued)  
                  condition in the Applicability in MODES 1, 2, 3, and 4.
LCO 3.0.4 is only applicable for entry into a MODE or other specified  
LCO 3.0.5         Equipment removed from service or declared inoperable to comply with
condition in the Applicability in MODES 1, 2, 3, and 4.
                  ACTIONS may be returned to service under administrative control solely
LCO 3.0.5  
                  to perform testing required to demonstrate its OPERABILITY or the
Equipment removed from service or declared inoperable to comply with  
                  OPERABILITY of other equipment. This is an exception to LCO 3.0.2 for
ACTIONS may be returned to service under administrative control solely  
                  the system returned to service under administrative control to perform the
to perform testing required to demonstrate its OPERABILITY or the  
                  testing required to demonstrate OPERABILITY.
OPERABILITY of other equipment. This is an exception to LCO 3.0.2 for  
LCO 3.0.6         When a supported system LCO is not met solely due to a support system
the system returned to service under administrative control to perform the  
                    LCO not being met, the Conditions and Required Actions associated with
testing required to demonstrate OPERABILITY.
                    this supported system are not required to be entered. Only the support
LCO 3.0.6  
                    system LCO ACTIONS are required to be entered. This is an exception
When a supported system LCO is not met solely due to a support system  
                    to LCO 3.0.2 for the supported system. In this event, an evaluation shall
LCO not being met, the Conditions and Required Actions associated with  
                    be performed in accordance with Specification 5.5.16, "Safety Function
this supported system are not required to be entered. Only the support  
                    Determination Program (SFDP)." If a loss of safety function is
system LCO ACTIONS are required to be entered. This is an exception  
                    determined to exist by this program, the appropriate Conditions and
to LCO 3.0.2 for the supported system. In this event, an evaluation shall  
                    Required Actions of the LCO in which the loss of safety function exists
be performed in accordance with Specification 5.5.16, "Safety Function  
                    are required to be entered.
Determination Program (SFDP)." If a loss of safety function is  
                    When a support system's Required Action directs a supported system to
determined to exist by this program, the appropriate Conditions and  
                    be declared inoperable or directs entry into Conditions and Required
Required Actions of the LCO in which the loss of safety function exists  
                    Actions for a supported system, the applicable Conditions and Required
are required to be entered.
                    Actions shall be entered in accordance with LCO 3.0.2.
When a support system's Required Action directs a supported system to  
  LCO 3.0.7         Test Exception LCO 3.1.8 allows specified Technical Specification (TS)
be declared inoperable or directs entry into Conditions and Required  
                      requirements to be changed to permit performance of special tests and
Actions for a supported system, the applicable Conditions and Required  
                      operations. Unless otherwise specified, all other TS requirements remain
Actions shall be entered in accordance with LCO 3.0.2.
                      unchanged. Compliance with Test Exception LCOs is optional. When a
LCO 3.0.7  
                      Test Exception LCO is desired to be met but is not met, the ACTIONS of
Test Exception LCO 3.1.8 allows specified Technical Specification (TS)  
                      the Test Exception LCO shall be met. When a Test Exception LCO is not
requirements to be changed to permit performance of special tests and  
                      desired to be met, entry into a MODE or other specified condition in the
operations. Unless otherwise specified, all other TS requirements remain  
                      Applicability shall be made in accordance with the other applicable
unchanged. Compliance with Test Exception LCOs is optional. When a  
                      Specifications.
Test Exception LCO is desired to be met but is not met, the ACTIONS of  
  OCONEE UNITS 1, 2, & 3                  3.0-2             Amendment Nos. 300, 300, & 300
the Test Exception LCO shall be met. When a Test Exception LCO is not  
desired to be met, entry into a MODE or other specified condition in the  
Applicability shall be made in accordance with the other applicable  
Specifications.
Amendment Nos. 300, 300, & 300
3.0-2
OCONEE UNITS 1, 2, & 3


                                                                                          HPI
HPI  
                                                                                        3.5.2
3.5.2
3.5 EMERGENCY CORE COOLING SYSTEMS (ECCS)
3.5 EMERGENCY CORE COOLING SYSTEMS (ECCS)  
3.5.2 High Pressure Injection (HPI)
3.5.2 High Pressure Injection (HPI)
LCO 3.5.2              The HPI System shall be OPERABLE with:
The
                      a.    Two HPI trains OPERABLE;
a. 
                      b.    An additional HPI pump OPERABLE;
b. 
                      C.    Two LPI-HPI flow paths OPERABLE;
C. 
                      d.    Two HPI discharge crossover valves OPERABLE;
d. 
                      e.    HPI suction headers cross-connected; and
e.
                      f.    HPI discharge headers separated.
f.
APPLICABILITY:         MODES 1 and 2,
HPI System shall be OPERABLE with:  
                      MODE 3 with Reactor Coolant System (RCS) temperature
Two HPI trains OPERABLE;  
                              > 350 0F.
An additional HPI pump OPERABLE;  
ACTIONS
Two LPI-HPI flow paths OPERABLE;  
          CONDITION                     REQUIRED ACTION               COMPLETION TIME
Two HPI discharge crossover valves OPERABLE;  
  A.     One HPI pump             A.1       Restore HPI pump to     72 hours
HPI suction headers cross-connected; and  
        inoperable.                       OPERABLE status.
HPI discharge headers separated.
        OR                       AND
APPLICABILITY:
        One or more HPI         A.2       Restore HPI discharge   72 hours
MODES 1 and 2,  
        discharge crossover               crossover valve(s) to
MODE 3 with Reactor Coolant System (RCS) temperature  
        valve(s) inoperable.               OPERABLE status.
> 3500F.
                                                                                  (continued)
ACTIONS  
OCONEE UNITS 1, 2, & 3                       3.5.2-1          Amendment Nos. 314, 314, & 314 1
CONDITION  
REQUIRED ACTION  
COMPLETION TIME  
A.  
One HPI pump  
A.1  
Restore HPI pump to  
72 hours  
inoperable.  
OPERABLE status.
OR  
AND  
One or more HPI  
A.2  
Restore HPI discharge  
72 hours  
discharge crossover  
crossover valve(s) to  
valve(s) inoperable.  
OPERABLE status.
(continued)
Amendment Nos. 314, 314, & 314 1
LCO 3.5.2
OCONEE UNITS 1, 2, & 3
3.5.2-1


                                                                                    HPI
HPI  
                                                                                  3.5.2
3.5.2
ACTIONS (continued)
ACTIONS (continued)  
      CONDITION               REQUIRED ACTION                 COMPLETION TIME
CONDITION  
B.   Required Action and B.1   Reduce THERMAL             12 hours
REQUIRED ACTION  
      associated                 POWER to 5 75% RTP.
COMPLETION TIME  
      Completion Time of
B.  
      Condition A not met. AND
Required Action and  
                          B.2   Verify by administrative   12 hours
B.1  
                                  means that the ADV
Reduce THERMAL  
                                  flow path for each
12 hours  
                                  steam generator is
associated  
                                  OPERABLE.
POWER to 5 75% RTP.
                          AND
Completion Time of  
                          B.3   Restore HPI pump to       30 days from initial entry
Condition A not met.  
                                  OPERABLE status.         into Condition A
AND  
                          AND
B.2  
                          B.4     Restore HPI discharge   30 days from initial entry
Verify by administrative  
                                  crossover valve(s) to   into Condition A
12 hours  
                                  OPERABLE status.
means that the ADV  
                                                                            (continued)
flow path for each  
OCONEE UNITS 1, 2, & 3              3.5.2-2           Amendment Nos. 314, 314, & 314 1
steam generator is  
OPERABLE.
AND  
B.3  
Restore HPI pump to  
30 days from initial entry  
OPERABLE status.  
into Condition A  
AND  
B.4  
Restore HPI discharge  
30 days from initial entry  
crossover valve(s) to  
into Condition A  
OPERABLE status.
(continued)
Amendment Nos. 314, 314, & 314 1
3.5.2-2
OCONEE UNITS 1, 2, & 3


                                                                                HPI
HPI  
                                                                              3.5.2
3.5.2
ACTIONS (continued)
ACTIONS (continued)
      CONDITION               REQUIRED ACTION           I   COMPLETION TIME
CONDITION  
C.   One HPI train       C.1       -NOTE
REQUIRED ACTION  
      inoperable.                Only required when
I  
                                inoperable HPI train is
COMPLETION TIME
                                incapable of automatic
C.  
                                actuation and incapable
One HPI train  
                                of actuation through
inoperable.
                                remote manual
C.1
                                alignment.
-NOTE  
                                Reduce THERMAL             3 hours
Only required when  
                                POWER to *75% RTP.
inoperable HPI train is  
                          AND
incapable of automatic  
                          C.2        -. NOTE
actuation and incapable  
                                Only required when
of actuation through  
                                THERMAL POWER
remote manual  
                                < 75% RTP.
alignment.
                                Verify by administrative   3 hours
Reduce THERMAL  
                                means that the ADV
POWER to *75% RTP.
                                flow path for each
AND
                                steam generator is
-.
                                OPERABLE.
NOTE  
                          AND
Only required when  
                          C.3   Restore HPI train to       72 hours
THERMAL POWER  
                                OPERABLE status.
< 75% RTP.
D.   HPI suction headers D.1   Cross-connect HPI         72 hours
Verify by administrative  
      not cross-connected.       suction headers.
means that the ADV  
E.   HPI discharge       E.1   Hydraulically separate     72 hours
flow path for each  
      headers cross-             HPI discharge headers.
steam generator is  
      connected.
OPERABLE.
                                                                        (continued)
AND
OCONEE UNITS 1, 2, & 3             3.5.2-3           Amendment Nos. 314, 314, & 314 1
C.3
Restore HPI train to  
OPERABLE status.
3 hours
3 hours
72 hours
D.  
HPI suction headers  
D.1  
Cross-connect HPI  
72 hours  
not cross-connected.  
suction headers.
E.  
HPI discharge  
E.1  
Hydraulically separate  
72 hours  
headers cross-  
HPI discharge headers.
connected.
(continued)
Amendment Nos. 314, 314, & 314 1
C.2
OCONEE UNITS 1, 2, & 3
3.5.2-3


                                                                                          HPI
HPI  
                                                                                          3.5.2
3.5.2
ACTIONS     (continued)
ACTIONS  
        CONDITION                       REQUIRED ACTION               COMPLETION TIME
(continued)  
F.   One LPI-HPI flow           F.1       Restore LPI-HPI flow     72 hours
CONDITION  
        path inoperable,                     path to OPERABLE
REQUIRED ACTION  
                                              status.
COMPLETION TIME  
G.     Required Action and       G.1       Be in MODE 3.           12 hours
F.  
        associated
One LPI-HPI flow  
        Completion Time of         AND
F.1  
        Condition B, C, D, E,
Restore LPI-HPI flow  
        or F not met.             G.2       Reduce RCS               60 hours
72 hours  
                                              temperature to < 3500 F.
path inoperable,  
H.     Two HPI trains             H.1       Enter LCO 3.0.3.         Immediately
path to OPERABLE  
        inoperable.
status.
        OR
G.  
        Two LPI-HPI flow
Required Action and  
        paths inoperable.
G.1  
SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS
Be in MODE 3.  
                          SURVEILLANCE                                       FREQUENCY
12 hours  
SR 3.5.2.1         Verify each HPI manual and non-automatic           31 days
associated  
                    power operated valve in the flow path, that is
Completion Time of  
                    not locked, sealed, or otherwise secured in
AND  
                    position, is in the correct position.
Condition B, C, D, E,  
  SR 3.5.2.2       --           --     NOTE
or F not met.  
                    Not applicable to operating HPI pump(s).
G.2  
                    Vent each HPI pump casing.                         31 days
Reduce RCS  
                                                                                  (continued)
60 hours  
OCONEE UNITS 1, 2, & 3                         3.5.2-4         Amendment Nos. 314, 314, & 314 1
temperature to < 3500F.
H.  
Two HPI trains  
H.1  
Enter LCO 3.0.3.  
Immediately  
inoperable.
OR  
Two LPI-HPI flow  
paths inoperable.
SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS  
SURVEILLANCE  
FREQUENCY  
SR 3.5.2.1  
Verify each HPI manual and non-automatic  
31 days  
power operated valve in the flow path, that is  
not locked, sealed, or otherwise secured in  
position, is in the correct position.
SR 3.5.2.2  
--  
--
NOTE  
Not applicable to operating HPI pump(s).
Vent each HPI pump casing.  
31 days  
(continued)
Amendment Nos. 314, 314, & 314 1
OCONEE UNITS 1, 2, & 3
3.5.2-4


                                                                                          HPI
HPI  
                                                                                        3.5.2
3.5.2
SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS         (continued)
SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS  
                    SURVEILLANCE                                       FREQUENCY
(continued)  
SR 3.5.2.3   Verify each HPI pump's developed head at the       In accordance with the
SURVEILLANCE  
              test flow point is greater than or equal to the     Inservice Testing Program
FREQUENCY  
              required developed head.
SR 3.5.2.3  
SR 3.5.2.4   Verify each HPI automatic valve in the flow         18 months
Verify each HPI pump's developed head at the  
              path that is not locked, sealed, or otherwise
In accordance with the  
              secured in position, actuates to the correct
test flow point is greater than or equal to the  
              position on an actual or simulated actuation
Inservice Testing Program  
              signal.
required developed head.
SR 3.5.2.5   Verify each HPI pump starts automatically on       18 months
SR 3.5.2.4  
              an actual or simulated actuation signal.
Verify each HPI automatic valve in the flow  
SR 3.5.2.6   Verify, by visual inspection, each HPI train       18 months
18 months  
              reactor building sump suction inlet is not
path that is not locked, sealed, or otherwise  
              restricted by debris and suction inlet trash
secured in position, actuates to the correct  
              racks and screens show no evidence of
position on an actual or simulated actuation  
              structural distress or abnormal corrosion.
signal.
SR 3.5.2.7   Cycle each HPI discharge crossover valve and       18 months
SR 3.5.2.5  
              LPI-HPI flow path discharge valve.
Verify each HPI pump starts automatically on  
OCONEE UNITS 1, 2, & 3                   3.5.2-5           Amendment Nos. 314, 314, & 314  I
18 months  
an actual or simulated actuation signal.
SR 3.5.2.6  
Verify, by visual inspection, each HPI train  
18 months  
reactor building sump suction inlet is not  
restricted by debris and suction inlet trash  
racks and screens show no evidence of  
structural distress or abnormal corrosion.
SR 3.5.2.7  
Cycle each HPI discharge crossover valve and  
18 months  
LPI-HPI flow path discharge valve.
Amendment Nos. 314, 314, & 314 I
OCONEE UNITS 1, 2, & 3
3.5.2-5


                                OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                        02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                          1 POINT
1 POINT  
34. An electrical fault has resulted in 1TC 4160 switch gear being de-energized.
34. An electrical fault has resulted in 1TC 4160 switch gear being de-energized.
    Which of the following components will be unavailable as a result of this malfunction?
Which of the following components will be unavailable as a result of this malfunction?  
    A.         Reactor Building Cooling Unit "IA"
A.  
    B.         CC Pumps 1A and 1B
Reactor Building Cooling Unit "IA"  
    C.         Inverter 1KVID
B.  
    D.         The unit 1 Turning Gear Oil Pump
CC Pumps 1A and 1B  
    A)A
C.  
    Reasons:
Inverter 1KVID  
    A.         Correct Answer: Reactor Building Cooling Unit "A"is powered from TC
D.  
              4160 SG and would be lost ifthis component is de-energized.
The unit 1 Turning Gear Oil Pump  
    B.         1A1 RCP is not powered from containment cooling fan power suppies.
A) A  
    C.         Inverter KVID is not dependent on a single power supply and does not
Reasons:  
              receive power from TC.
A.  
    D.         The Turning Gear Oil Pump is not powered from TC.
Correct Answer: Reactor Building Cooling Unit "A" is powered from TC  
    OC Reference: LP Book I of II,Vol 2, OP-OC-STG-CCW
4160 SG and would be lost if this component is de-energized.
B.  
1A1 RCP is not powered from containment cooling fan power suppies.
C.  
Inverter KVID is not dependent on a single power supply and does not  
receive power from TC.
D.  
The Turning Gear Oil Pump is not powered from TC.
OC Reference: LP Book I of II, Vol 2, OP-OC-STG-CCW


                                  OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                        02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                          1 POINT
1 POINT  
35. Which one of the following is the correct purpose/purposes for installing the LP-1 9
35. Which one of the following is the correct purpose/purposes for installing the LP-1 9  
    flange for RCS drain down on Unit 1?
flange for RCS drain down on Unit 1?  
    A. Must be done ONLY for a refueling outage; The flange is NOT required to be on
A. Must be done ONLY for a refueling outage; The flange is NOT required to be on  
        prior to draining < 100 inches.
prior to draining < 100 inches.
    B. Must be done for every drain down prior to draining < 100 inches; Provides for a
B. Must be done for every drain down prior to draining < 100 inches; Provides for a  
        backup decay heat drop line.
backup decay heat drop line.
    C. Must be done ONLY for a refueling outage; Provides for a backup decay heat drop
C. Must be done ONLY for a refueling outage; Provides for a backup decay heat drop  
        line.
line.
    D. It is ONLY required for refueling outages since other outages are considered "short
D. It is ONLY required for refueling outages since other outages are considered "short  
        term."
term."  
    A) B
A) B
    Reference: Lesson Plans Vol 2, OP-OC-CP-RCD, page 20 of 39.
Reference: Lesson Plans Vol 2, OP-OC-CP-RCD, page 20 of 39.
    EO - 12
EO - 12  
    K/A:     025AK301 (3.1/3.4)
K/A:  
            G2.2.27 (2.6/3.5)
025AK301 (3.1/3.4)  
    RO/SRO: Both
G2.2.27 (2.6/3.5)  
    Level: M
RO/SRO: Both  
    Author: rfa
Level: M  
Author: rfa


                              OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                      02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                      1 POINT
1 POINT
36. Which one of the following statements, regarding the Unit 1 RBS system, is correct
36. Which one of the following statements, regarding the Unit 1 RBS  
    when RB pressure reaches 10 psig?
when RB pressure reaches 10 psig?
    A. ES channels 7 & 8 actuate causing ALL RBS pumps to start, 1BS-1 and 1BS-2 ("A"
A. ES channels  
        and "B" RBS HEADER RB ISOLATION) open, 1LP-21 AND 1LP-22 receive an
and "B" RBS
        open signal.
open signal.
    B. ES channels 5 & 6 actuate causing ALL RBS pumps to start, 1BS-11 and 1BS-16
7 & 8 actuate causing ALL RBS pumps to start,  
        ("A" and "B" RBS DISCHARGE CHECK) open, 1LP-21 AND 1LP-22 ("A" and "B"
HEADER RB ISOLATION) open, 1LP-21 AND 1
        LPI BWST SUCTION) receive an open signal.
system, is correct
    C. ES channels 7 & 8 actuate causing ONLY ONE RBS pump to start, 1BS-1 and
1 BS-1 and 1 BS-2 ("A"
        1BS-2 will open ("A" and "B" RBS HEADER RB ISOLATION), 1LP-21 AND 1LP-22
LP-22 receive an
        ("A" and "B" LPI BWST SUCTION) will receive an open signal.
B. ES channels 5 & 6 actuate causing ALL RBS pumps to start, 1BS-11 and 1BS-16  
    D. ES channels 5 & 6 actuate causing ONLY ONE RBS pump to start, 1BS-1 1 and
("A" and "B" RBS DISCHARGE CHECK) open, 1LP-21 AND 1LP-22 ("A" and "B"  
        1BS-16 ("A" and "B" RBS DISCHARGE CHECK) will open, 1LP-21 and 1LP-22
LPI BWST SUCTION) receive an open signal.
        ("A" and "B" LPI BWST SUCTION) will receive an open signal, but will NOT open.
C. ES channels 7 & 8 actuate causing ONLY ONE RBS pump to start, 1BS-1 and  
    A) A
1BS-2 will open ("A" and "B" RBS HEADER RB ISOLATION), 1LP-21 AND 1LP-22  
    K/A: 026A301 (4.3/4.5)
("A" and "B" LPI BWST SUCTION) will receive an open signal.
    EO: 10
D. ES channels 5 & 6 actuate causing ONLY ONE RBS pump to start, 1 BS-1 1 and  
    Reference: Vol IV,OP-OC-PNS-BS, Page 14 of 14.
1BS-16 ("A" and "B" RBS DISCHARGE CHECK) will open, 1LP-21 and 1LP-22  
    Author: RFA
("A" and "B" LPI BWST SUCTION) will receive an open signal, but will NOT open.
    Distractor Analysis:
A) A  
    At 10 psig RB pressure, ES channels 7 and 8 actuate, All RBS pumps start, BS-1 and
K/A: 026A301 (4.3/4.5)  
    BS-2 open, LP-21 and LP-22 receive an open signal.
EO: 10  
Reference: Vol IV, OP-OC-PNS-BS, Page 14 of 14.
Author: RFA  
Distractor Analysis:  
At 10 psig RB pressure, ES channels 7 and 8 actuate, All RBS pumps start, BS-1 and  
BS-2 open, LP-21 and LP-22 receive an open signal.


                                  OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                          02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                            1 POINT
1 POINT  
37. Unit I conditions:
37. Unit I conditions:  
        - Reactor power = 100%
- Reactor power = 100%  
        - IA/AIA system pressure decreases to 85 psig and stabilizes
- IA/AIA system pressure decreases to 85 psig and stabilizes  
        - RED OPEN light ON for 1CC-8 on ES RZ module
- RED OPEN light ON for 1CC-8 on ES RZ module  
        - Statalarms actuated:
- Statalarms actuated:  
            1SA-9/B1 CC CRD RETURN FLOW LOW
1SA-9/B1 CC CRD RETURN FLOW LOW  
            1SA-9/C1 CC COMP COOLING RETURN FLOW LOW
1SA-9/C1 CC COMP COOLING RETURN FLOW LOW  
        - CC Pump status:
- CC Pump status:  
            1A CC Pump switch ON - RED light OFF / GREEN light illuminated
1A CC Pump switch ON - RED light OFF / GREEN light illuminated  
            1B CC Pump switch AUTO - RED light OFF / GREEN light illuminated
1 B CC Pump switch AUTO - RED light OFF / GREEN light illuminated  
    Which ONE of the following describes the correct operator action to restore operation
Which ONE of the following describes the correct operator action to restore operation  
    of the CC system at this time, if possible?
of the CC system at this time, if possible?  
    A. Dispatch an NLO to manually open 1CC-8.
A. Dispatch an NLO to manually open 1CC-8.
    B. Reopen 1CC-8 from the ES Channel 6 RZ Module.
B. Reopen 1CC-8 from the ES Channel 6 RZ Module.
    C. Manually start the 1 B CC Pump by placing the switch to ON.
C. Manually start the 1 B CC Pump by placing the switch to ON.
    D. CC cannot be restored, manually trip the reactor and all RC Pumps.
D. CC cannot be restored, manually trip the reactor and all RC Pumps.
    A) C
A) C  
    A - Incorrect - CC-8 closes < 80 psig IA pressure. The valve is open pe rthe ES RZ
A - Incorrect - CC-8 closes < 80 psig IA pressure. The valve is open pe rthe ES RZ  
    module indication.
module indication.
    B. Incorrect - CC-8 is normally operated from the ES Channel 6 RZ Module but the
B. Incorrect - CC-8 is normally operated from the ES Channel 6 RZ Module but the  
    valve should be open at IApressure of 90 psig.
valve should be open at IA pressure of 90 psig.
    C. Correct - IA pressure is not low enough (>80 psig) to fail CC-8 closed so the
C. Correct - IA pressure is not low enough (>80 psig) to fail CC-8 closed so the  
    automatic start circuitry has failed and requires the operator to manually start the
automatic start circuitry has failed and requires the operator to manually start the  
    standby CC pump.
standby CC pump.
    D. Incorrect - This would be correct if CC-8 was failed shut and could not be manually
D. Incorrect - This would be correct if CC-8 was failed shut and could not be manually  
    reopened locally by an NLO and a loss of HPI seal injection occurred.
reopened locally by an NLO and a loss of HPI seal injection occurred.
    K/A: 026G2.1.7 (3.7/4.4)
K/A: 026G2.1.7 (3.7/4.4)  
    TIG1, T1G1
TIG1, T1G1  
    Bank
Bank  
    Reference:     Facility updated question bank 37 PNS021702 PNS021702
Reference:  
Facility updated question bank 37 PNS021702 PNS021702


                              OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                    02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                      1 POINT
1 POINT  
38. Unit I plant conditions:
38. Unit I plant conditions:  
    INITIAL CONDITIONS:
INITIAL CONDITIONS:  
        - Reactor Power = 100%
- Reactor Power = 100%  
        - SASS is DEENERGIZED
- SASS is DEENERGIZED  
        - PZR LEVEL #2 selected on UB1
- PZR LEVEL #2 selected on UB1  
    CURRENT CONDITIONS:
CURRENT CONDITIONS:  
        - PZR TEMPERATURE "A" indicates 1207F
- PZR TEMPERATURE "A" indicates 1207F  
        - PZR TEMPERATURE "B" indicates 645&deg;F
- PZR TEMPERATURE "B" indicates 645&deg;F  
    Which ONE of the following describes the effects on the RCS makeup system and
Which ONE of the following describes the effects on the RCS makeup system and  
    RCS volume?
RCS volume?  
              MAKEUP FLOW                 ACTUAL PZR LEVEL
MAKEUP FLOW  
    A.         Increases                           Increases
ACTUAL PZR LEVEL  
    B.       Decreases                             Increases
A.  
    C.         Increases                           Decreases
Increases  
    D.         Decreases                           Decreases
Increases  
B.  
Decreases  
Increases  
C.  
Increases  
Decreases  
D.  
Decreases  
Decreases


                                OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                      02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                        1 POINT
1 POINT  
A) A
A) A  
A. Correct - PZR Level #2 fed by Temp compensation RTD "A" As PZR             temperature
A. Correct - PZR Level #2 fed by Temp compensation RTD "A" As PZR  
compensation     fails low this decreases indicated PZR level. As indicated PZR level
temperature  
decreases an error between indicated controlling level vs. setpoint on HP-1 20 controller
compensation fails low this decreases indicated PZR level. As indicated PZR level  
is developed causing HP-120 to open and try
decreases an error between indicated controlling level vs. setpoint on HP-1 20 controller  
to raise level to setpoint. As HP-120 opens MAKEUP FLOW will increase causing
is developed causing HP-120 to open and try  
actual PZR LEVEL RCS inventory to increase.
to raise level to setpoint. As HP-120 opens MAKEUP FLOW will increase causing  
B. Incorrect
actual PZR LEVEL RCS inventory to increase.
C. Incorrect
B. Incorrect  
D. Incorrect
C. Incorrect  
K/A: 027AA201 (3.4/3.8)
D. Incorrect  
T1G1, T1G2
K/A: 027AA201 (3.4/3.8)  
Bank
T1G1, T1G2  
Reference: Facility updated question bank 10 IC051 IC051
Bank  
                NRC DB95 (IC-RCI p21-23) Objective 10,11, and 13
Reference:  
Facility updated question bank 10 IC051 IC051  
NRC DB95 (IC-RCI p21-23) Objective 10,11, and 13


                                OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                        02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                          1 POINT
1 POINT  
39. Unit 3 Conditons:
39. Unit 3 Conditons:  
        - Reactor power = 100%
- Reactor power = 100%  
        - Pressurizer (PZR) Level Instrument #1 selected for control.
- Pressurizer (PZR) Level Instrument #1 selected for control.
        - 3HP-120 (RC Volume Control) in AUTOMATIC.
- 3HP-120 (RC Volume Control) in AUTOMATIC.
        - SASS in MANUAL
- SASS in MANUAL  
    Which ONE of the following describes the Pressurizer level indication response and
Which ONE of the following describes the Pressurizer level indication response and  
    3HP-120 (RC Volume Control) response following an internal failure of ICCM Train
3HP-120 (RC Volume Control) response following an internal failure of ICCM Train  
    "3A"?
"3A"?  
    A. PZR level indication fails low, 3HP-120 fully opens and both PZR level High/Low
A. PZR level indication fails low, 3HP-120 fully opens and both PZR level High/Low  
        statalarms actuate.
statalarms actuate.
    B. PZR level indication fails as is, 3HP-120 controls level as demanded by the failed
B. PZR level indication fails as is, 3HP-120 controls level as demanded by the failed  
        instrument and the PZR level Emergency High/Low statalarm is inoperable.
instrument and the PZR level Emergency High/Low statalarm is inoperable.
    C. PZR level indication swaps to Instrument #2, 3HP-120 controls level at setpoint and
C. PZR level indication swaps to Instrument #2, 3HP-120 controls level at setpoint and  
        the PZR level Emergency High/Low statalarm remains operable.
the PZR level Emergency High/Low statalarm remains operable.
    D. PZR level indication swaps to Instrument #3, 3HP-120 controls level at setpoint and
D. PZR level indication swaps to Instrument #3, 3HP-120 controls level at setpoint and  
        the PZR level Emergency High/Low statalarm remains operable.
the PZR level Emergency High/Low statalarm remains operable.
    A) B
A) B  
    A. Incorrect - would be correct for power failure to ICCM train with SASS in automatic.
A. Incorrect - would be correct for power failure to ICCM train with SASS in automatic.
    B. Correct - SASS will not detect failure as output from ICCM train has not changed
B. Correct - SASS will not detect failure as output from ICCM train has not changed  
    C. Incorrect - SASS selects operable Pzr level signal in opposite ICCM train.
C. Incorrect - SASS selects operable Pzr level signal in opposite ICCM train.
    D. Incorrect - SASS will not detect failure and will not select PZR level #3 following a
D. Incorrect - SASS will not detect failure and will not select PZR level #3 following a  
    ICCM Train A internal failure.
ICCM Train A internal failure.
    K/A: 027AK203 (2.6/2.8)
K/A: 027AK203 (2.6/2.8)  
    T1G1, T1G2
T1G1, T1G2  
    Bank
Bank  
    Reference: Facility updated question bank 32 PNS143501         PNS143501
Reference:  
Facility updated question bank 32 PNS143501  
PNS143501


                                  OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                          02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                            1 POINT
1 POINT
40. Which one of the following parameters is controlled to limit the amount of iodine in the
40. Which one of the following parameters is controlled to limit the  
    RB atmosphere following a LOCA?
RB atmosphere following a LOCA?
    A.        The volume of galvanized metal inside containment.
amount of iodine in the
    B.        The volume of aluminum inside containment.
The volume of galvanized metal inside containment.
    C.        The pH of the RB sump.
The volume of aluminum inside containment.
    D.        The temperature of the RB atmosphere.
The pH of the RB sump.
    A) C
The temperature of the RB atmosphere.
    Reasons:
This parameter is limited to reduce the amount of post-LOCA hydrogen  
    A.        This parameter is limited to reduce the amount of post-LOCA hydrogen
and does not affect iodine in the RB atmosphere.
              and does not affect iodine in the RB atmosphere.
This parameter is limited to reduce the amount of post-LOCA hydrogen  
    B.        This parameter is limited to reduce the amount of post-LOCA hydrogen
and does not affect iodine in the RB atmosphere.
              and does not affect iodine in the RB atmosphere.
Correct Answer. TSP baskets inside containment adjust the pH of the  
    C.        Correct Answer. TSP baskets inside containment adjust the pH of the
RB sump to between 7.0 and 11.0. This range of pH creates non-volatile  
              RB sump to between 7.0 and 11.0. This range of pH creates non-volatile
iodine and limits the amount of iodine in the RB atmosphere.
              iodine and limits the amount of iodine in the RB atmosphere.
RB spray limits containment pressure by spraying liquid into the steam  
    D.        RB spray limits containment pressure by spraying liquid into the steam
atmosphere but any reduction of RB temperature is a byproduct of this  
              atmosphere but any reduction of RB temperature is a byproduct of this
pressure reduction and not intended to limit iodine in the RB  
              pressure reduction and not intended to limit iodine in the RB
atmosphere.
              atmosphere.
Reference: Vol IV, RB Spray
    Reference: Vol IV, RB Spray
A. 
B. 
C. 
D.
A) C
Reasons:
A. 
B. 
C. 
D.


                                  OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                          02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                            1 POINT
1 POINT
41. Given the following plant conditions:
41. Given the following plant conditions:  
        - 100% power
- 100% power  
    The following events occur:
The following events occur:  
        - Both MFW pumps trip
- Both MFW pumps trip  
    The following alarms are actuated:
The following alarms are actuated:  
        - EFW actuated
- EFW actuated  
        - DSS channel trip
- DSS channel trip  
        - Main turbine trip
- Main turbine trip  
        - AMSAC trip
- AMSAC trip  
    Control rod groups 5, 6, and 7 rods indicate fully inserted.
Control rod groups 5, 6, and 7 rods indicate fully inserted.
    NO OPERATOR ACTIONS HAVE OCCURRED
NO OPERATOR ACTIONS HAVE OCCURRED  
    Which of the following describes the status of the CRD Diamond panel trip confirm
Which of the following describes the status of the CRD Diamond panel trip confirm  
    light, and the breaker trip lights on the RPS cabinets?
light, and the breaker trip lights on the RPS cabinets?  
    A.         Trip confirm : LIT
A.  
                Breaker trip lights : DIM
Trip confirm : LIT  
    B.         Trip confirm : OFF
Breaker trip lights : DIM  
                Breaker trip lights : BRIGHT
B.  
    C.         Trip confirm : LIT
Trip confirm : OFF  
                Breaker trip lights : BRIGHT
Breaker trip lights : BRIGHT  
    D.         Trip confirm: OFF
C.  
                Breaker trip lights : DIM
Trip confirm : LIT  
Breaker trip lights : BRIGHT  
D.  
Trip confirm: OFF  
Breaker trip lights : DIM


                              OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                        02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                        1 POINT
1 POINT
A) D
A) D
A. RPS failed, no trip confirm because CRD breakers did not open, DSS tripped the groups
A. RPS failed, no trip confirm because CRD breakers did  
5,6,7 rods. NO operator actions means no manual trip
5,6,7 rods. NO operator actions means no manual trip  
B. RPS failed, no trip confirm because CRD breakers did not open, DSS tripped the groups
B. RPS failed, no trip confirm because CRD breakers did  
5,6,7 rods. NO operator actions means no manual trip
5,6,7 rods. NO operator actions means no manual trip  
C. RPS failed, no trip confirm because CRD breakers did not open, DSS tripped the groups
C. RPS failed, no trip confirm because CRD breakers did  
5,6,7 rods. NO operator actions means no manual trip
5,6,7 rods. NO operator actions means no manual trip
D. CORRECT: RPS failed therefore no breakers tripped and no trip confirm, DSS tripped the
not open, DSS tripped the groups
not open, DSS tripped the groups
not open, DSS tripped the groups
D. CORRECT: RPS failed therefore no breakers tripped and no trip confirm, DSS tripped the  
rods however, the reactor did not trip from RPS.
rods however, the reactor did not trip from RPS.


                                  OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                        02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                          1 POINT
1 POINT  
42. Which one of the following is correct if SCMs equal 00 F during an ATWS event?
42. Which one of the following is correct if SCMs equal 00F during an ATWS event?  
    RCPs should not be tripped during an ATWS until power is less than or equal to:
RCPs should not be tripped during an ATWS until power is less than or equal to:  
    A. 5% to provide flow through the core for heat removal.
A. 5% to provide flow through the core for heat removal.
    B. 5% to provide pressure control through the spray valve.
B. 5% to provide pressure control through the spray valve.
    C. 1% to provide flow through the core for heat removal.
C. 1% to provide flow through the core for heat removal.
    D. 1% to provide pressure control through the spray valve.
D. 1% to provide pressure control through the spray valve.
    A)C
A) C  
    Reference: Book IIof II,Vol 6, OP-OC-EAP-UNPP, page 7 of 19.
Reference: Book II of II, Vol 6, OP-OC-EAP-UNPP, page 7 of 19.
    EO-4
EO-4  
    K/A: 029EK312 (4.4/4.7)
K/A: 029EK312 (4.4/4.7)  
    RO/SRO: Both
RO/SRO: Both  
    Level: M
Level: M  
    Author: rfa
Author: rfa


                                  OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                          02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                            1 POINT
1 POINT  
43. Refueling is in progress with eight (8) fuel assemblies in the core. As the ninth
43. Refueling is in progress with eight (8) fuel assemblies in the core. As the ninth  
    assembly is being placed in the core the following NI readings are observed:
assembly is being placed in the core the following NI readings are observed:  
        - NI-1 increases from a base count of 203 to 430 cps.
- NI-1 increases from a base count of 203 to 430 cps.
        - NI-4 increases from a base count of 250 to 480 cps.
- NI-4 increases from a base count of 250 to 480 cps.
        - NI-2 and NI-3 are out-of-service.
- NI-2 and NI-3 are out-of-service.
    Which one of the following actions, if any, should be taken?
Which one of the following actions, if any, should be taken?  
    A.         No action is required, this is an expected NI response.
A.  
    B.         Continue inserting assembly, reactor engineering should be contacted to
No action is required, this is an expected NI response.
              perform a subcritical multiplication.
B.  
    C.         Cease insertion of the fuel assembly and notify the Refueling SRO to
Continue inserting assembly, reactor engineering should be contacted to  
              perform an evaluation.
perform a subcritical multiplication.
    D.         Withdraw the fuel assembly, reactor engineering should be contacted to
C.  
              perform a subcritical multiplication.
Cease insertion of the fuel assembly and notify the Refueling SRO to  
    A)C
perform an evaluation.
    A. An action is required, count rate has increased by more than 1.5 times. This is an
D.  
      unexpected change of Netron Flus countrate. The correct response is to suspend refueling
Withdraw the fuel assembly, reactor engineering should be contacted to  
      and perform an evaluation.
perform a subcritical multiplication.
    B. The assembly should not be placed into the core. Refuel ing should stop.
A) C  
    C. Correct, The fuel movement should stop and an evaluation performed.
A. An action is required, count rate has increased by more than 1.5 times. This is an  
    D. The fuel movement should stop and an evaluation performed.
unexpected change of Netron Flus countrate. The correct response is to suspend refueling  
    Reference: OP/1/N1 502/007, Step 2.13, page 4 of 6.
and perform an evaluation.
B. The assembly should not be placed into the core. Refuel ing should stop.
C. Correct, The fuel movement should stop and an evaluation performed.
D. The fuel movement should stop and an evaluation performed.
Reference: OP/1/N1 502/007, Step 2.13, page 4 of 6.


                                    OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                          02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                            1 POINT
1 POINT  
44. Which one of the following states when the potential reactivity effects of a steam line
44. Which one of the following states when the potential reactivity effects of a steam line  
    break, with the ICS in manual are most severe and why?
break, with the ICS in manual are most severe and why?
    A.          Beginning of core life because this results in the maximum negative
Beginning of core life because this results  
                reactivity addition.
reactivity addition.
    B.          Beginning of core life because this results in the maximum positive
Beginning of core life because this results  
                reactivity addition.
reactivity addition.
    C.          End of core life because this results in the maximum negative reactivity
End of core life because this results in the  
              addition.
addition.
    D.          End of core life because this results in the maximum positive reactivity
End of core life because this results in the  
              addition.
addition.
    A) D
in the maximum negative
    Reasons:
in the maximum positive
    As the core ages MTC becomes increasingly more negative. A steam line break results in a
maximum negative reactivity
    cooldown of the RCS and MTC adds positive reactivity as this occurs. Because MTC has a
maximum positive reactivity
    larger negative value as the core ages, the effect of the steam line break gets greater also.
As the core ages MTC becomes increasingly more negative. A steam line break results in a  
    Reference: Vol VII, Plant Transient Response
cooldown of the RCS and MTC adds positive reactivity as this occurs. Because MTC has a  
                Vol III, Bk 2 of 2, OTSG
larger negative value as the core ages, the effect of the steam line break gets greater also.
Reference: Vol VII, Plant Transient Response  
Vol III, Bk 2 of 2, OTSG
A. 
B. 
C. 
D.
A) D
Reasons:


                                OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                        02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                          1 POINT
1 POINT  
45. Which one of the following set of consequences will happen if the Moore controllers for
45. Which one of the following set of consequences will happen if the Moore controllers for  
    MS-1 12/173, Second Stage Reheater (SSRH) Control, lose power.?
MS-1 12/173, Second Stage Reheater (SSRH) Control, lose power.?  
    A. MS-1 12/173 will go to the closed position and upon regaining of power will re-open
A. MS-1 12/173 will go to the closed position and upon regaining of power will re-open  
        if power is _>75%. MS-77, 78, 80, 81 (MS to MSRH) will receive an open signal but
if power is _> 75%. MS-77, 78, 80, 81 (MS to MSRH) will receive an open signal but  
        will not open until power is 2!75%. MS-77, 78, 80, 81 will close if in automatic and
will not open until power is 2! 75%. MS-77, 78, 80, 81 will close if in automatic and  
        power is _<1% when power is restored to MS-1 12/173.
power is _< 1% when power is restored to MS-1 12/173.
    B. MS-1 12/173 will go to the closed position. MS-77, 78, 80, 81 (MS to MSRH) will
B. MS-1 12/173 will go to the closed position. MS-77, 78, 80, 81 (MS to MSRH) will  
        receive an open signal AND will open in automatic if turbine load is _>1%. MS-77,
receive an open signal AND will open in automatic if turbine load is _> 1%. MS-77,  
        78, 80, 81 will remain open if power is _>75% when power is restored to
78, 80, 81 will remain open if power is _>75% when power is restored to  
        MS-1 12/173.
MS-1 12/173.
    C. MS-1 12/173 will go to the closed position AND remain closed even if power is
C. MS-1 12/173 will go to the closed position AND remain closed even if power is  
        restored. MS-77, 78, 80, 81 (MS to MSRH) will receive an open signal AND will
restored. MS-77, 78, 80, 81 (MS to MSRH) will receive an open signal AND will  
        open in automatic if turbine load is >_75%. MS-77, 78, 80, 81 will remain open if
open in automatic if turbine load is >_ 75%. MS-77, 78, 80, 81 will remain open if  
        power is < 75% when power is restored to MS-1 12/173.
power is < 75% when power is restored to MS-1 12/173.
    D. MS-1 12/173 will go to the closed position and upon regaining of power will re-open
D. MS-1 12/173 will go to the closed position and upon regaining of power will re-open  
        if power is >_1%. MS-77, 78, 80, 81 (MS to MSRH) will receive an open signal AND
if power is >_ 1%. MS-77, 78, 80, 81 (MS to MSRH) will receive an open signal AND  
        will open in automatic if turbine load is _>1%. MS-77, 78, 80, 81 will remain open if
will open in automatic if turbine load is _> 1%. MS-77, 78, 80, 81 will remain open if  
        power is < 75% when power is restored to MS-1 12/173.
power is < 75% when power is restored to MS-1 12/173.
    A) B
A) B  
    Reference: Lesson Plans Book IIof II,Vol III, OP-OC-STG-MSR , page 17 of 33.
Reference: Lesson Plans Book II of II, Vol III, OP-OC-STG-MSR , page 17 of 33.
    EO - 10
EO - 10  
    K/A: 039A302 (3.1/3.5)
K/A: 039A302 (3.1/3.5)  
    RO/SRO: BOTH
RO/SRO: BOTH  
    Level: C
Level: C  
    Author: rfa
Author: rfa


                                  OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                          02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                            1 POINT
1 POINT
46. Which of the following is available on the main control board (1UB1 bench board) for
46. Which of the following is available on  
    the main feedwater pump turbine?
the main feedwater pump turbine?
    A.        Control valve position.
the main control board (1 UB1 bench board) for
    B.        First stage pressure.
Control valve position.
    C.        Steam pressure (chest).
First stage pressure.
    D.        Stop valve position.
Steam pressure (chest).
    A) D
Stop valve position.
    A. Main Turbine indication in control room, NOT MFW turbine.
A
    B. Main Turbine indication in control room, NOT MFW turbine.
B. 
    C. Main Turbine indication in control room, NOT MFW turbine.
C. 
    D. CORRECT:
D.
    Reference: Vol III, Bk 2 of 2, ICS
Main Turbine indication
                MEM
Main Turbine indication
Main Turbine indication  
CORRECT:
in  
in
in
control room, NOT MFW turbine.
control room, NOT MFW turbine.
control room, NOT MFW turbine.
Reference: Vol III, Bk 2 of 2, ICS
MEM
A. 
B. 
C. 
D.
A) D


                                  OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                        02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                          1 POINT
1 POINT  
47. Unit 2 plant conditions:
47. Unit 2 plant conditions:  
        - ONE train of MSLB isolation circuit is disabled
- ONE train of MSLB isolation circuit is disabled  
        - 2A Main Steam line break occurs
- 2A Main Steam line break occurs  
    Which one of the following is correct?
Which one of the following is correct?  
    A. The TDEFDWP will start if in AUTO.
A. The TDEFDWP will start if in AUTO.
    B. The FDW Control Valves will close if in MANUAL.
B. The FDW Control Valves will close if in MANUAL.
    C. The FDW Control Valves will fail "as is".
C. The FDW Control Valves will fail "as is".
    D. MSLB circuitry will NOT trip the Main FDW Pumps.
D. MSLB circuitry will NOT trip the Main FDW Pumps.
    A)B
A) B  
    Reference: Book IIof II,Vol 6, OP-OC-EAP-HPICD, page 13 of 36.
Reference: Book II of II, Vol 6, OP-OC-EAP-HPICD, page 13 of 36.
    EO-4
EO-4  
    K/A: 040AK302 (4.4/4.4) [assuming AFW initiation is synonymous with ESFAS initiation]
K/A: 040AK302 (4.4/4.4) [assuming AFW initiation is synonymous with ESFAS initiation]  
    RO/SRO: Both
RO/SRO: Both  
    Level: C
Level: C  
    Author: rfa
Author: rfa


                                  OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                            02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                            1 POINT
1 POINT  
48. Unit 3 plant conditions:
48. Unit 3 plant conditions:  
        *     Power level = 100%
*  
        *     ICS is in AUTOMATIC
Power level = 100%  
        *     "B"TBVs fail FULL OPEN
*  
    ASSUMING the unit does not trip and ICS remains in AUTO, which ONE of the
ICS is in AUTOMATIC  
    following predicts the final stabilized response of Reactor power, Tave, and MWe?
*  
    Reactor power will   _     , Tave will __ , and MWe will __
"B" TBVs fail FULL OPEN  
    A. increase / decrease / decrease
ASSUMING the unit does not trip and ICS remains in AUTO, which ONE of the  
    B. increase / decrease / remain constant
following predicts the final stabilized response of Reactor power, Tave, and MWe?  
    C. remain constant / decrease / remain constant
Reactor power will _  
    D. remain constant / remain constant / decrease
, Tave will __ , and MWe will __  
    A) D
A. increase / decrease / decrease  
    A. Incorrect, Power and Tave will return to previous value, MW will decrease.
B. increase / decrease / remain constant  
    B. Incorrect, Power increase and Tave decrease would occur if ICS in manual.
C. remain constant / decrease / remain constant  
    C. Incorrect, Power remains constant, Tave will does not decrease.
D. remain constant / remain constant / decrease  
    D. Correct, Power remains constant due to CTP demand remaining at 100%. MSCVs
A) D  
    close to maintain THP resulting in decrease of steam to turbine to compensate for TBV
A. Incorrect, Power and Tave will return to previous value, MW will decrease.
    flow. Tave is maintained by reactor control in auto with MWe decreasing.
B. Incorrect, Power increase and Tave decrease would occur if ICS in manual.
    K/A: 041 K302 (3.8/3.9)
C. Incorrect, Power remains constant, Tave will does not decrease.
    RO - T2G3
D. Correct, Power remains constant due to CTP demand remaining at 100%. MSCVs  
    Bank
close to maintain THP resulting in decrease of steam to turbine to compensate for TBV  
    Reference:     Facility updated question bank STG120801
flow. Tave is maintained by reactor control in auto with MWe decreasing.
K/A: 041 K302 (3.8/3.9)  
RO - T2G3  
Bank  
Reference:  
Facility updated question bank STG120801


                                  OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                          02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                            1 POINT
1 POINT  
49. Which one of the following statements is correct regarding the turbine power/load
49. Which one of the following statements is correct regarding the turbine power/load  
    unbalance (PLU) circuit?
unbalance (PLU) circuit?  
    The PLU circuit will NOT generate...
The PLU circuit will NOT generate...
    A. a reactor trip until the turbine is at approximately 110.00% of rated speed.
A. a reactor trip until the turbine is at approximately 110.00% of rated speed.
    B. a reactor trip until the turbine is at approximately 111.25% of rated speed.
B. a reactor trip until the turbine is at approximately 111.25% of rated speed.
    C. a reactor trip until turbine speed is above 100 RPM and BOTH speed signals are
C. a reactor trip until turbine speed is above 100 RPM and BOTH speed signals are  
        lost.
lost.
    D. an automatic reactor trip signal.
D. an automatic reactor trip signal.
    A) D
A) D  
    Reference: Book I of II,Vol 2, OP-OC-STG-EHC, page 13 & 14 of 30.
Reference: Book I of II, Vol 2, OP-OC-STG-EHC, page 13 & 14 of 30.
    EO - 8
EO - 8  
    K/A: 045K1 20 (3.4/3.6) Considering the PLU circuit as a protection system
K/A: 045K1 20 (3.4/3.6) Considering the PLU circuit as a protection system  
    RO/SRO: Both
RO/SRO: Both  
    Level: M
Level: M  
    Author: rfa
Author: rfa


                                OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                        02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                          1 POINT
1 POINT  
50. Unit 3 plant conditions:
50. Unit 3 plant conditions:  
        - 3A & 3B Main FDW pumps have tripped
- 3A & 3B Main FDW pumps have tripped  
        - ALL EFWPs have started with 200 gpm EFW flow to each SG
- ALL EFWPs have started with 200 gpm EFW flow to each SG  
        - 3FDW-315 & 316 (3A and 3B OTSG EFW Flow Control Valves) in manual
- 3FDW-315 & 316 (3A and 3B OTSG EFW Flow Control Valves) in manual  
        - 3A and 3B SG levels = 33" XSUR and stable
- 3A and 3B SG levels = 33" XSUR and stable  
        - 3A Main Feedwater pump is reset
- 3A Main Feedwater pump is reset  
        - 3A Main Feedwater pump hydraulic oil pressure = 115 psig
- 3A Main Feedwater pump hydraulic oil pressure = 115 psig  
        - 3A MFW Pump discharge pressure = 670 psig
- 3A MFW Pump discharge pressure = 670 psig  
    Which ONE of the following is correct?
Which ONE of the following is correct?  
    If 3FDW-315 & 316 are placed in Automatic, then 3FDW 315 & 316 will...
If 3FDW-315 & 316 are placed in Automatic, then 3FDW 315 & 316 will...
    A. be controlled by the Manual Loader signal.
A. be controlled by the Manual Loader signal.
    B. close and stay closed until SG level decreases below 25" on SU level.
B. close and stay closed until SG level decreases below 25" on SU level.
    C. close and stay closed until SG level decreases below 30".
C. close and stay closed until SG level decreases below 30".
    D. close and stay closed until the SG Dryout Protection circuit places 3FDW-315 &
D. close and stay closed until the SG Dryout Protection circuit places 3FDW-315 &  
        316 on Auto Level Control.
316 on Auto Level Control.
    A)C
A) C  
    A- No automatic is controlling signal to valves
A- No automatic is controlling signal to valves  
    B - No 25" on SU is control level for MFDW
B - No 25" on SU is control level for MFDW  
    C - Correct
C - Correct  
    D- No - on automatic level control when automatic is selected
D- No - on automatic level control when automatic is selected  
    K/A: 054AA202 (4.1/4.4)
K/A: 054AA202 (4.1/4.4)  
    T1G2, TIG2
T1G2, TIG2  
    Bank
Bank  
    Reference: Facility updated question bank question 17 CF023203 CF023203
Reference: Facility updated question bank question 17 CF023203 CF023203


                                    OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                          02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                            1 POINT
1 POINT  
51. Which one of the following set of RCS parameters is correct ifthe operator is
51. Which one of the following set of RCS parameters is correct if the operator is  
    maintaining RCS P/T stable as MS pressure decreases during a Station Blackout?
maintaining RCS P/T stable as MS pressure decreases during a Station Blackout?  
    RCS Temperature will __ as decay heat load decreases over time following the
RCS Temperature will  
    initiating event. To combat this, the operator would __ on either the TBVs or ADVs.
__  
    A. remain the same; throttle close
as decay heat load decreases over time following the  
    B. remain the same; throttle open
initiating event. To combat this, the operator would  
    C. decrease; throttle open
__  
    D. decrease; throttle close
on either the TBVs or ADVs.
    A) D
A. remain the same; throttle close  
    Distractor analysis:
B. remain the same; throttle open  
    Ifthe operator is maintaining RCS P/T stable, as MS pressure decreases, RCS temperature
C. decrease; throttle open  
    would attempt to decrease. This would begin to occur as decay heat load decreased over time
D. decrease; throttle close  
    following the initiating event. To combat this the operator would close down on either TBVs or
A) D  
    ADVs (depending on which was being used). Once the Pressure Control Valves were fully
Distractor analysis:  
    closed, additional decreases in decay heat load would result in a decreasing MS pressure and
If the operator is maintaining RCS P/T stable, as MS pressure decreases, RCS temperature  
    decreasing RCS temperature and pressure. Once this condition is reached it becomes
would attempt to decrease. This would begin to occur as decay heat load decreased over time  
    necessary to throttle EFDW flow to the SG's to control RCS temperature. This will likely result
following the initiating event. To combat this the operator would close down on either TBVs or  
    in a decrease in SG levels as well.
ADVs (depending on which was being used). Once the Pressure Control Valves were fully  
    Reference: Book IIof II,Vol 6, OP-OC-EAP-BO, page 8 of 50.
closed, additional decreases in decay heat load would result in a decreasing MS pressure and  
    EO-4
decreasing RCS temperature and pressure. Once this condition is reached it becomes  
    K/A: 055EA202 (4.4/4.6)
necessary to throttle EFDW flow to the SG's to control RCS temperature. This will likely result  
    RO/SRO: Both
in a decrease in SG levels as well.
    Level: C
Reference: Book II of II, Vol 6, OP-OC-EAP-BO, page 8 of 50.
    Author: rfa
EO-4  
K/A: 055EA202 (4.4/4.6)  
RO/SRO: Both  
Level: C  
Author: rfa


                                  OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                          02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                            1 POINT
1 POINT  
52. Which one of the following is correct concerning CCW siphon flow during a loss of
52. Which one of the following is correct concerning CCW siphon flow during a loss of  
    offsite power?
offsite power?  
    A. The first siphon takes a suction from the condenser inlet piping, supplies flow
A. The first siphon takes a suction from the condenser inlet piping, supplies flow  
        through the condenser, and discharges to the Keowee Hydro tailrace. The high
through the condenser, and discharges to the Keowee Hydro tailrace. The high  
        point that this first siphon must overcome is the discharge of the CCW Pumps.
point that this first siphon must overcome is the discharge of the CCW Pumps.
    B. The second siphon takes a suction from the condenser inlet piping, supplies flow
B. The second siphon takes a suction from the condenser inlet piping, supplies flow  
        through the condenser and discharges to the Keowee Hydro tailrace. The high
through the condenser and discharges to the Keowee Hydro tailrace. The high  
        point that the second siphon must overcome is just down stream of the condenser.
point that the second siphon must overcome is just down stream of the condenser.
    C. The first siphon takes suction from the CCW intake canal and supplies flow to the
C. The first siphon takes suction from the CCW intake canal and supplies flow to the  
        CCW crossover header where the LPSW system takes its suction. The high point
CCW crossover header where the LPSW system takes its suction. The high point  
        that the first siphon must overcome is just down stream of the condenser.
that the first siphon must overcome is just down stream of the condenser.
    D. The second siphon takes suction from the CCW intake canal and supplies flow to
D. The second siphon takes suction from the CCW intake canal and supplies flow to  
        the CCW crossover header where the LPSW system takes its suction. The high
the CCW crossover header where the LPSW system takes its suction. The high  
        point that this second siphon must overcome is the discharge of the CCW Pumps.
point that this second siphon must overcome is the discharge of the CCW Pumps.
    A) B
A) B  
    Distractor Analysis:
Distractor Analysis:  
    The first siphon takes suction from the CCW intake canal and supplies flow to the CCW
The first siphon takes suction from the CCW intake canal and supplies flow to the CCW  
    crossover header where the LPSW system takes its suction. The high point that this second
crossover header where the LPSW system takes its suction. The high point that this second  
    siphon must overcome is the discharge of the CCW Pumps.
siphon must overcome is the discharge of the CCW Pumps.
    The second siphon takes a suction from the condenser inlet piping, supplies flow through the
The second siphon takes a suction from the condenser inlet piping, supplies flow through the  
    condenser and discharges to the Keowee Hydro tailrace. The high point that the second
condenser and discharges to the Keowee Hydro tailrace. The high point that the second  
    siphon must overcome is just down stream of the condenser.
siphon must overcome is just down stream of the condenser.
    Reference: Book I of II,Vol 2, OP-OC-STG-CCW, page 20 of 39.
Reference: Book I of II, Vol 2, OP-OC-STG-CCW, page 20 of 39.
    EO - 11
EO - 11  
    K/A: A07AK21 (3.7/3.5)
K/A: A07AK21 (3.7/3.5)  
    RO/SRO: Both
RO/SRO: Both  
    Level: C
Level: C  
    Author: rfa
Author: rfa


                                  OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                          02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                            1 POINT
1 POINT
53. Plant conditions:
53. Plant conditions:  
    INITIAL CONDITIONS:
INITIAL CONDITIONS:
        - ONS Units 1 and 2 are operating at 100% power
- ONS Units 1 and 2 are operating at 100% power  
        - ONS Unit 3 MFB's are powered by Central Switchyard via CT-5
- ONS Unit 3 MFB's are powered by Central Switchyard via CT-5  
        - Keowee Unit 1 is generating to the grid @ 40 MWe
- Keowee Unit 1 is generating to the grid @ 40 MWe  
    CURRENT CONDITIONS:
CURRENT CONDITIONS:  
        - ONS Unit 2 has a LOCA/LOOP resulting in PROPER actuation of ES Channels
- ONS Unit 2 has a LOCA/LOOP resulting in PROPER actuation of ES Channels  
          1-6
1-6  
    After power has been regained to ONS Unit 2 MFB's, which ONE of the following
After power has been regained to ONS Unit 2 MFB's, which ONE of the following  
    statements is correct?
statements is correct?
    Assume NO operator action
Assume NO operator action  
    A. 2C LPIP may be started immediately.
A. 2C LPIP may be started immediately.
    B. 2C LPIP may be started after 30 seconds.
B. 2C LPIP may be started after 30 seconds.
    C. 2X5 will Load Shed, re-energizing in 30 seconds.
C. 2X5 will Load Shed, re-energizing in 30 seconds.
    D. 2X5 will NOT Load Shed and will remain energized.
D. 2X5 will NOT Load Shed and will remain energized.
    A) D
A) D  
    A & B incorrect - LPIP C cannot be started during a Ioadshed unless either "A" or "B"
A & B incorrect - LPIP C cannot be started during a Ioadshed  
    LPIP are not running.
LPIP are not running.
    C. Incorrect - See D explanation.
C. Incorrect - See D explanation.
    D. Correct - 2X5 wIl not load shed upon ES even if at least 1 of the SL breakers is
unless either "A" or "B"
    closed.
D. Correct - 2X5 wIl not load shed upon ES even if at least 1 of the SL breakers is  
    K/A: 056AA254 (2.9/3.0)
closed.
    T1G3, T1 G3
K/A: 056AA254 (2.9/3.0)  
    Bank
T1G3, T1 G3  
    Reference:     Facility updated question bank 26 EL050601 EL050601
Bank
Reference:  
Facility updated question bank 26
EL050601  
EL050601


                                OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                        02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                        1 POINT
1 POINT  
54. Which one of the following trip the condensate booster pump?
54. Which one of the following trip the condensate booster pump?
    A. FDWP suction pressure drops to * 360 psig and the associated FDWP suction
A. FDWP suction pressure drops to * 360 psig and the associated FDWP suction  
      valve is open.
valve is open.
    B. FDWPT bearing oil pressure < 4 psig AND the associated FDWP discharge valve is
B. FDWPT bearing oil pressure < 4 psig AND the associated FDWP discharge valve is  
      open.
open.
    C. A CBP suction or discharge valve is moved from full open position to 50%.
C. A CBP suction or discharge valve is moved from full open position to 50%.
    D. The discharge header pressure on both MFDWPs is < 770 psig.
D. The discharge header pressure on both MFDWPs is < 770 psig.
    A)C
A) C  
    Reference: Lesson Plans Vol X, OP-OC-CF-C, page 36 of 58.
Reference: Lesson Plans Vol X, OP-OC-CF-C, page 36 of 58.
    EO - 24
EO - 24  
    K/A:056K419 (1.9/1.9)
K/A:056K419 (1.9/1.9)  
    RO/SRO: BOTH
RO/SRO: BOTH  
    Level: M
Level: M  
    Author: rfa
Author: rfa


                                  OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                        02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                          1 POINT
1 POINT  
55. Which ONE of the following describes how the Reactor Operator is initially alerted to a
55. Which ONE of the following describes how the Reactor Operator is initially alerted to a  
    trip of C-61 (COND COOLER BYPASS CONTROL) and the resulting plant response
trip of C-61 (COND COOLER BYPASS CONTROL) and the resulting plant response  
    following the trip?
following the trip?  
    C-61 tripped...
C-61 tripped...
    A. statalarm / Generator field and stator winding temperatures decreasing
A. statalarm / Generator field and stator winding temperatures decreasing  
    B. OAC Alarm / Generator field and stator winding temperatures decreasing.
B. OAC Alarm / Generator field and stator winding temperatures decreasing.
    C. statalarm / Generator field and stator winding temperatures increasing
C. statalarm / Generator field and stator winding temperatures increasing  
    D. OAC Alarm / Generator field and stator winding temperatures increasing
D. OAC Alarm / Generator field and stator winding temperatures increasing  
    A) D
A) D  
    A. incorrect, No statalarm available and field and stator winding temperatures will
A. incorrect, No statalarm available and field and stator winding temperatures will  
    increase.
increase.
    B. incorrect, OAC alarm will actuate but field and stator winding temperatures will
B. incorrect, OAC alarm will actuate but field and stator winding temperatures will  
    increase, as described in "A"above.
increase, as described in "A" above.
    C. incorrect, field and stator winding temperatures will increase but there is no
C. incorrect, field and stator winding temperatures will increase but there is no  
    statalarm. increase as stated in "C" above.
statalarm. increase as stated in "C" above.
    D: correct, OAC alarm that C-61 has tripped open and field and stator temperatures will
D: correct, OAC alarm that C-61 has tripped open and field and stator temperatures will  
    increase due to decreased cooling flow through the Hydrogen coolers.
increase due to decreased cooling flow through the Hydrogen coolers.
    ONSW Bank question: CF127
ONSW Bank question: CF127  
    Reference: Book I of II,Vol 2, OP-OC-STG-FHS, page 14 & 20 of 27.
Reference: Book I of II, Vol 2, OP-OC-STG-FHS, page 14 & 20 of 27.
    EO - 18, 19
EO - 18, 19  
    K/A: 056K603 (1.4/1.5)
K/A: 056K603 (1.4/1.5)  
    RO/SRO: Both
RO/SRO: Both  
    Level: M
Level: M  
    Author: rfa
Author: rfa


                                  OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                          02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                            1 POINT
1 POINT  
56. Unit 2 plant conditions:
56. Unit 2 plant conditions:  
        - A loss of power to MCC 2XO has occurred
- A loss of power to MCC 2XO has occurred  
        - Regulated Power panelboards (2KRAI2KRB) are being supplied by SOURCE 2
- Regulated Power panelboards (2KRAI2KRB) are being supplied by SOURCE 2  
          (Motor Control Center (MCC) 2XP)
(Motor Control Center (MCC) 2XP)  
    Which ONE of the following will occur if Unit 2 experiences a loss of power to MCC
Which ONE of the following will occur if Unit 2 experiences a loss of power to MCC  
    2XP?
2XP?  
    A. 2KRA/2KRB will become de-energized.
A. 2KRA/2KRB will become de-energized.
    B. Any Vital Bus Inverter on "AC Line" will swap to "Inverter".
B. Any Vital Bus Inverter on "AC Line" will swap to "Inverter".
    C. The Isolating Diodes output will be supplied by their backup source.
C. The Isolating Diodes output will be supplied by their backup source.
    D. 2KRA/2KRB will be supplied from the I&C Batteries until power is restored from
D. 2KRA/2KRB will be supplied from the I&C Batteries until power is restored from  
        MCC 2XO or 2XP.
MCC 2XO or 2XP.
    A)A
A) A  
    A.Correct
A.Correct  
    B.Incorrect - Vital bus inverters do not have an auto swap feature.
B.Incorrect - Vital bus inverters do not have an auto swap feature.
    C.Incorrect - The statement is false. A loss of 2XO/2XP has no affect on Battery
C.Incorrect - The statement is false. A loss of 2XO/2XP has no affect on Battery  
    Charger operation. Isolating Diode output would be from their normal source, the
Charger operation. Isolating Diode output would be from their normal source, the  
    Battery Charger.
Battery Charger.
    D.Incorrect - KRA/KRB do not have battery backup.
D.Incorrect - KRA/KRB do not have battery backup.
    K/A: 057AA106 (3.5/3.5)
K/A: 057AA106 (3.5/3.5)  
    T1G1, T1G1
T1G1, T1G1  
    Bank
Bank  
    Reference:     Facility updated question bank 18 EL070901 EL070901
Reference:  
Facility updated question bank 18 EL070901  
EL070901


                                OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                        02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                          1 POINT
1 POINT  
57. Unit 1's DCA Bus has been inadvertently de-energized. Which ONE of the following
57. Unit 1's DCA Bus has been inadvertently de-energized. Which ONE of the following  
    correctly describes the status of 1KI (ICS) Inverter?
correctly describes the status of 1 KI (ICS) Inverter?  
    1KI (ICS) Inverter is automatically supplied from ....
1 KI (ICS) Inverter is automatically supplied from ....
    A. the AC Line.
A. the AC Line.
    B. the 1CA battery.
B. the 1 CA battery.
    C. the I DCB bus via isolating diodes.
C. the I DCB bus via isolating diodes.
    D. an alternate unit via isolating diodes.
D. an alternate unit via isolating diodes.
    A)C
A) C  
    K/A: 058AA101 (3.4/3.5)
K/A: 058AA101 (3.4/3.5)  
    T1G2, T1G2
T1G2, T1G2  
    Bank
Bank  
    Reference: Facility updated question bank 27 EL262 EL2621
Reference:  
Facility updated question bank 27 EL262 EL2621


                                  OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                        02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                          1 POINT
1 POINT  
58. Which one of the following is correct concerning this system and the closing of the
58. Which one of the following is correct concerning this system and the closing of the  
    FDW valves during an MSLB?
FDW valves during an MSLB?  
    A. The FDW control valves can be in AUTO or MANUAL for the system to operate. If
A. The FDW control valves can be in AUTO or MANUAL for the system to operate. If  
        instrument air is lost, the FDW control valves will fail "as is."
instrument air is lost, the FDW control valves will fail "as is."  
    B. The FDW control valves must be in AUTO for the system to operate. The auto-start
B. The FDW control valves must be in AUTO for the system to operate. The auto-start  
        feature of the TDEFW pump is inhibited.
feature of the TDEFW pump is inhibited.
    C. The FDW block valves can be in AUTO or MANUAL for the system to operate. The
C. The FDW block valves can be in AUTO or MANUAL for the system to operate. The  
        auto-start feature of the TDEFW pump is inhibited.
auto-start feature of the TDEFW pump is inhibited.
    D. The FDW block valves must be in AUTO for the system to operate. If instrument air
D. The FDW block valves must be in AUTO for the system to operate. If instrument air  
        is lost, the FDW block valves will fail closed.
is lost, the FDW block valves will fail closed.
    A) A
A) A  
    Reference: Lesson Plans Vol X, OP-OC-CF-FDW , page 29 of 33.
Reference: Lesson Plans Vol X, OP-OC-CF-FDW , page 29 of 33.
    EO- 16 and 17
EO- 16 and 17  
    K/A:059A306 (3.2/3.3)
K/A:059A306 (3.2/3.3)  
    RO/SRO: BOTH
RO/SRO: BOTH  
    Level: C (must understand new modification logic)
Level: C (must understand new modification logic)  
    Author: rfa
Author: rfa


                                OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                        02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                          1 POINT
1 POINT  
59. Plant conditions:
59. Plant conditions:  
        *   Reactor power = 80%
*  
        *   ICS SG Master in MANUAL
Reactor power = 80%  
        *   ICS Turbine Master in MANUAL
*  
        *   All other ICS stations are in AUTO
ICS SG Master in MANUAL  
        *   A 50 psi INCREASE in Main Steam Pressure occurs
*  
    Which ONE of the following is correct?
ICS Turbine Master in MANUAL  
    ICS Main Feedwater Pump speed will initially...
*  
    A.         increase due to the resulting Turbine Header Pressure error signal.
All other ICS stations are in AUTO  
    B.         decrease due to the resulting Turbine Header Pressure error signal.
*  
    C.         increase and FDW valves would initially throttle in the open direction.
A 50 psi INCREASE in Main Steam Pressure occurs  
    D.         decrease and FDW valves would initially throttle in the closed direction.
Which ONE of the following is correct?  
    A) C
ICS Main Feedwater Pump speed will initially...
    A. Incorrect: THP error is blocked by the SG master in Hand.
A.  
    B. Incorrect: THP error is blocked by the SG master in Hand.
increase due to the resulting Turbine Header Pressure error signal.
    C. Correct: FDW valve DP would decrease causing FDWP demand to increase. FDW
B.  
      valves open due to increase in flow as SG pressure decreased.
decrease due to the resulting Turbine Header Pressure error signal.
    D. Incorrect: FDW valve DP decreases causing the FDWPs demand to increase.
C.  
      Valves throttle open due to decreased flow with higher SG pressure
increase and FDW valves would initially throttle in the open direction.
    OC Reference: AP/1/A/1700/028, ICS Instrument Failures
D.  
decrease and FDW valves would initially throttle in the closed direction.
A) C  
A. Incorrect: THP error is blocked by the SG master in Hand.
B. Incorrect: THP error is blocked by the SG master in Hand.
C. Correct: FDW valve DP would decrease causing FDWP demand to increase. FDW  
valves open due to increase in flow as SG pressure decreased.
D. Incorrect: FDW valve DP decreases causing the FDWPs demand to increase.
Valves throttle open due to decreased flow with higher SG pressure
OC Reference: AP/1/A/1700/028, ICS Instrument Failures


                                OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                        02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                          1 POINT
1 POINT
60. Unit 1 conditions:
60. Unit 1 conditions:  
        * Mode 3
* Mode 3  
        * RCS Average Temperature = 4850 F
* RCS Average Temperature = 4850F
        * Motor Driven Emergency Feedwater pump (MDEFDWP) "IA" and "1B" control
* Motor Driven Emergency Feedwater pump  
            switches selected to AUTO 1
switches selected to AUTO 1  
    Which ONE of the following conditions will initiate an automatic start of the
Which ONE of the following conditions will initiate  
    MDEFDWPs?
MDEFDWPs?
    A. BOTH channels of AMSAC actuate
(MDEFDWP) "IA" and "1B" control
    B. BOTH "B" SG XSUR levels = 20" for 40 seconds
an automatic start of the
    C. Hydraulic oil pressure = 0 psig on the operating MFDWP
A. BOTH channels of AMSAC actuate  
    D. Low MFDWP discharge pressure on the operating MFDWP
B. BOTH "B" SG XSUR levels = 20" for 40 seconds  
    A) B
C. Hydraulic oil pressure = 0 psig on the operating MFDWP  
    A. INCORRECT - AUTO 2 function
D. Low MFDWP discharge pressure on the operating MFDWP  
    B. CORRECT - Dry-Out protection is signaled from the AUTO 1 position. BOTH XSUR
A) B  
      level indications < 21" for > 30 seconds starts both MDEFWPs.
A. INCORRECT - AUTO 2 function  
    C. INCORRECT - AUTO 2 function, both Main FDW Pumps would not be operating at
B. CORRECT - Dry-Out protection is signaled from the AUTO 1 position. BOTH XSUR  
      this temperature.
level indications < 21" for > 30 seconds starts both MDEFWPs.
    D. INCORRECT - AUTO 2 function, both Main FDW Pumps would not be operating at
C. INCORRECT - AUTO 2 function, both Main FDW Pumps would not be operating at  
      this temperature.
this temperature.
    Reference: Lesson Plans Vol X, OP-OC-CF-EFW , page 23 of 46.
D. INCORRECT - AUTO 2 function, both Main FDW Pumps would not be operating at  
    EO - 24
this temperature.
    K/A:061 K402 (4.5/4.6)
Reference: Lesson Plans Vol X, OP-OC-CF-EFW , page 23 of 46.
    RO/SRO: BOTH
EO - 24  
    Level: C (must understand Auto 1/Auto2 logic)
K/A:061 K402 (4.5/4.6)  
    Author: rfa
RO/SRO: BOTH  
Level: C (must understand Auto 1/Auto2 logic)  
Author: rfa


                                  OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                          02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                            1 POINT
1 POINT  
61. Plant conditions:
61. Plant conditions:  
        - Keowee Unit #2 is supplying ONS Unit 1, 2, 3 via the CT-4
- Keowee Unit #2 is supplying ONS Unit 1, 2, 3 via the CT-4  
        - CT-4 cooling fans and oil pumps operating as required
- CT-4 cooling fans and oil pumps operating as required  
    Which ONE of the following CT-4 parameters indicate that the 22.4 MVA transformer
Which ONE of the following CT-4 parameters indicate that the 22.4 MVA transformer  
    rating on CT-4 has been exceeded?
rating on CT-4 has been exceeded?  
    MEGAWATTS =                   / MEGAVARS=
MEGAWATTS =  
    SEE ATTACHMENT AP/11: Encl. 5.1A (CT-4 overload limits)
/ MEGAVARS=  
    A. 18 / 11
SEE ATTACHMENT AP/11: Encl. 5.1A (CT-4 overload limits)  
    B. 11 / 16
A. 18 / 11  
    C. 14.5 / 16
B. 11 / 16  
    D. 18 / 14.5
C. 14.5 / 16  
    A) D
D. 18 / 14.5  
    A. Incorrect - This combination does not exceed the 112% line on the curve. The
A) D  
      combination exceeds the 100% curve (20.6 MVA)
A. Incorrect - This combination does not exceed the 112% line on the curve. The  
    B. Incorrect - This combination does not exceed the 112% line on the curve. The
combination exceeds the 100% curve (20.6 MVA)  
      combination exceeds the 100% curve (20.6 MVA)
B. Incorrect - This combination does not exceed the 112% line on the curve. The  
    C. Incorrect - This combination does not exceed the 100% or 112% line on the curve
combination exceeds the 100% curve (20.6 MVA)  
    D. Correct - This combination exceeds the 112% line on the curve
C. Incorrect - This combination does not exceed the 100% or 112% line on the curve  
    Attachment required: AP/11, encl. 5.1a (CT-4 overload limits)
D. Correct - This combination exceeds the 112% line on the curve  
    K/A: 062A101 (3.4/3.8)
Attachment required: AP/11, encl. 5.1a (CT-4 overload limits)  
    T2G2, T2G2
K/A: 062A101 (3.4/3.8)  
    Bank
T2G2, T2G2  
    Reference:     Facility updated question bank 62 EL041201 EL041201
Bank  
Reference:  
Facility updated question bank 62 EL041201  
EL041201


                                                  Enclosure 5.1A                   AP/1/A/1700/011
Enclosure 5.1A  
                                              CT-4 Overload Limits                Page 1 of 1
CT-4 Overload Limits
      ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE                                   RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED
AP/1/A/1700/011  
                                                                    I                             I
Page 1 of 1
                                                  CAUTION
ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE  
RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED  
I  
I
CAUTION  
CT-4 is NOT designed for loads > 112%. Under extreme emergency conditions, 112% MVA limit
may be exceeded. Maximum transformer oil and winding limits should NEVER be exceeded. j
1.
_IAAT
either of the following computer
points exceed the maximum limit:
SComputer Pt.
Maximum
OIA0835
130 0C
O1A0836
130&deg;C
THEN take immediate action to reduce
the load on CT-4.
2.
Verify both of the following available:
CT-4 MEGA WATTS
CT-4 MEGA VARS
Use Unit 1 Switchyard Mimic board
AC KILOAMPERES to determine
transformer limits:
* 0.50 AC KILOAMPERES Incoming
(100%)
* 0.60 AC KILOAMPERES Incoming
(100%)
* 0.93 AC KILOAMPERES Incoming
(112%)
I
NOTE
The following statalarms may provide early warning that transformer limits are being approached:
"* SA-18/B-4 (TRANSFORMER CT-4 OIL TEMPERATURE HIGH) (90&deg;C)
"* SA-18/C-4 (TRANSFORMER CT-4 WINDING TEMP HIGH) (1 170C)
I
I
I
I
  CT-4 is NOT designed for loads > 112%. Under extreme emergency conditions, 112% MVA limit
  may be exceeded. Maximum transformer oil and winding limits should NEVER be exceeded.
                                                    NOTE
                                                                                                    j
  The following statalarms may provide early warning that transformer limits are being approached:
                                                                                                    I
  "* SA-18/B-4 (TRANSFORMER CT-4 OIL TEMPERATURE HIGH) (90&deg;C)
                                                                              0
  "* SA-18/C-4 (TRANSFORMER CT-4 WINDING TEMP HIGH) (1 17 C)
  1.  _IAAT        either of the following computer
              points exceed the maximum limit:
            SComputer Pt.          Maximum
                  OIA0835              130 0 C
                  O1A0836              130&deg;C
            THEN take immediate action to reduce
            the load on CT-4.
  2.  Verify both of the following available:                  Use Unit 1 Switchyard Mimic board
                                                                AC KILOAMPERES to determine
                CT-4 MEGA WATTS                                transformer limits:
              CT-4 MEGA VARS                                  * 0.50 AC KILOAMPERES Incoming
                                                                  (100%)
                                                                * 0.60 AC KILOAMPERES Incoming
                                                                  (100%)
                                                                * 0.93 AC KILOAMPERES Incoming
                                                                    (112%)


                                            Enclosure 5.IA             AP/1/A/1700/011
Enclosure 5.IA  
                                        CT-4 Overload Limits          Page 3 of 3
CT-4 Overload Limits
  ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE                               RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED
AP/1/A/1700/011  
3. -Maintain CT-4 within the limits of
Page 3 of 3
    Figure 1.
ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE  
                                              FIGURE 1
RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED  
                                              MEGAWATTS
3.  
                                                                                      C',
-Maintain CT-4 within the limits of  
                                                                                      NC
Figure 1.
        Fal[]
FIGURE 1
4.   -I AA..Z&#xfd;'I UItkt't.LVLS .7 .*fl .
MEGAWATTS
    THEN EXIT this enclosure.
[]
Fal
4.
-I  
AA..Z&#xfd;'I  
UItkt't.LVLS  
.7  
.*fl  
.
THEN EXIT this enclosure.
C',
NC


                                OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                        02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                          1 POINT
1 POINT  
62. Which ONE of the following actions is REQUIRED per SLC 16.11-3, if 1RIA-35 (Low
62. Which ONE of the following actions is REQUIRED per SLC 16.11-3, if 1 RIA-35 (Low  
    Pressure Service Water) fails low and is declared inoperable with Unit 1 operating at
Pressure Service Water) fails low and is declared inoperable with Unit 1 operating at  
    100% power?
100% power?  
    SEE ATTACHMENT: SLC 16.11-3 (Radioactive Effluent Monitoring)
SEE ATTACHMENT: SLC 16.11-3 (Radioactive Effluent Monitoring)  
    A. Release may continue, provided that grab samples are taken every eight (8) hours
A. Release may continue, provided that grab samples are taken every eight (8) hours  
        and analyzed within twenty-four (24) hours.
and analyzed within twenty-four (24) hours.
    B. Release may continue, provided that grab samples are taken and analyzed
B. Release may continue, provided that grab samples are taken and analyzed  
        immediately and every twelve (12) hours thereafter.
immediately and every twelve (12) hours thereafter.
    C. Explain inoperability in next Semiannual Radioactive Effluent Release Report.
C. Explain inoperability in next Semiannual Radioactive Effluent Release Report.
    D. Submit a work request for repair using the normal scheduling process.
D. Submit a work request for repair using the normal scheduling process.
    A) B
A) B  
    Required Attachment: SLC 16.11-3 (Radioactive Effluent Monitoring)
Required Attachment: SLC 16.11-3 (Radioactive Effluent Monitoring)  
    K/A: 062G2.1.20 (4.3/4.2)
K/A: 062G2.1.20 (4.3/4.2)  
    T1G1, TIG1
T1G1, TIG1  
    Bank
Bank  
    Reference:   Facility updated question bank 46 WE011301 WE011301
Reference:  
Facility updated question bank 46 WE011301 WE011301


                                                    Radioactive Effluent Monitoring Instrumentation
Radioactive Effluent Monitoring Instrumentation  
                                                                                            16.11.3
16.11.3  
16.11 RADIOLOGICAL EFFLUENTS CONTROL
16.11 RADIOLOGICAL EFFLUENTS CONTROL  
16.11.3 Radioactive Effluent Monitoring Instrumentation
16.11.3 Radioactive Effluent Monitoring Instrumentation
COMMITMENT             Radioactive Effluent Monitoring Instrumentation shall be OPERABLE as
COMMITMENT
                      follows:
APPLICABILITY:
                      a.       Liquid Effluents
Radioactive Effluent Monitoring Instrumentation shall be OPERABLE as  
                                The radioactive liquid effluent monitoring instrumentation channels
follows:  
                                shown in Table 16.11.3-1 shall be OPERABLE with their alarm/trip
a.  
                                setpoints set to ensure that the limits of SLC 16.11.1 .a are not
Liquid Effluents  
                                exceeded.
The radioactive liquid effluent monitoring instrumentation channels  
                        b.     Gaseous Process and Effluents
shown in Table 16.11.3-1 shall be OPERABLE with their alarm/trip  
                                The radioactive gaseous process and effluent monitoring
setpoints set to ensure that the limits of SLC 16.11.1 .a are not  
                                instrumentation channels shown in Table 16.11.3-2 shall be
exceeded.
                                OPERABLE with their alarm/trip setpoints set to ensure that the
b.  
                                limits of SLC 16.11.2.a are not exceeded.
Gaseous Process and Effluents  
                        c.     The setpoints shall be determined in accordance with the
The radioactive gaseous process and effluent monitoring  
                                methodology described in the ODCM and shall be recorded.
instrumentation channels shown in Table 16.11.3-2 shall be  
                        Correction to setpoints determined in accordance with Commitment c
OPERABLE with their alarm/trip setpoints set to ensure that the  
                        may be permitted without declaring the channel inoperable.
limits of SLC 16.11.2.a are not exceeded.
APPLICABILITY:          According to Table 16.11.3-1 and Table 16.11.3-2.
c.  
ACTIONS
The setpoints shall be determined in accordance with the  
ACTIONS                                                                    COMPLETION TIME
methodology described in the ODCM and shall be recorded.
          CONDITION                       REQUIREr ) ACTION
Correction to setpoints determined in accordance with Commitment c  
  A. Alarm/trip setpoint less     A.1      Declare channel            Immediately
may be permitted without declaring the channel inoperable.
        conservative than                     inoperable.
According to Table 16.11.3-1 and Table 16.11.3-2.
        required for one or
ACTIONS
        more effluent               OR                                                                I
CONDITION
        monitoring instrument
A.  
        channels.                   A.2       Suspend release of         Immediately
Alarm/trip setpoint less  
                                                effluent monitored by
conservative than  
                                                the channel.
required for one or  
                                            16.11.3-1                                       01/31/00 I
more effluent  
monitoring instrument  
channels.
REQUIREr) ACTION
A.1
Declare channel
inoperable.
OR
A.2
Suspend release of  
effluent monitored by  
the channel.
COMPLETION TIME
Immediately
Immediately
01/31/00 I
16.11.3-1
ACTIONS
I


                                            Radioactive Effluent Monitoring Instrumentation
Radioactive Effluent Monitoring Instrumentation  
                                                                                        16.11.3
16.11.3
        CONDITION                 REQUIRED ACTION                 COMPLETION TIME
CONDITION  
B. One or more required       B.1   Enter the Condition         Immediately
REQUIRED ACTION  
    liquid effluent monitoring       referenced in Table
COMPLETION TIME  
    instrument channels               16.11.3-1 for the
B.  
    inoperable.                       function.
One or more required  
                              AND
B.1  
                              B.2   Restore the                 30 days
Enter the Condition  
                                      instrument(s) to
Immediately  
                                      OPERABLE status.
liquid effluent monitoring  
C. One or more required       C.1     Enter the Condition         Immediately
referenced in Table  
    gaseous effluent                 referenced in Table
instrument channels  
    monitoring instrument             16.11.3-2 for the
16.11.3-1 for the  
    channels inoperable,             function.
inoperable.  
                              AND
function.
                              C.2     Restore the                 30 days
AND  
                                      instrument(s) to
B.2  
                                      OPERABLE status.
Restore the  
D. Required Action and         D.1     Explain in next Annual     April 30 of following
30 days  
    associated Completion             Radiological Effluent     calendar year
instrument(s) to  
    Time of Required Action           Release Report why
OPERABLE status.
      B.2 or C.2 not met.               inoperability was not
C. One or more required  
                                        corrected in a timely
C.1  
                                        manner.
Enter the Condition  
                                    16.11.3-2                                           01/31/00 I
Immediately  
gaseous effluent  
referenced in Table  
monitoring instrument  
16.11.3-2 for the  
channels inoperable,  
function.
AND  
C.2  
Restore the  
30 days  
instrument(s) to  
OPERABLE status.
D. Required Action and  
D.1  
Explain in next Annual  
April 30 of following  
associated Completion  
Radiological Effluent  
calendar year  
Time of Required Action  
Release Report why  
B.2 or C.2 not met.  
inoperability was not  
corrected in a timely  
manner.
01/31/00 I
16.11.3-2


                                              Radioactive Effluent Monitoring Instrumentation
Radioactive Effluent Monitoring Instrumentation  
                                                                                        16.11.3
16.11.3
        CONDITION                 REQUIRED ACTION                   COMPLETION TIME
CONDITION  
E. As required by Required E.1.1     Analyze two                 Prior to initiating
REQUIRED ACTION  
    Action B.1 and                   independent samples         subsequent release
COMPLETION TIME  
    referenced in Table               in accordance with
E. As required by Required  
    16.11.3-1. (RIA-33)               SLC 16.11.4.
E.1.1  
                                  AND
Analyze two  
                            E.1.2     Conduct two                 Prior to initiating
Prior to initiating  
                                      independent data entry       subsequent release
Action B.1 and  
                                      checks for release rate
independent samples  
                                      calculations
subsequent release  
                                  AND
referenced in Table  
                            E.1.3     Conduct two                 Prior to initiating
in accordance with  
                                      independent valve           subsequent release
16.11.3-1. (RIA-33)  
                                      lineups of the effluent
SLC 16.11.4.
                                      pathway.
AND  
                            OR
E.1.2  
                            E.2       Suspend release of           Immediately
Conduct two  
                                      radioactive effluents by
Prior to initiating  
                                      this pathway.
independent data entry  
F. As required by Required F.1       Suspend release of           Immediately
subsequent release  
    Action B.1 and                   radioactive effluents by
checks for release rate  
    referenced in Table               this pathway.
calculations  
    16.11.3-1. (RIA-54)
AND  
                            OR
E.1.3  
                            F.2       Collect and analyze         Prior to each discrete
Conduct two  
                                        grab samples for gross       release of the sump
Prior to initiating  
                                        radioactivity (beta
independent valve  
                                        and/or gamma) at a
subsequent release  
                                        lower limit of detection
lineups of the effluent  
                                        of at least 10-7 .Ci/ml.
pathway.
                                    16.11.3-3                                           03/27/99
OR  
E.2  
Suspend release of  
Immediately  
radioactive effluents by  
this pathway.
F. As required by Required  
F.1  
Suspend release of  
Immediately  
Action B.1 and  
radioactive effluents by  
referenced in Table  
this pathway.
16.11.3-1. (RIA-54)  
OR  
F.2  
Collect and analyze  
Prior to each discrete  
grab samples for gross  
release of the sump  
radioactivity (beta  
and/or gamma) at a  
lower limit of detection  
of at least 10-7 .Ci/ml.
16.11.3-3
03/27/99


                                            Radioactive Effluent Monitoring Instrumentation
Radioactive Effluent Monitoring Instrumentation  
                                                                                    16.11.3
16.11.3
      CONDITION           R     REQUIRED ACTION                 COMPLETION TIME
CONDITION  
                              --    - -.NOTE -      -  --
R  
G. As required by Required
REQUIRED ACTION  
  Action B.1 and         Not required during short,
COMPLETION TIME
  referenced in Table     controlled outages of liquid
G. As required by Required  
  16.11.3-1. (Liquid     effluent monitoring
Action B.1 and  
  Radwaste Effluent Line instrumentation. Short controlled
referenced in Table  
  Flow Rate Monitor)      outages are defined as planned
16.11.3-1. (Liquid  
                          removals from service for
Radwaste Effluent Line  
                          durations not to exceed 1 hour,
Flow Rate Monitor)
                          for purposes of sample filter
--
                          changeouts, setpoint
-
                          adjustments, service checks,
-.NOTE -
                          and/or routine maintenance
-
                          procedures. This guidance may
--
                          be applied successively,
Not required during short,
                          provided that time between
controlled outages of liquid
                          successive short, controlled
effluent monitoring
                          outages is always at least equal
instrumentation. Short controlled  
                          to duration of immediately
outages are defined as planned  
                            preceding outage.
removals from service for  
                            G.1       Suspend release of         Immediately
durations not to exceed 1 hour,  
                                    radioactive effluents by
for purposes of sample filter  
                                    this pathway.
changeouts, setpoint  
                            OR
adjustments, service checks,  
                            G.2      Estimate flow rate         Immediately
and/or routine maintenance  
                                      during actual releases.
procedures. This guidance may  
                                                                AND
be applied successively,  
                                                                Once per 4 hours
provided that time between  
                                                                thereafter
successive short, controlled  
                                    16.11.3-4                                       03/27/99
outages is always at least equal  
to duration of immediately  
preceding outage.
G.1
OR
G.2
Suspend release of  
radioactive effluents by  
this pathway.
Estimate flow rate  
during actual releases.
Immediately
Immediately
AND  
Once per 4 hours  
thereafter
16.11.3-4
03/27/99


                                              Radioactive Effluent Monitoring Instrumentation
Radioactive Effluent Monitoring Instrumentation  
                                                                                      16.11.3
16.11.3
      CONDITION                 REQUIRED ACTION                   COMPLETION TIME
CONDITION  
                                          NOTE
REQUIRED ACTION  
H. As required by Required Not required during short,
COMPLETION TIME
  Action B.1 and         controlled outages of liquid
H. As required by Required  
  referenced in Table     effluent monitoring
Action B.1 and  
  16.11.3-1. (RIA-35, #3 instrumentation. Short controlled
referenced in Table  
  Chemical Treatment      outages are defined as planned
16.11.3-1. (RIA-35, #3  
  Pond Composite          "removals from service for
Chemical Treatment
  Sampler and Sampler    durations not to exceed 1 hour,
Pond Composite
  Flow Moditor (Turbine  for purposes of sample filter
Sampler and Sampler
  Building Sumps          changeouts, setpoint
Flow Moditor (Turbine
  Effluent))              adjustments, service checks,
Building Sumps
                            and/or routine maintenance
Effluent))
                            procedures. This guidance may
NOTE
                            be applied successively,
Not required during short,
                            provided that time between
controlled outages of liquid
                            successive short, controlled
effluent monitoring
                            outages is always at least equal
instrumentation. Short controlled  
                            to duration of immediately
outages are defined as planned  
                            preceding outage.
"removals from service for  
                            H.1       Suspend release of           Immediately
durations not to exceed 1 hour,  
                                      radioactive effluents by
for purposes of sample filter  
                                      this pathway.
changeouts, setpoint  
                            OR
adjustments, service checks,  
                            H.2       Collect and analyze         Immediately
and/or routine maintenance  
                                      grab samples for gross
procedures. This guidance may  
                                      radioactivity (beta         AND
be applied successively,  
                                      and/or gamma) at a
provided that time between  
                                      lower limit of detection     Once per 12 hours
successive short, controlled  
                                      of at least 10i7 iCi/ml.   thereafter
outages is always at least equal  
                                    16.11.3-5                                       01/31/00 1
to duration of immediately  
preceding outage.
H.1
Suspend release of  
radioactive effluents by  
this pathway.
OR  
H.2
Collect and analyze  
grab samples for gross  
radioactivity (beta  
and/or gamma) at a  
lower limit of detection  
of at least 10i7 iCi/ml.
Immediately
Immediately
AND
Once per 12 hours
thereafter
01/31/00 1
16.11.3-5


                                          Radioactive Effluent Monitoring Instrumentation
Radioactive Effluent Monitoring Instrumentation  
                                                                                  16.11.3
16.11.3
    CONDITION                   REQUIRED ACTION                 COMPLETION TIME
CONDITION  
                                        NOTE
REQUIRED ACTION  
As required by Required Not required during short,
COMPLETION TIME
Action CA and           controlled outages of gaseous
As required by Required  
referenced in Table     effluent monitoring
Action CA and  
16.11.3-2 for effluent instrumentation. Short controlled
referenced in Table  
releases from waste gas outages are defined as planned
16.11.3-2 for effluent  
tanks (RIA-37, RIA-38) removals from service for
releases from waste gas  
or containment purges   durations not to exceed 1 hour,
tanks (RIA-37, RIA-38)  
or containment purges  
(RIA-45).
(RIA-45).
                        for purposes of sample filter
NOTE
                        changeouts, setpoint
Not required during short,
                        adjustments, service checks,
controlled outages of gaseous
                        and/or routine maintenance
effluent monitoring
                        procedures. This guidance may
instrumentation. Short controlled
                        be applied successively,
outages are defined as planned
                        provided that time between
removals from service for
                        successive short, controlled
durations not to exceed 1 hour,
                        outages is always at least equal
for purposes of sample filter  
                        to duration of immediately
changeouts, setpoint  
                        preceding outage.
adjustments, service checks,  
                        1.1.1     Analyze two
and/or routine maintenance  
                                                              Prior to initiating
procedures. This guidance may  
                                  independent samples.       subsequent release
be applied successively,  
                                AND
provided that time between  
                          1.1.2     Conduct two               Prior to initiating
successive short, controlled  
                                  independent data entry     subsequent release
outages is always at least equal  
                                  checks for release rate
to duration of immediately  
                                  calculations
preceding outage.
                                AND
1.1.1  
                          1.1.3     Conduct two               Prior to initiating
Analyze two  
                                    independent valve         subsequent release
independent samples.
                                    lineups of the effluent
AND  
                                    pathway.
1.1.2  
                          OR
Conduct two  
                          1.2       Suspend release of         Immediately
independent data entry  
                                    radioactive effluents by
checks for release rate  
                                    this pathway.
calculations  
                                  16.11.3-6                                       01/31/00 1
AND  
1.1.3  
Conduct two  
independent valve  
lineups of the effluent  
pathway.
OR  
1.2  
Suspend release of  
radioactive effluents by  
this pathway.
Prior to initiating
subsequent release
Prior to initiating
subsequent release
Prior to initiating
subsequent release
Immediately
01/31/00 1
16.11.3-6


                                            Radioactive Effluent Monitoring Instrumentation
Radioactive Effluent Monitoring Instrumentation  
                                                                                    16.11.3
16.11.3
      CONDITION               REQUIRED ACTION                     COMPLETION TIME
CONDITION  
                                      NOTE
REQUIRED ACTION  
J. As required by Required
COMPLETION TIME
                          Not required during short,
J.  
  Action C.1 and
As required by Required  
  referenced in Table     controlled outages of gaseous
Action C.1 and  
                          effluent monitoring
referenced in Table  
  16.11.3-2. (Effluent
16.11.3-2. (Effluent  
                          instrumentation. Short controlled
Flow Rate Monitor (Unit
  Flow Rate Monitor (Unit outages are defined as planned
Vent, Containment
  Vent, Containment
Purge, Interim
                          removals from service for
Radwaste Exhaust, Hot
  Purge, Interim
Machine Shop Exhaust,
                          durations not to exceed 1 hour,
Radwaste Facility
  Radwaste Exhaust, Hot  for purposes of sample filter
Exhaust, Waste Gas
  Machine Shop Exhaust,
Discharge ))
                          changeouts, setpoint
NOTE
  Radwaste Facility
Not required during short,
                          adjustments, service checks,                                     I
controlled outages of gaseous
  Exhaust, Waste Gas      and/or routine maintenance
effluent monitoring
  Discharge ))
instrumentation. Short controlled  
                          procedures. This guidance may
outages are defined as planned  
                          be applied successively,
removals from service for  
                            provided that time between
durations not to exceed 1 hour,  
                          successive short, controlled
for purposes of sample filter  
                          outages is always at least equal
changeouts, setpoint  
                          to duration of immediately
adjustments, service checks,  
                            preceding outage.
and/or routine maintenance  
                            J.1       Suspend release of         Immediately
procedures. This guidance may  
                                    radioactive effluents by
be applied successively,  
                                    this pathway.
provided that time between  
                            OR
successive short, controlled  
                            J.2       Estimate flow rate         Immediately
outages is always at least equal  
                                                                AND
to duration of immediately  
                                                                Once per 4 hours
preceding outage.
                                                                thereafter
J.1  
                                    16.11.3-7                                       01/31/00 1
Suspend release of  
radioactive effluents by  
this pathway.
OR
J.2
Estimate flow rate
01/31/00 1
Immediately
Immediately  
AND  
Once per 4 hours  
thereafter
I
16.11.3-7


                                            Radioactive Effluent Monitoring Instrumentation
Radioactive Effluent Monitoring Instrumentation  
                                                                                    16.11.3
16.11.3
      CONDITION                   REQUIRED ACTION                 COMPLETION TIME
CONDITION  
K. As required by Required               NOTE ------------
REQUIRED ACTION  
  Action C.1 and         Not required during short,
COMPLETION TIME
  referenced in Table     controlled outages of gaseous
K. As required by Required  
  16.11.3-2. '(RIA-45.   effluent monitoring
Action C.1 and  
  RIA-53, 4RIA-45)       instrumentation. Short controlled
referenced in Table  
                          outages are defined as planned
16.11.3-2. '(RIA-45.
                          removals from service for
RIA-53, 4RIA-45)
                          durations not to exceed 1 hour,
----
                          for purposes of sample filter
NOTE --------
                          changeouts, setpoint
Not required during short,
                          adjustments, service checks,
controlled outages of gaseous
                          and/or routine maintenance
effluent monitoring
                          procedures. This guidance may
instrumentation. Short controlled  
                          be applied successively,
outages are defined as planned  
                          provided that time between
removals from service for  
                          successive short, controlled
durations not to exceed 1 hour,  
                          outages is always at least equal
for purposes of sample filter  
                          to duration of immediately
changeouts, setpoint  
                          preceding outage.
adjustments, service checks,  
                          K.1       Suspend release of         Immediately
and/or routine maintenance  
                                    radioactive effluents by
procedures. This guidance may  
                                    this pathway.
be applied successively,  
                          OR
provided that time between  
                          K.2.1     Collect grab sample.       Immediately
successive short, controlled  
                                                                AND
outages is always at least equal  
                                                                Once per 8 hours
to duration of immediately  
                                  AND
preceding outage.
                            K.2.2     Analyze grab samples       24 hours from collection
K.1  
                                    for gross activity (beta   of sample
Suspend release of  
                                      and/or gamma).
radioactive effluents by  
                                    16.11.3-8                                       11/14/001
this pathway.
OR  
K.2.1  
Collect grab sample.
AND  
K.2.2  
Analyze grab samples  
for gross activity (beta  
and/or gamma).
Immediately
Immediately
AND
Once per 8 hours
24 hours from collection
of sample
16.11.3-8
11/14/001


                                              Radioactive Effluent Monitoring Instrumentation
Radioactive Effluent Monitoring Instrumentation  
                                                                                      16.11.3
16.11.3
      CONDITION                   REQUIRED ACTION                 COMPLETION TIME
CONDITION  
L. As required by Required                 -NOTE
REQUIRED ACTION  
                            Not  required  during short,
COMPLETION TIME
  Action C.1 and
L. As required by Required  
  referenced in Table       controlled outages of gaseous
Action C.1 and  
                            effluent monitoring
referenced in Table  
  16.11.3-2. (Unit Vent
16.11.3-2. (Unit Vent  
  Monitoring Iodine         instrumentation. Short controlled
Monitoring Iodine  
  Sampler, Unit Vent        outages are defined as planned
Sampler, Unit Vent
                            removals from service for
Monitoring Particulate
  Monitoring Particulate
Sampler, Interim
                            durations not to exceed 1 hour,
Radwate Building
  Sampler, Interim
Ventilation Monitoring
                            for purposes of sample filter
Iodine Sampler, Interim
  Radwate Building
Radwaste Building
  Ventilation Monitoring    changeouts, setpoint
Ventilation Monitoring
                            adjustments, service checks,
Particulate Sampler, Hot
  Iodine Sampler, Interim
Machine Shop Iodine
                            and/or routine maintenance
Sampler, Hot Machine
  Radwaste Building
Shop Particulate
  Ventilation Monitoring    procedures. This guidance may
Sampler, Radwaste
                                          successively,
Facility Iodine Sampler,
  Particulate Sampler, Hot be applied
Radwaste Facility
                            provided   that time between
Particulate Sampler)
  Machine Shop Iodine
-NOTE
                            successive short, controlled
Not required during short,
  Sampler, Hot Machine
controlled outages of gaseous
                            outages is always at least equal
effluent monitoring
  Shop Particulate
instrumentation. Short controlled  
                            to duration of immediately
outages are defined as planned  
  Sampler, Radwaste
removals from service for  
    Facility Iodine Sampler,  preceding outage.
durations not to exceed 1 hour,  
    Radwaste Facility
for purposes of sample filter  
    Particulate Sampler)
changeouts, setpoint  
                              L.1       Suspend release of         Immediately
adjustments, service checks,  
                                      radioactive effluents by
and/or routine maintenance  
                                      this pathway.
procedures. This guidance may  
                              OR
be applied successively,  
                              L.2.1               NOTE
provided that time between  
                                        The collection time of
successive short, controlled  
                                        each sample shall not
outages is always at least equal  
                                        exceed 7 days.
to duration of immediately  
                                        Collect samples           Immediately
preceding outage.
                                        continuously using
L.1  
                                        auxiliary sampling
Suspend release of  
                                        equipment.
radioactive effluents by  
                                    AND
this pathway.
                              L.2.2     Analyze each sample.       48 hours from end of
OR  
                                                                    each sample collection
L.2.1  
                                      16.11.3-9                                       01/31/00 1
NOTE  
The collection time of  
each sample shall not  
exceed 7 days.
Collect samples  
continuously using  
auxiliary sampling  
equipment.
AND  
L.2.2  
Analyze each sample.
Immediately
Immediately
48 hours from end of  
each sample collection
01/31/00 1
16.11.3-9


                                              Radioactive Effluent Monitoring Instrumentation
Radioactive Effluent Monitoring Instrumentation  
                                                                                      16.11.3
16.11.3
      CONDITION                   REQUIRED ACTION                 COMPLETION TIME
CONDITION  
                                          -NOTE
REQUIRED ACTION  
M. As required by Required   Not required during short,
COMPLETION TIME
  Action C.1 and
M. As required by Required  
                            controlled outages of gaseous
Action C.1 and  
  referenced in Table       effluent monitoring
referenced in Table  
  16.11.3-2 for effluent
16.11.3-2 for effluent  
                            instrumentation. Short controlled
releases from ventilation  
  releases from ventilation
system or condenser air  
                            outages are defined as planned
ejectors. (RIA-40)
  system or condenser air
-NOTE
                            removals from service for
Not required during short,
  ejectors. (RIA-40)
controlled outages of gaseous
                            durations not to exceed 1 hour,
effluent monitoring
                            for purposes of sample filter
instrumentation. Short controlled
                            changeouts, setpoint
outages are defined as planned
                            adjustments, service checks,
removals from service for
                            and/or routine maintenance
durations not to exceed 1 hour,  
                            procedures. This guidance may
for purposes of sample filter  
                            be applied successively,
changeouts, setpoint  
                            provided that time between
adjustments, service checks,  
                            successive short, controlled
and/or routine maintenance  
                            outages is always at least equal
procedures. This guidance may  
                            to duration of immediately
be applied successively,  
                              preceding outage.
provided that time between  
                              M.1     Continuously monitor       Immediately
successive short, controlled  
                                      release through the unit
outages is always at least equal  
                                      vent.
to duration of immediately  
                              OR
preceding outage.
                              M.2     Suspend release of         Immediately
M.1
                                      radioactive effluents by
Continuously monitor  
                                      this pathway.
release through the unit  
                              OR
vent.
                              M.3.1     Collect grab sample.       Immediately
OR  
                                                                  AND
M.2
                                                                  Once per 8 hours
Suspend release of  
                                  AND
radioactive effluents by  
                              M.3.2     Analyze grab sample for     24 hours from collection
this pathway.
                                        gross activity (beta       of grab sample
OR  
                                        and/or gamma).
M.3.1  
                                                                                      01/31/00  I
Collect grab sample.
                                    16.11.3-10
AND  
                                    16.11.3-10                                       01/31/001
M.3.2  
Analyze grab sample for  
gross activity (beta  
and/or gamma).
Immediately
Immediately
Immediately
AND
Once per 8 hours
24 hours from collection
of grab sample
16.11.3-10  
01/31/00 I
01/31/001
16.11.3-10


                                              Radioactive Effluent Monitoring Instrumentation
Radioactive Effluent Monitoring Instrumentation  
                                                                                      16.11.3
16.11.3
SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS
SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS
                    SURVEILLANCE                                       FREQUENCY
SURVEILLANCE
SR 16.11.3.1
SR 16.11.3.1
              The Channel Response check shall consist of
The Channel Response check shall consist of  
              verifying indications during periods of release.
verifying indications during periods of release.
              Channel response checks shall be made at
Channel response checks shall be made at  
              least once per calendar day on days in which
least once per calendar day on days in which  
              continuous, periodic or batch releases are
continuous, periodic or batch releases are  
              made.
made.
              Perform Channel Response Check.                     During each release via
Perform Channel Response Check.
                                                                  this pathway
SR 16.11.3.2
SR 16.11.3.2       S------NOTE ..               ..----------
S------NOTE ..  
              The Channel Response check shall consist of
..----------
              verifying indications during periods of release.
The Channel Response check shall consist of  
              Channel response checks shall be made at
verifying indications during periods of release.
              least once per calendar day on days in which
Channel response checks shall be made at  
              continuous, periodic or batch releases are
least once per calendar day on days in which  
                made.
continuous, periodic or batch releases are  
                Perform Channel Response Check.                     24 hours
made.
SR 16.11.3.3   Perform Source Check.                               24 hours
Perform Channel Response Check.
SR 16.11.3.4   Perform Source Check.                               31 days
FREQUENCY
  SR 16.11.3.5 Perform Source Check.                               92 days
During each release via
                                    16.11.3-11                                       03/27/99
this pathway
24 hours
SR 16.11.3.3  
Perform Source Check.  
24 hours  
SR 16.11.3.4  
Perform Source Check.  
31 days  
SR 16.11.3.5  
Perform Source Check.  
92 days
16.11.3-11
03/27/99


                                                Radioactive Effluent Monitoring Instrumentation
Radioactive Effluent Monitoring Instrumentation  
                                                                                        16.11.3
16.11.3
                    SURVEILLANCE                                        FREQUENCY
SR 16.11.3.7
SR 16.11.3.6                      -NOTE
-NOTE  
              The CHANNEL FUNCTIONAL TEST shall
The CHANNEL FUNCTIONAL TEST shall  
              also demonstrate that automatic isolation of
also demonstrate that automatic isolation of  
              this pathway and control room annunciation
this pathway and control room annunciation  
              occurs if any of the following conditions exist:
occurs if any of the following conditions exist:  
              1.     Instrument indicates measured levels
1.  
                      above the alarm/trip setpoint.
Instrument indicates measured levels  
              2.     Circuit failure (downscale only).
above the alarm/trip setpoint.
              Perform CHANNEL FUNCTIONAL TEST.                     92 days
2.  
SR 16.11.3.7        - -         -- ~~NOTE-       -   -   -
Circuit failure (downscale only).
              The CHANNEL FUNCTIONAL TEST shall
Perform CHANNEL FUNCTIONAL TEST.
              also demonstrate that control room
-
              annunciation occurs if any of the following
-
              conditions exist:
-- ~~NOTE-  
              1.     Instrument indicates measured levels
-
                      above the alarm/trip setpoint.
-
              2.     Circuit failure (downscale only).
-
                                                                    92 days
The CHANNEL FUNCTIONAL TEST shall  
              Perform CHANNEL FUNCTIONAL TEST.
also demonstrate that control room  
SR 16.11.3.8 Perform CHANNEL FUNCTIONAL TEST.                     92 days
annunciation occurs if any of the following  
                                      16.11.3-12                                       01/31/00 I
conditions exist:  
1.  
Instrument indicates measured levels  
above the alarm/trip setpoint.
2.  
Circuit failure (downscale only).
Perform CHANNEL FUNCTIONAL TEST.
FREQUENCY
92 days
92 days
01/31/00 I
SURVEILLANCE
SR 16.11.3.6
SR 16.11.3.8  
Perform CHANNEL FUNCTIONAL TEST.  
92 days
16.11.3-12


                                            Radioactive Effluent Monitoring Instrumentation
Radioactive Effluent Monitoring Instrumentation  
                                                                                    16.11.3
16.11.3
                    SURVEILLANCE                                      FREQUENCY
-NOTE  
SR 16.11.3.9                      -NOTE
The initial CHANNEL CALIBRATION shall be  
              The initial CHANNEL CALIBRATION shall be
performed using one or more of the reference  
              performed using one or more of the reference
standards certified by the National Bureau of  
              standards certified by the National Bureau of
Standards or using standards that have been  
              Standards or using standards that have been
obtained from suppliers that participate in  
              obtained from suppliers that participate in
measurement assurance activities with the  
              measurement assurance activities with the
National Institute of Standards and  
              National Institute of Standards and
Technology (NIST). The standards shall  
              Technology (NIST). The standards shall
permit calibrating the system over its intended  
              permit calibrating the system over its intended
range of energy and measurement. For  
              range of energy and measurement. For
subsequent CHANNEL CALIBRATION,  
              subsequent CHANNEL CALIBRATION,
sources that have been related to the initial  
              sources that have been related to the initial
calibration shall be used. (Operating plants  
              calibration shall be used. (Operating plants
may substitute previously established  
              may substitute previously established
calibration procedures for these  
              calibration procedures for these
requirements.)
              requirements.)
Perform CHANNEL CALIBRATION.
                                                                  12 months
FREQUENCY
              Perform CHANNEL CALIBRATION.
12 months
SR 16.11.3.10   Perform CHANNEL CALIBRATION.                     12 months
SR 16.11.3.10  
SR 16.11.3.11 Perform leak test.                               When cylinder gates or
Perform CHANNEL CALIBRATION.  
                                                                  wicket gates are
12 months  
                                                                  reworked
SR 16.11.3.11  
SR 16.11.3.12 Perform Source Check.                             Within 24 hours prior to
Perform leak test.  
                                                                  each release via
When cylinder gates or  
                                                                  associated pathway
wicket gates are  
                                    16.11.3-13                                     01/31/00 I
reworked  
SR 16.11.3.12  
Perform Source Check.  
Within 24 hours prior to  
each release via  
associated pathway
01/31/00 I
SURVEILLANCE
SR 16.11.3.9
16.11.3-13


                                                        Radioactive Effluent Monitoring Instrumentation
Radioactive Effluent Monitoring Instrumentation  
                                                                                                16.11.3
16.11.3  
                                                Table 16.11.3-1
Table 16.11.3-1  
                                LIQUID EFFLUENT MONITORING INSTRUMENTATION
LIQUID EFFLUENT MONITORING INSTRUMENTATION  
                          OPERATING CONDITIONS AND SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS
OPERATING CONDITIONS AND SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS
                                                                                          CONDITION
CONDITION  
                                                                                          REFERENCED
REFERENCED  
                                  MINIMUM                                               FROM
MINIMUM  
                                  OPERABLE                             SURVEILLANCE     REQUIRED
FROM  
      INSTRUMENT                 CHANNELS           APPLICABILITY     REQUIREMENTS     ACTION B.1
OPERABLE  
  Monitors Providing
SURVEILLANCE  
  Automatic Termination of
REQUIRED  
  Release
INSTRUMENT  
  a.  Liquid Radwaste               I                  At all times     SR 16.11.3.1     E
CHANNELS  
      Effluent Line Monitor,                                            SR 16.11.3.3
APPLICABILITY  
      RIA-33                                                            SR 16.11.3.6
REQUIREMENTS  
                                                                        SR 16.11.3.9
ACTION B.1
  b. Turbine Building Sump.        I                  At all times    SR 16.11.3.2     F
Monitors Providing  
        RIA-54                                                          SR 16.11.3.4
Automatic Termination of  
                                                                        SR 16.11.3.7
Release  
                                                                        SR 16.11.3.9
a.
2. Monitors not Providing
Liquid Radwaste
  Automatic Termination
Effluent Line Monitor,
  of Release
RIA-33
  Low Pressure Service Water        I                  At all times    SR 16,11.3.2     H
b. Turbine Building Sump.   
    RIA-35                                                              SR 16.11.3.4
RIA-54
                                                                        SR 16.11.3.7
2.
                                                                        SR 16.11.3.9
Monitors not Providing
3.  Flow Rate Measuring
Automatic Termination
    Devices
of Release
    a.  Liquid Radwaste                                  At all times    SR 16.11.3.1     G
Low Pressure Service Water
        Effluent Line Flow Rate                                          SR 16.11.3.10
RIA-35
        Monitor
3.
        (OLW CR0725 or
Flow Rate Measuring
        OLW SS0920)
Devices
    b.  Liquid Radwaste              NA                NA                SR 16.11.3.1     NA
a.
        Effluent Line Minimum                                            SR 16.11.3.10
Liquid Radwaste
        Flow Device
Effluent Line Flow Rate
    c.  Turbine Building Sump        NA                NA                SR 16.11.3.1     NA
Monitor
        Minimum Flow Device                                              SR 16.11.3.10
(OLW CR0725 or
    d. Low Pressure Service          NA                NA                SR 16.11.3.1     NA
OLW SS0920)
        Water Minimum Flow                                                SR 16.11.3.10
b.
        Device
Liquid Radwaste  
                                              16.11.3-14                                         03/27/99
Effluent Line Minimum
Flow Device
c. Turbine Building Sump
Minimum Flow Device
d. Low Pressure Service
Water Minimum Flow
Device
At all times
At all times
At all times
At all times
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
SR 16.11.3.1  
SR 16.11.3.3  
SR 16.11.3.6  
SR 16.11.3.9  
SR 16.11.3.2  
SR 16.11.3.4  
SR 16.11.3.7  
SR 16.11.3.9
SR
SR
SR
SR
16,11.3.2  
16.11.3.4  
16.11.3.7  
16.11.3.9
SR 16.11.3.1  
SR 16.11.3.10  
SR 16.11.3.1  
SR 16.11.3.10  
SR 16.11.3.1  
SR 16.11.3.10  
SR 16.11.3.1  
SR 16.11.3.10
E
F
H
G
NA
NA
NA
16.11.3-14
I
I
I
03/27/99


                                                              Radioactive Effluent Monitoring Instrumentation
Radioactive Effluent Monitoring Instrumentation  
                                                                                                                        16.11.3
16.11.3  
                                                      Table 16.11.3-1
Table 16.11.3-1  
                                  LIQUID EFFLUENT MONITORING INSTRUMENTATION
LIQUID EFFLUENT MONITORING INSTRUMENTATION  
                            OPERATING CONDITIONS AND SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS
OPERATING CONDITIONS AND SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS
                                                                                                              CONDITION
CONDITION  
                                                                                                              REFERENCED
REFERENCED  
                                    MINIMUM                                                                 FROM
MINIMUM  
                                    OPERABLE                                         SURVEILLANCE           REQUIRED
FROM  
          INSTRUMENT                 CHANNELS               APPLICABILITY             REQUIREMENTS           ACTION B.1
OPERABLE  
e. Keowee Hydroelectric           NA                       NA                       SR 16.11.3.11         NA
SURVEILLANCE  
    Tailrace Discharge (a'
REQUIRED  
  4. Continuous Composite
INSTRUMENT  
    Sampler
CHANNELS  
    #3 Chemical Treatment             1                       At all times           SR 16.11.3.2           H
APPLICABILITY  
    Pond Composite Sampler                                                           SR 16.11.3.10
REQUIREMENTS  
    and Sampler Flow Monitor
ACTION B.1  
    (Turbine Building Sumps
e.  
    Effluent)
Keowee Hydroelectric  
(a)     Flow is determined from the number of hydro units operating. If no hydro units are operating, leakage flow will be
NA  
        assumed to be 38 cfs based on historical data.
NA  
                                                    16.11.3-15                                                         03/27/99
SR 16.11.3.11  
NA  
Tailrace Discharge (a'  
4.  
Continuous Composite  
Sampler  
#3 Chemical Treatment  
1  
At all times  
SR 16.11.3.2  
H  
Pond Composite Sampler  
SR 16.11.3.10  
and Sampler Flow Monitor  
(Turbine Building Sumps  
Effluent)  
(a)  
Flow is determined from the number of hydro units operating. If no hydro units are operating, leakage flow will be  
assumed to be 38 cfs based on historical data.
16.11.3-15
03/27/99


                                                          Radioactive Effluent Monitoring Instrumentation
Radioactive Effluent Monitoring Instrumentation  
                                                                                                    16.11.3
16.11.3  
                                                  Table 16.11.3-2
Table 16.11.3-2  
                                  GASEOUS EFFLUENT MONITORING INSTRUMENTATION
GASEOUS EFFLUENT MONITORING INSTRUMENTATION  
                              OPERATING CONDITIONS AND SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS
OPERATING CONDITIONS AND SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS
                                      MINIMUM                                               CONDITION
MINIMUM  
                                      OPERABLE                                             REFERENCED
CONDITION  
                                      CHANNELS                                             FROM
OPERABLE  
                                      (PER RELEASE                         SURVEILLANCE   REQUIRED
REFERENCED  
          INSTRUMENT                 PATH)               APPLICABILITY     REQUIREMENTS   ACTION CA
CHANNELS  
1.  Unit Vent Monitoring System
FROM  
    a.     Noble Gas Activity               1               At All Times   SR 16.11.3.2
(PER RELEASE  
          Monitor Providing Alarm                                          SR 16.11.3.4
SURVEILLANCE  
          and Automatic                                                    SR 16.11.3.7
REQUIRED  
          Termination of                                                  SR 16.11.3.9
INSTRUMENT  
          Containment Purge
PATH)  
          Release (RIA45 - Purge
APPLICABILITY  
          Isolation Function)
REQUIREMENTS  
    b.    Noble Gas Activity                                At all times  SR 16.11.3.2         K
ACTION CA
          Monitor Providing Alarm.                                        SR 16.11.3.4
1.
          (RIA-45 - Vent Stack                                            SR 16.11.3.7
Unit Vent Monitoring System
          Monitor Function)                                                SR 16.11.3.9
a.
    c.    Iodine Sampler                                    At All Times  SR 16.11.3.2         L
Noble Gas Activity
    d.    Particulate Sampler                                At All Times  SR 16.11.3.2         L
Monitor Providing Alarm
    e.    Effluent Flow Rate                1                At All Times  SR 16.11.3.2         J
and Automatic
          Monitor (Unit Vent Flow)                                        SR 16.11.3.10
Termination of
          (GWD CR0037)
Containment Purge
    f.      Sampler Flow Rate                                At All Times  SR 16.11.3.2         NA
Release (RIA45 - Purge
            Monitor W,(Annunciator)                                        SR 16.11.3.10
Isolation Function)
    g.      Effluent Flow Rate                          During Containment SR 16.11.3.2         J
b.
            Monitor (Containment                          Purge Operation  SR 16.11.3.10
Noble Gas Activity
            Purge) (PR CR0082)
Monitor Providing Alarm.   
    h.    CSAE Off Gas Monitor                          During Operation  SR 16.11.3.2         M
(RIA-45 - Vent Stack
            (RIA-40)                                          of CSAE      SR 16.11.3.5
Monitor Function)
                                                                            SR 16.11.3.8
c.
                                                                            SR 16.11.3.9
Iodine Sampler
2.  Interim Radwaste Building
d.
    Ventilation Monitoring System
Particulate Sampler
    a.    Noble Gas Activity                                At All Times  SR 16.11.3.2         K
e.
            Monitor (RIA - 53)                                              SR 16.11.3.4
Effluent Flow Rate
                                                                            SR 16.11.3.7
Monitor (Unit Vent Flow)
                                                                            SR  16.11.3.9
(GWD CR0037)
    b.    Iodine Sampler                                    At All Times  SR 16.11.3.2         L
f.
    c.    Particulate Sampler                              At All Times  SR 16.11.3.2         L
Sampler Flow Rate
    d.    Effluent Flow Rate                1              At All Times  SR 16.11.3.2         J
Monitor W, (Annunciator)
            Monitor (Interim                                                SR 16.11.3.10
g.
            Radwaste Exhaust)
Effluent Flow Rate
            (GWD FTO082)
Monitor (Containment
    e.    Sampler Flow Rate                                                SR 16.11.3.2         NA
Purge) (PR CR0082)
                                                              At All Times
h.
            Monitorl') (Annunciator)                                        SR 16.11.3.10
CSAE Off Gas Monitor
                                                16.11.3-16                                        03/27/99
(RIA-40)
2.
Interim Radwaste Building
Ventilation Monitoring System  
a.  
Noble Gas Activity  
Monitor (RIA - 53)
b.
Iodine Sampler
c.
Particulate Sampler
d.
Effluent Flow Rate
Monitor (Interim
Radwaste Exhaust)
(GWD FTO082)
e.
Sampler Flow Rate
Monitorl') (Annunciator)
At All Times
At all times
At All Times
At All Times
At All Times
At All Times
1
During Containment
Purge Operation
During Operation
of CSAE
At All Times
At All Times
At All Times
At All Times
1
At All Times
16.11.3-16
SR 16.11.3.2  
SR 16.11.3.4  
SR 16.11.3.7  
SR 16.11.3.9
SR 16.11.3.2  
SR 16.11.3.4  
SR 16.11.3.7  
SR 16.11.3.9  
SR 16.11.3.2  
SR 16.11.3.2  
SR 16.11.3.2  
SR 16.11.3.10  
SR 16.11.3.2  
SR 16.11.3.10  
SR 16.11.3.2  
SR 16.11.3.10  
SR 16.11.3.2  
SR 16.11.3.5  
SR 16.11.3.8  
SR 16.11.3.9
K
L
L
J
NA
J
M
K
SR
SR
SR
SR
16.11.3.2  
16.11.3.4  
16.11.3.7  
16.11.3.9
SR 16.11.3.2  
SR 16.11.3.2  
SR 16.11.3.2  
SR 16.11.3.10  
SR 16.11.3.2  
SR 16.11.3.10
L
L
J
NA
1
03/27/99


                                                                Radioactive Effluent Monitoring Instrumentation
Radioactive Effluent Monitoring Instrumentation  
                                                                                                                16.11.3
16.11.3  
                                                        Table 16.11.3-2
Table 16.11.3-2  
                                    GASEOUS EFFLUENT MONITORING INSTRUMENTATION
GASEOUS EFFLUENT MONITORING INSTRUMENTATION  
                                OPERATING CONDITIONS AND SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS
OPERATING CONDITIONS AND SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS
                                      MINIMUM                                                         CONDITION
MINIMUM  
                                      OPERABLE                                                       REFERENCED
CONDITION  
                                      CHANNELS                                                       FROM
OPERABLE  
                                      (PER RELEASE                                   SURVEILLANCE   REQUIRED
REFERENCED  
            INSTRUMENT                 PATH)                   APPLICABILITY         REQUIREMENTS   ACTION C.1
CHANNELS  
    3.Hot Machine Shop Ventilation
FROM  
      Sampling System
(PER RELEASE  
      a.   Iodine Sampler                     1                    At All Times      SR 16.11.3.2          L
SURVEILLANCE  
      b.   Particulate Sampler               1                    At All Times      SR 16.11.3.2          L
REQUIRED  
      c.   Effluent Flow Rate                                     At All Times      SR 16.11.3.2          J
INSTRUMENT  
            Monitor (Hot Machine                                                       SR 16.11.3.10
PATH)  
            Shop Exhaust)
APPLICABILITY  
            (Totalizer)
REQUIREMENTS  
      d.   Sampler Flow Rate                 1                    At All Times      SR 16.11.3.2        NA
ACTION C.1
            Monitor 0&#xfd; (Annunciator)                                                   SR 16.11.3.10
3.Hot Machine Shop Ventilation  
4.   Radwaste Facility Ventilation
Sampling System  
      Monitoring System
a.  
      a.   Noble Gas Activity                                     At All Times       SR 16.11.3.2         K
Iodine Sampler  
            Monitor (4-RIA-45)                                                        SR 16.11.3.4
b.  
                                                1                                      SR 16.11.3.7
Particulate Sampler  
                                                                                        SR 16.11.3.9
c.  
      b.    Iodine Sampler                                        At All Times        SR 16.11.3.2         L
Effluent Flow Rate  
      c.   Particulate Sampler                                    At All Times        SR 16.11.3.2         L
Monitor (Hot Machine  
      d.   Effluent Flow Rate                1                  At All Times        SR 16.11.3.2          J
Shop Exhaust)  
            Monitor (Radwaste                                                          SR 16.11.3.10
(Totalizer)  
            Facility Exhaust) (0VS
d.  
            CR2060)
Sampler Flow Rate  
      e.    Sampler Flow Rate                  1                    At All Times      SR 16.11.3.2         NA
Monitor 0&#xfd; (Annunciator)  
            Monitor 41)(Annunciator)                                                  SR 16.11.3.10
4.  
  5. Waste Gas Holdup Tanks
Radwaste Facility Ventilation  
        a.   Noble Gas Activity                1              During Waste Gas        SR 16.11.3.1
Monitoring System  
              Monitor - Providing                            Holdup Tank Releases      SR 16.11.3.6
a.  
            Alarm and Automatic                                                        SR 16.11.3.9
Noble Gas Activity  
              Termination of Release                                                    SR 16.11.3.12
Monitor (4-RIA-45)
              (RIA-37,-38)b
b.
        b.    Effluent Flow Rate                                During Waste Gas      SR 16.11.3.1         J
Iodine Sampler
              Monitor (Waste Gas                              Holdup Tank Releases    SR 16A11.3.10
c.
              Discharge Flow) (GWD
Particulate Sampler
              CR033)
d.
(a)Alarms indicating low flow may be substituted for flow measuring devices.
Effluent Flow Rate
Monitor (Radwaste
Facility Exhaust) (0VS
CR2060)
e.
Sampler Flow Rate
Monitor 41) (Annunciator)
5. Waste Gas Holdup Tanks
a.
Noble Gas Activity
Monitor - Providing
Alarm and Automatic
Termination of Release
(RIA-37,-38)b
b.
Effluent Flow Rate
Monitor (Waste Gas
Discharge Flow) (GWD
CR033)
1
1
At All Times
At All Times
At All Times
At All Times
1
At All Times
At All Times
At All Times
At All Times
At All Times
1
During Waste Gas
Holdup Tank Releases
During Waste Gas
Holdup Tank Releases
16.11.3-17
SR 16.11.3.2  
SR 16.11.3.2
SR 16.11.3.2
SR 16.11.3.10
SR 16.11.3.2  
SR 16.11.3.10
SR 16.11.3.2  
SR 16.11.3.4
SR 16.11.3.7
SR 16.11.3.9
SR 16.11.3.2
SR 16.11.3.2
SR 16.11.3.2  
SR 16.11.3.10  
SR 16.11.3.2
SR 16.11.3.10
SR 16.11.3.1  
SR 16.11.3.6  
SR 16.11.3.9  
SR 16.11.3.12  
SR 16.11.3.1  
SR 16A11.3.10
L
L
J
NA
K
L
L
J
NA
J
(a)Alarms indicating low flow may be substituted for flow measuring devices.
(b)Either Normal or High Range monitor is required dependent upon activity in tank being released.
(b)Either Normal or High Range monitor is required dependent upon activity in tank being released.
                                                        16.11.3-17                                              03/27/99
1
1
1
03/27/99


                                                    Radioactive Effluent Monitoring Instrumentation
Radioactive Effluent Monitoring Instrumentation  
                                                                                              16.11.3
16.11.3  
BASES
BASES  
The radioactive liquid effluent instrumentation is provided to monitor and control, as applicable,
The radioactive liquid effluent instrumentation is provided to monitor and control, as applicable,  
the releases of radioactive materials in liquid effluents during actual or potential releases. The
the releases of radioactive materials in liquid effluents during actual or potential releases. The  
alarm/trip setpoints for these instruments shall be calculated in accordance with NRC approved
alarm/trip setpoints for these instruments shall be calculated in accordance with NRC approved  
methods in the ODCM to assure that the alarmtrip will occur prior to exceeding 10 times the
methods in the ODCM to assure that the alarmtrip will occur prior to exceeding 10 times the  
limits of 10 CFR Part 20. The operability and use of this instrumentation is consistent with the
limits of 10 CFR Part 20. The operability and use of this instrumentation is consistent with the  
requirements of General Design Criteria 60, 63, and 64 of Appendix A to 10 CFR Part 50.
requirements of General Design Criteria 60, 63, and 64 of Appendix A to 10 CFR Part 50.
The radioactive gaseous effluent instrumentation is provided to monitor and control, as
The radioactive gaseous effluent instrumentation is provided to monitor and control, as  
applicable, the releases of radioactive materials in gaseous effluents during actual or potential
applicable, the releases of radioactive materials in gaseous effluents during actual or potential  
releases. The alarm/trip setpoints for these instruments shall be calculated in accordance with
releases. The alarm/trip setpoints for these instruments shall be calculated in accordance with  
NRC approved methods in the ODCM to assure that the alarm/trip will occur prior to exceeding
NRC approved methods in the ODCM to assure that the alarm/trip will occur prior to exceeding  
applicable dose limits in SLC 16.11.2. The operability end use of this instrumentation is
applicable dose limits in SLC 16.11.2. The operability end use of this instrumentation is  
consistent with the requirements of General Design Criteria 60, 63, and 64 of Appendix A to 10
consistent with the requirements of General Design Criteria 60, 63, and 64 of Appendix A to 10  
CFR Part 50.
CFR Part 50.
For certain applicable cases, grab samples or flow estimates are required at frequencies
For certain applicable cases, grab samples or flow estimates are required at frequencies  
between every 4 hours end every 12 hours upon RIA removal from service. SLC 16.11.3 does
between every 4 hours end every 12 hours upon RIA removal from service. SLC 16.11.3 does  
not explicitly require Action (grab samples or flow estimates) to be initiated immediately upon
not explicitly require Action (grab samples or flow estimates) to be initiated immediately upon  
RIA removal from service, when removal is for the purposes of sample filter changeouts,
RIA removal from service, when removal is for the purposes of sample filter changeouts,  
setpoint adjustments, service checks, or routine maintenance. Therefore, during the defined
setpoint adjustments, service checks, or routine maintenance. Therefore, during the defined  
short, controlled outages, Action is not required.
short, controlled outages, Action is not required.
For the cases in which Action is defined as continuous sampling by auxiliary equipment (Action
For the cases in which Action is defined as continuous sampling by auxiliary equipment (Action  
L) initiation of continuous sampling by auxiliary sampling equipment requires approximately 1
L) initiation of continuous sampling by auxiliary sampling equipment requires approximately 1  
hour. One hour is the accepted reasonable time to initiate collect and change samples.
hour. One hour is the accepted reasonable time to initiate collect and change samples.
Therefore. for the defined short, controlled outages (not to exceed 1 hour), Action is not
Therefore. for the defined short, controlled outages (not to exceed 1 hour), Action is not  
required.
required.
  Failures such as blown instrument fuses, defective indicators, and faulted amplifiers are, in
Failures such as blown instrument fuses, defective indicators, and faulted amplifiers are, in  
  many cases, revealed by alarm or annunciator action. Comparison of output and/or state of
many cases, revealed by alarm or annunciator action. Comparison of output and/or state of  
  independent channels measuring the same variable supplements this type of built-in
independent channels measuring the same variable supplements this type of built-in  
  surveillance. Based on experience in operation of both conventional and nuclear systems, when
surveillance. Based on experience in operation of both conventional and nuclear systems, when  
  the unit is in operation, the minimum checking frequency stated is deemed adequate.
the unit is in operation, the minimum checking frequency stated is deemed adequate.
  REFERENCES:
REFERENCES:  
  1. 10CFRPart20.
1. 10CFRPart20.
  2. 10 CFR Part 50, Appendix A.
2. 10 CFR Part 50, Appendix A.
  3. Offsite Dose Calculation Manual.
3. Offsite Dose Calculation Manual.
  4. UFSAR, Section 7.2.3.4.
4. UFSAR, Section 7.2.3.4.
                                          16.11.3-18                                         01/31/00 1
01/31/00 1
16.11.3-18


                                  OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                          02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                          1 POINT
1 POINT  
63. Which ONE of the following statements describes the operation of the startup feeder
63. Which ONE of the following statements describes the operation of the startup feeder  
    breakers to TA and TB (6.9 kv) following a valid switchyard isolation and a subsequent
breakers to TA and TB (6.9 kv) following a valid switchyard isolation and a subsequent  
    resetting of the switchyard isolation logic?
resetting of the switchyard isolation logic?  
    The breakers will open upon actuation of...
The breakers will open upon actuation of...
    A. both channels of Switchyard isolation and will reclose automatically if in AUTO.
A. both channels of Switchyard isolation and will reclose automatically if in AUTO.
    B. either channel of Switchyard isolation and will reclose automatically if in AUTO.
B. either channel of Switchyard isolation and will reclose automatically if in AUTO.
    C. both channels of Switchyard isolation and will only reclose MANUALLY.
C. both channels of Switchyard isolation and will only reclose MANUALLY.
    D. either channel of Switchyard isolation and will only reclose MANUALLY.
D. either channel of Switchyard isolation and will only reclose MANUALLY.
    A)A
A) A  
    A. Correct, it takes both trains of Switchyard isolation to actuate the tripping of the 7kV
A. Correct, it takes both trains of Switchyard isolation to actuate the tripping of the 7kV  
    breakers and if the switchyard isolation signal is reset without taking the breakers to
breakers and if the switchyard isolation signal is reset without taking the breakers to  
    manual the breakers will reclose automatically.
manual the breakers will reclose automatically.
    B. Incorrect, it takes both trains.
B. Incorrect, it takes both trains.
    C. Incorrect, the breaker will reclose in automatic.
C. Incorrect, the breaker will reclose in automatic.
    D. Incorrect, it takes both trains of Switchyard isolation to trip the 7kV breakers.
D. Incorrect, it takes both trains of Switchyard isolation to trip the 7kV breakers.
    Reference: Lesson Plans Vol IX,OP-OC-EL-EPD, page 34 of 76.
Reference: Lesson Plans Vol IX, OP-OC-EL-EPD, page 34 of 76.
    EO - 15.1
EO - 15.1  
    K/A: 062K402 (2.5/2.7)
K/A: 062K402 (2.5/2.7)  
    RO/SRO: BOTH
RO/SRO: BOTH  
    Level: C
Level: C  
    Author: rfa
Author: rfa


                                OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                      02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                        1 POINT
1 POINT  
64. Which ONE of the following statements correctly describes how to reset a 230 KV
64. Which ONE of the following statements correctly describes how to reset a 230 KV  
    SWYD Yellow Bus Differential Lockout?
SWYD Yellow Bus Differential Lockout?  
    The 230 KV SWYD Yellow Bus Differential Lockout must be manually reset via ...
The 230 KV SWYD Yellow Bus Differential Lockout must be manually reset via ...
    A. switches on the affected PCBs.
A. switches on the affected PCBs.
    B. switches in the 230 KV relay house.
B. switches in the 230 KV relay house.
    C. pushbuttons on cable room panels.
C. pushbuttons on cable room panels.
    D. control room reset pushbuttons.
D. control room reset pushbuttons.
    A) B
A) B  
    Reference: Lesson Plans Vol IX,OP-OC-EL-CB, page 35 of 57.
Reference: Lesson Plans Vol IX, OP-OC-EL-CB, page 35 of 57.
    EO - 5.2
EO - 5.2  
    K/A: 062K404 (2.2/2.9)
K/A: 062K404 (2.2/2.9)  
    RO/SRO: BOTH
RO/SRO: BOTH  
    Level: M
Level: M  
    Author: rfa
Author: rfa


                                OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                        02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                          1 POINT
1 POINT
65. Plant conditions:
65. Plant conditions:  
            -   Reactor power = 100%
-
    Which ONE of the following will result from de-energizing the KU panelboard?
Reactor power = 100%  
    A. All ICS stations will transfer to HAND and NI-9 will fail LOW
Which ONE of the following will result from de-energizing the KU panelboard?  
    B. EHC cabinets and FDWP turbine control will be de-energized
A. All ICS stations will transfer to HAND and NI-9 will fail LOW  
    C. ICS feedwater control will be available ONLY in automatic mode
B. EHC cabinets and FDWP turbine control will be de-energized  
    D. Non-nuclear instrumentation and fire protection system will lose power
C. ICS feedwater control will be available ONLY in automatic mode  
    A) C
D. Non-nuclear instrumentation and fire protection system will lose power  
    Reference: Lesson Plans Vol IX,OP-OC-EL-DCD, page 36 of 55.
A) C  
    EO - 6.3
Reference: Lesson Plans Vol IX, OP-OC-EL-DCD, page 36 of 55.
    K/A: 063K201 (2.9/3.1)
EO - 6.3  
    RO/SRO: BOTH
K/A: 063K201 (2.9/3.1)  
    Level: M
RO/SRO: BOTH  
    Author: rfa
Level: M  
Author: rfa


                                  OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                          02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                            1 POINT
1 POINT  
66. After a switchyard isolation is initiated, which one of the following is the purpose for the
66. After a switchyard isolation is initiated, which one of the following is the purpose for the  
    8.5 sec timer on the Keowee Hydro Unit?
8.5 sec timer on the Keowee Hydro Unit?  
    A. Prevent closing of the Keowee overhead breaker (ACB-1/2), until timer has timed
A. Prevent closing of the Keowee overhead breaker (ACB-1/2), until timer has timed  
        out, to ensure separation of the unit from the 230 KV red bus.
out, to ensure separation of the unit from the 230 KV red bus.
    B. Prevent closing of the Keowee overhead breaker (ACB-1/2), until timer has timed
B. Prevent closing of the Keowee overhead breaker (ACB-1/2), until timer has timed  
        out, to ensure all RCPS have tripped.
out, to ensure all RCPS have tripped.
    C. It initiates a trip signal to the underground breaker (ACB 3/4), after it times out, if
C. It initiates a trip signal to the underground breaker (ACB 3/4), after it times out, if  
        that unit was generating to the grid at the time the emergency start signal was
that unit was generating to the grid at the time the emergency start signal was  
        generated.
generated.
    D. It initiates a trip signal to the underground breaker (ACB 3/4), until timer has timed
D. It initiates a trip signal to the underground breaker (ACB 3/4), until timer has timed  
        out, ifthat unit was generating to the grid at the time the emergency start signal was
out, if that unit was generating to the grid at the time the emergency start signal was  
        generated to ensure all RCPS have tripped.
generated to ensure all RCPS have tripped.
    A) B
A) B  
    After a SWYD isolation, the 8.5 sec timer ensures ACB 1/2 will not close to ensure that all
After a SWYD isolation, the 8.5 sec timer ensures ACB 1/2 will not close to ensure that all  
    RCPs will have tripped due to a loss of power longer than 3 seconds.
RCPs will have tripped due to a loss of power longer than 3 seconds.
    Reference: Lesson Plans Vol IX,OP-OC-EL-KHG, page 26 of 33.
Reference: Lesson Plans Vol IX, OP-OC-EL-KHG, page 26 of 33.
    EO - 5
EO - 5  
    K/A: 064A302 (3.4/3.7) (This K/A is for EDG, however, Oconee has hydro-electric)
K/A: 064A302 (3.4/3.7) (This K/A is for EDG, however, Oconee has hydro-electric)  
    RO/SRO: BOTH
RO/SRO: BOTH  
    Level: M
Level: M  
    Author: rfa
Author: rfa


                                    OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                          02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                            1 POINT
1 POINT  
67. Plant conditions:
67. Plant conditions:  
    INITIAL CONDITIONS:
INITIAL CONDITIONS:  
        - Reactor power = 100%
- Reactor power = 100%  
    CURRENT CONDITIONS:
CURRENT CONDITIONS:  
        - Instrument Air pressure is rapidly DECREASING
- Instrument Air pressure is rapidly DECREASING  
        - NO ES actuation signals have been received
- NO ES actuation signals have been received  
    Assume NO operator actions are taken
Assume NO operator actions are taken  
    The LDST level will decrease and the pressurizer level will increase.
The LDST level will decrease and the pressurizer level will increase.
    Which one of the following has caused this?
Which one of the following has caused this?  
    A. HP-5 and HP-31 both failed open.
A. HP-5 and HP-31 both failed open.
    B. HP-5 and HP-31 both failed closed.
B. HP-5 and HP-31 both failed closed.
    C. HP-5 failed closed and HP-31 failed open.
C. HP-5 failed closed and HP-31 failed open.
    D. HP-5 failed open and HP-31 failed closed.
D. HP-5 failed open and HP-31 failed closed.
    A) C
A) C  
    HP-5 will fail closed isolating all letdown, which stops input to the LDST. HP-31 fails
HP-5 will fail closed isolating all letdown, which stops input to the LDST. HP-31 fails  
    open increasing input to the PZR.
open increasing input to the PZR.
    K/A: 065AK303 (2.9/3.4)
K/A: 065AK303 (2.9/3.4)  
    T1G3, T1 G2
T1G3, T1 G2  
    Bank
Bank  
    Reference:     Facility updated question bank 20 SSS044701 SSS044701
Reference:  
Facility updated question bank 20 SSS044701 SSS044701


                                  OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                          02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                            1 POINT
1 POINT
68. Which of the following areas contain material which would be limited to a Class "B"
68. Which of the following areas contain material  
    fire?
fire?
    A.          Document control storage vault.
A. 
    B.          "A" ES 4160V switch gear room.
B. 
    C.          TB lube oil purifier.
C. 
    D.          I&C calibration lab in maintenance facility.
D. 
    A) C
A)
    A. Paper Class "A".
A. 
    B. Electical equipment Class "C".
B. 
    C. CORRECT: Oil Class "B"
C. 
    D. No fire hazard for Class "B"
D.
    Reference: Nuclear System Directives 112 and 316
which would be limited to a Class "B"
                  GET
Document control storage vault.
"A" ES 4160V switch gear room.
TB lube oil purifier.
I&C calibration lab in maintenance facility.
C  
Paper Class "A".
Electical equipment Class "C".
CORRECT: Oil Class "B"  
No fire hazard for Class "B"
Reference: Nuclear System Directives 112 and 316  
GET


                                    OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                            02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                              1 POINT
1 POINT  
69. Given the following plant conditions:
69. Given the following plant conditions:  
        - Fire in the cable spreading room, the Control Room has been evacuated (no
- Fire in the cable spreading room, the Control Room has been evacuated (no  
          time to take actions prior to leaving control room) and transfer to the Aux
time to take actions prior to leaving control room) and transfer to the Aux  
          Shutdown Panel is in progess.
Shutdown Panel is in progess.
        - During the transfer, RCS pressure decreased to 1400 psig and initiated
- During the transfer, RCS pressure decreased to 1400 psig and initiated  
          Engineering Safeguards.
Engineering Safeguards.
    Which one of the following identifies the starting status of the Keowee Hydro
Which one of the following identifies the starting status of the Keowee Hydro  
    Generators for this scenario?
Generators for this scenario?  
    A.         The Keowee Hydo Generators will ONLY auto start following a loss of
A.  
                power to the Main Feeder Buses.
The Keowee Hydo Generators will ONLY auto start following a loss of  
    B.         Can ONLY be manually started from the Oconee Control Room.
power to the Main Feeder Buses.
    C.         Should have started when the local/remote switches transferred Keowee
B.  
                control to the Oconee Control Room.
Can ONLY be manually started from the Oconee Control Room.
    D.         Should have auto started as a result of the Engineering Safeguards
C.  
                actuation.
Should have started when the local/remote switches transferred Keowee  
    A) D
control to the Oconee Control Room.
    A. Local start is not required, auto start still functions.
D.  
    B. Auto start still functions.
Should have auto started as a result of the Engineering Safeguards  
    C. The transfer switch will not start the Keowee Emergency Generator.
actuation.
    D. CORRECT, ES actuates on low RCS pressure, AND this is the one circuit that ES will still
A) D  
    actuate when control is transfered to the RSP.
A. Local start is not required, auto start still functions.
    Reference: Vol. IX,Keowee Hydro Generators.
B. Auto start still functions.
                (This K/A has to do with ED/G. However, Oconee use hydroelectric)
C. The transfer switch will not start the Keowee Emergency Generator.
D. CORRECT, ES actuates on low RCS pressure, AND this is the one circuit that ES will still  
actuate when control is transfered to the RSP.
Reference: Vol. IX, Keowee Hydro Generators.
(This K/A has to do with ED/G. However, Oconee use hydroelectric)


                              OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                      02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                        1 POINT
1 POINT  
70. Unit 1 plant conditions:
70. Unit 1 plant conditions:  
    INITIAL CONDITIONS:
INITIAL CONDITIONS:  
          -   DATE / TIME = 3-14-99 / 0015
- DATE / TIME = 3-14-99 / 0015  
          "- "1B" GWD Tank release commenced
"- "1B" GWD Tank release commenced  
          - Waste Gas Flow Monitor "OOS"
- Waste Gas Flow Monitor "OOS"  
          "-"1B" GWD Tank pressure = 68 psig
"- "1B" GWD Tank pressure = 68 psig  
    CURRENT CONDITIONS:
CURRENT CONDITIONS:  
          -DATE / TIME = 3-14-99 / 0245
-DATE / TIME = 3-14-99 / 0245  
            - Release completed
- Release completed  
            "-"1B" GWD Tank pressure = 5 psig
"-"1B" GWD Tank pressure = 5 psig  
    Which ONE of the following indicates the estimated flow rate (scfm) for the 1B GWD
Which ONE of the following indicates the estimated flow rate (scfm) for the 1 B GWD  
    Tank release?
Tank release?  
    SEE ATTACHED: (1108/01, Encl. 3.3, GWD Tank Volume vs Pressure Curve)
SEE ATTACHED: (1108/01, Encl. 3.3, GWD Tank Volume vs Pressure Curve)  
    A. 42
A. 42  
    B. 32
B. 32  
    C. 26
C. 26
    D. 10
D. 10


                              OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                      02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                        1 POINT
1 POINT  
A) B
A) B  
Flow estimate:
Flow estimate:  
A. Incorrect, directly from the curve; 68 psig = 6300 scf 150
A. Incorrect, directly from the curve; 68 psig = 6300 scf 150  
= 42 scfm
= 42 scfm  
B. Correct, 68 to 5 psig &#xfd; 4800 scf 150 minutes = 32 scfm
B. Correct, 68 to 5 psig &#xfd; 4800 scf 150 minutes = 32 scfm  
C. Incorrect, mis-reading curve at 58 psig instead of 68 psig;
C. Incorrect, mis-reading curve at 58 psig instead of 68 psig;  
58 psig &#xfd; 5500 scf - 1500 scf 150 minutes = 26 scfm
58 psig &#xfd; 5500 scf - 1500 scf 150 minutes = 26 scfm  
D. Incorrect, directly from the curve; 5 psig = 1500 scf 150
D. Incorrect, directly from the curve; 5 psig = 1500 scf 150  
= 10 scfm
= 10 scfm  
Required reference: 1108/01, Encl. 3.3, GWD Tank Volume vs Pressure Curve
Required reference: 1108/01, Encl. 3.3, GWD Tank Volume vs Pressure Curve  
K/A: 071A202 (3.3/3.6)
K/A: 071A202 (3.3/3.6)  
T2G1, T2G1
T2G1, T2G1  
Bank
Bank  
Reference:     Facility updated question bank 57 WE011101 WE011101
Reference:  
SLC 16.11-3.5.b,(J) states effulent flow rate monitor can be
Facility updated question bank 57 WE011101 WE011101  
OOS and releases continue provided the flow rate is estimated
SLC 16.11-3.5.b,(J) states effulent flow rate monitor can be  
OOS and releases continue provided the flow rate is estimated  
at least one every four hours.
at least one every four hours.


                                              Enclosure 3.3                                 OP/0/A/I 108/001
Enclosure 3.3  
                              GWD Tank Volume Vs. Pressure Curve (A, B, 3A, 3B)             Page 1 of 1
OP/0/A/I 108/001  
            9
GWD Tank Volume Vs. Pressure Curve (A, B, 3A, 3B)  
            8
Page 1 of 1
            7
xx
                                                    ell
I  
            6
I
W"LL
0  
  :
5  
0to
10  
            5
15 20 25  
  0
30 35  
  H-
40
                xx
45  
                            I   I
50  
              0 5 10 15 20 25   30 35   40   45   50   55 "60 65       70   75 80 85 90 95   100
55 "60 65  
                                      PRESSURE (PSI)                                 2z6
70  
75
80  
85 90  
95
PRESSURE (PSI)
Gwd tank l.bmp
Gwd tank l.bmp
9
8
7
6
"LL
0to
W :
0
H-
5
100
2z6
ell


                                  OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                          02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                            1 POINT
1 POINT  
71. Which ONE of the following is the purpose for performing a check source of an Area
71. Which ONE of the following is the purpose for performing a check source of an Area  
    Radiation Monitor?
Radiation Monitor?  
    A.         To perform a calibration of the monitor's output circuitry.
A.  
    B.         To verify the monitor's power source voltage is at the proper level.
To perform a calibration of the monitor's output circuitry.
    C.         To ensure the detector and its circuits respond to radiation.
B.  
    D.         To provide an output indication for adjustment of the alarm setpoints.
To verify the monitor's power source voltage is at the proper level.
    A) C
C.  
    Reference: Vol 1, Radiation Indicating Alarms
To ensure the detector and its circuits respond to radiation.
D.  
To provide an output indication for adjustment of the alarm setpoints.
A) C  
Reference: Vol 1, Radiation Indicating Alarms


                                  OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                        02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                          1 POINT
1 POINT  
72. Concerning the Sorrento Radiation Monitoring System, which ONE of the following is
72. Concerning the Sorrento Radiation Monitoring System, which ONE of the following is  
    correct?
correct?  
    The RM-80 ...
The RM-80 ...
    A. outputs directly to any associated interlock functions.
A. outputs directly to any associated interlock functions.
    B. outputs directly to the control room view nodes.
B. outputs directly to the control room view nodes.
    C. will NOT function without the Transient Monitor System.
C. will NOT function without the Transient Monitor System.
    D. will NOT provide local indication of sample flow rate.
D. will NOT provide local indication of sample flow rate.
    A) A
A) A  
    A. Correct. Interlocks will operate even if Transient Monitor system computer is
A. Correct. Interlocks will operate even if Transient Monitor system computer is
      OOS.
B. 
    B. Incorrect. Outputs to Transient Monitor System and then to View Nodes.
C. 
    C. Incorrect. RM-80 will function with the Transient Monitor System OOS.
D.
    D. Incorrect. Does provide local indication of sample flow rate.
OOS.
    K/A: 072K403 (3.2/3.6)
Incorrect. Outputs to Transient Monitor System and then to View Nodes.
    RO - T2GI
Incorrect. RM-80 will function with the Transient Monitor System OOS.
    Bank
Incorrect. Does provide local indication of sample flow rate.
    Reference:
K/A: 072K403 (3.2/3.6)  
    Facility updated question bank 28 RAD010702 RAD010702
RO - T2GI  
Bank  
Reference:  
Facility updated question bank 28 RAD010702 RAD010702


                                OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                        02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                          1 POINT
1 POINT  
73. Plant conditions:
73. Plant conditions:  
          - Unit 1 = MODE 1
- Unit 1 = MODE 1  
          - Unit 2 = MODE 5
- Unit 2 = MODE 5  
              - 2B CCW pump operating
- 2B CCW pump operating  
          - Unit 3 = MODE 1
- Unit 3 = MODE 1  
    Which ONE of the following is correct if 2B CCW pump is secured?
Which ONE of the following is correct if 2B CCW pump is secured?  
    A. 2CCW-26/28 and 2V-87/88 will remain in their current position
A. 2CCW-26/28 and 2V-87/88 will remain in their current position  
    B. The CCW inlet line high point vent valves, 2CCW-26/28, will open
B. The CCW inlet line high point vent valves, 2CCW-26/28, will open  
    C. The continuous priming tank normal inlet control valve, 2V-87, will closes
C. The continuous priming tank normal inlet control valve, 2V-87, will closes  
    D. The continuous priming tank emergency inlet control valve, 2V-88, will opens
D. The continuous priming tank emergency inlet control valve, 2V-88, will opens  
    A)A
A) A  
    A. Correct: Valves remain "as is" due to CCWPs continuing to operate on Unit 3.
A. Correct: Valves remain "as is" due to CCWPs continuing to operate on Unit 3.
    B. Incorrect: Open on first CCW pump start.
B. Incorrect: Open on first CCW pump start.
    C. Incorrect: Correct if not CCW pump on Unit 2 or 3 operating or both CVP secured
C. Incorrect: Correct if not CCW pump on Unit 2 or 3 operating or both CVP secured  
    D. Incorrect: Correct if not CCW pump on Unit 2 or 3 operating or both CVP secured
D. Incorrect: Correct if not CCW pump on Unit 2 or 3 operating or both CVP secured  
    K/A: 075A202 (2.5/2.7)
K/A: 075A202 (2.5/2.7)  
    RO - T2G2
RO - T2G2  
    Bank
Bank  
    Reference: Facility updated question bank question 33 STG040801 STG040801
Reference: Facility updated question bank question 33 STG040801  
STG040801


                                OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                        02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                        1 POINT
1 POINT  
74. Which one of the following is correct?
74. Which one of the following is correct?  
            will trip SSF OTS1 normal power supply breaker from B2T-4 which will
will trip SSF OTS1 normal power supply breaker from B2T-4 which will  
    A. Either an ES channel 2 on any unit OR a maximum motor bearing oil temperature
A. Either an ES channel 2 on any unit OR a maximum motor bearing oil temperature  
        of 160&deg;F / trip OTS1-2 (SSF ASW PUMP) breaker.
of 160&deg;F / trip OTS1-2 (SSF ASW PUMP) breaker.
    B. Either a source undervoltage for > 30 seconds OR a maximum pump bearing oil
B. Either a source undervoltage for > 30 seconds OR a maximum pump bearing oil  
        temperature of 160'F / close OTS1-4 (SSF DIESEL GENERATOR) breaker.
temperature of 160'F / close OTS1-4 (SSF DIESEL GENERATOR) breaker.
    C. Either an ES channel 1 on any unit OR a Unit 2 channel "A" loadshed / trip
C. Either an ES channel 1 on any unit OR a Unit 2 channel "A" loadshed / trip  
        OTS1-2 (SSF ASW PUMP) breaker.
OTS1-2 (SSF ASW PUMP) breaker.
    D. Either a source undervoltage for > 30 seconds OR the full load current for the SSF
D. Either a source undervoltage for > 30 seconds OR the full load current for the SSF  
        auxiliary service water pump is 240 amps / close OTS1-4 (SSF DIESEL
auxiliary service water pump is 240 amps / close OTS1-4 (SSF DIESEL  
        GENERATOR) breaker.
GENERATOR) breaker.
    A) C
A) C  
    Reference: Lesson Plans Book 1 of 2 Vol V, OP-OC-EAP-SSF , page 39 of 83.
Reference: Lesson Plans Book 1 of 2 Vol V, OP-OC-EAP-SSF , page 39 of 83.
    EO - 21
EO - 21  
    K/A: 076K121 (2.7/2.9)
K/A: 076K121 (2.7/2.9)  
    RO/SRO: Both
RO/SRO: Both  
    Level: M
Level: M  
    Author: rfa
Author: rfa


                                OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                        02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                          1 POINT
1 POINT  
75. Which one of the following is correct, concerning HPSW pump operation with respect
75. Which one of the following is correct, concerning HPSW pump operation with respect  
    to a loss of power to a main feeder bus (MFB)?
to a loss of power to a main feeder bus (MFB)?  
    A. HPSW pumps are powered from MCC 1XE which is fed from load center 1X3
A. HPSW pumps are powered from MCC 1XE which is fed from load center 1X3  
        normally and from 1X2 as an alternate source. Therefore, the HPSW pumps will be
normally and from 1X2 as an alternate source. Therefore, the HPSW pumps will be  
        unaffected. However, ifthe HPSW pumps A and B are not running, they will BOTH
unaffected. However, if the HPSW pumps A and B are not running, they will BOTH  
        get an auto start signal upon loss of power to 1X6 due to 1X6 feeding breaker #15,
get an auto start signal upon loss of power to 1 X6 due to 1 X6 feeding breaker #15,  
        the power supply for EWST level control.
the power supply for EWST level control.
    B. HPSW pumps are powered from the unit 1 MFBs. Ifone MFB is de-energized then
B. HPSW pumps are powered from the unit 1 MFBs. If one MFB is de-energized then  
        the remaining HPSW pumps are vulnerable to single failure of the other unit 1 MFB.
the remaining HPSW pumps are vulnerable to single failure of the other unit 1 MFB.
        Backup power is NOT available.
Backup power is NOT available.
    C. HPSW pumps are powered from MCC 1XE which is fed from load center 1X3
C. HPSW pumps are powered from MCC 1XE which is fed from load center 1X3  
        normally and from 1X2 as an alternate source for units 1 and 2. Therefore, Unit 1
normally and from 1X2 as an alternate source for units 1 and 2. Therefore, Unit 1  
        and 2s HPSW pumps will be unaffected. Unit 3s HPSW pumps are powered from
and 2s HPSW pumps will be unaffected. Unit 3s HPSW pumps are powered from  
        the unit 3 MFBs. If one Unit 3 MFB is de-energized then the remaining Unit 3
the unit 3 MFBs. If one Unit 3 MFB is de-energized then the remaining Unit 3  
        HPSW pumps are vulnerable to single failure of the other unit 3 MFB. Backup
HPSW pumps are vulnerable to single failure of the other unit 3 MFB. Backup  
        power is NOT available.
power is NOT available.
    D. HPSW pumps are powered from all three units MFBs. If one MFB is de-energized
D. HPSW pumps are powered from all three units MFBs. If one MFB is de-energized  
        then the remaining HPSW pumps can be powered from the other units MFBs.
then the remaining HPSW pumps can be powered from the other units MFBs.
    A)B
A) B  
    Reference: Lesson Plans Vol X, OP-OC-SSS-HPW , page 27 of 33.
Reference: Lesson Plans Vol X, OP-OC-SSS-HPW , page 27 of 33.
    EO - 17.3
EO - 17.3  
    K/A:076K201 (2.7/2.7)
K/A:076K201 (2.7/2.7)  
    RO/SRO: BOTH
RO/SRO: BOTH  
    Level: C
Level: C  
    Author: rfa
Author: rfa


                                OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                        02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                        1 POINT
1 POINT  
76. Which one of the following sets of IA/AlA symptoms is correct for an IA line break?
76. Which one of the following sets of IA/AlA symptoms is correct for an IA line break?  
    A. BOTH the IAAND the AIA systems will begin losing pressure. The IA check valves
A. BOTH the IA AND the AIA systems will begin losing pressure. The IA check valves  
        will all close. The three AIA compressors will sequentially start, if in automatic, as
will all close. The three AIA compressors will sequentially start, if in automatic, as  
        pressure drops from 88 psig to 85 psig.
pressure drops from 88 psig to 85 psig.
    B. ONLY the IAsystem will begin losing pressure because it operates at a much
B. ONLY the IA system will begin losing pressure because it operates at a much  
        higher pressure. The IA check valves will NOT close because the lower pressure
higher pressure. The IA check valves will NOT close because the lower pressure  
        will tend to be on the AIA system side.
will tend to be on the AIA system side.
    C. ONLY the IAsystem will begin losing pressure because it operates at a much
C. ONLY the IA system will begin losing pressure because it operates at a much  
        higher pressure. At 88 psig, AIA system pressure, the three AIA compressors will
higher pressure. At 88 psig, AIA system pressure, the three AIA compressors will  
        start if in Automatic.
start if in Automatic.
    D. BOTH the IAAND the AIA systems will begin losing pressure. At 88 psig, AIA
D. BOTH the IA AND the AIA systems will begin losing pressure. At 88 psig, AIA  
        system pressure, the three AIA compressors will start if in Automatic.
system pressure, the three AIA compressors will start if in Automatic.
    A) D
A) D  
    Reference: Lesson Plans Vol X, OP-OC-SSS-IA, page 37 of 49.
Reference: Lesson Plans Vol X, OP-OC-SSS-IA, page 37 of 49.
    EO - 25 and 28
EO - 25 and 28  
    K/A:078K303 (3.0/3.4)
K/A:078K303 (3.0/3.4)  
    RO/SRO: BOTH
RO/SRO: BOTH  
    Level: C
Level: C  
    Author: rfa
Author: rfa


                                  OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                          02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                            1 POINT
1 POINT  
77. Given the following plant conditions:
77. Given the following plant conditions:  
        - Reactor trip from full power.
- Reactor trip from full power.
        - A fire is in progress on the startup transformer.
- A fire is in progress on the startup transformer.
        - A Loss of Offsite Power.
- A Loss of Offsite Power.
        - Fire header pressure has decreased to 100 psig.
- Fire header pressure has decreased to 100 psig.
    Which one of the following will provide IMMEDIATE (within 5 seconds) fire fighting
Which one of the  
    water pressure?
water pressure?
    A.          HPSW pump "A" only.
A. 
    B.          HPSW pump "A" AND "B".
B. 
    C.          Jockey fire pump.
C. 
    D.          Elevated Water Storage Tank.
D.
    A) D
following will provide IMMEDIATE (within 5 seconds) fire fighting
    A. Keowee Units are NOT on line yet. Keowee requires 15 seconds.
HPSW pump "A" only.
    B. Keowee Units are NOT on line yet
HPSW pump "A" AND "B".
    C. Keowee Units are NOT on line yet
Jockey fire pump.
    D. Correct answer - power independei
Elevated Water Storage Tank.
    Reference: Vol I, Actions Following a Fire
A) D
                Vol. IX,Keowee Hydro Generators.
A. Keowee Units are NOT on line yet.
B. Keowee Units are NOT on line yet  
C. Keowee Units are NOT on line yet  
D. Correct answer - power independei
Keowee requires 15 seconds.
Reference: Vol I, Actions Following a Fire  
Vol. IX, Keowee Hydro Generators.


                                OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                        02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                          1 POINT
1 POINT  
78. Plant conditions:
78. Plant conditions:  
          - ICS is in full automatic (Integrated Mode)
- ICS is in full automatic (Integrated Mode)  
          - Control Rod Group 6 at 78% withdrawn
- Control Rod Group 6 at 78% withdrawn  
    Which ONE of the following sets of plant conditions would cause the Asymmetric Rod
Which ONE of the following sets of plant conditions would cause the Asymmetric Rod  
    Runback logic to initiate an ICS runback?
Runback logic to initiate an ICS runback?  
    Core Thermal Power Demand (CTPD) and NI Power are...
Core Thermal Power Demand (CTPD) and NI Power are...
    A. 65%; the Group 4 Diamond "out limit" is lost.
A. 65%; the Group 4 Diamond "out limit" is lost.
    B. 55%; the Group 5 Diamond "in limit" is received.
B. 55%; the Group 5 Diamond "in limit" is received.
    C. 61%; the Group 6 Diamond "in limit" is received.
C. 61%; the Group 6 Diamond "in limit" is received.
    D. 68%; the Group 7 Diamond "in limit" is received.
D. 68%; the Group 7 Diamond "in limit" is received.
    A)C
A) C  
    A. INCORRECT - The out-limits for the safety groups must be accompanied by an
A. INCORRECT - The out-limits for the safety groups must be accompanied by an  
      asymmetric fault.
asymmetric fault.
    B. INCORRECT - Power needs to be >60% to satisfy the AND gate.
B. INCORRECT - Power needs to be >60% to satisfy the AND gate.
    C. CORRECT - If at gp 6 @ 78% and an in-limit received, this implies an asymmetric
C. CORRECT - If at gp 6 @ 78% and an in-limit received, this implies an asymmetric  
      fault must exist and group 5 > 80%.
fault must exist and group 5 > 80%.
    D. INCORRECT - Group 6 must be >80% for a group 7 in-limit to generate runback.
D. INCORRECT - Group 6 must be >80% for a group 7 in-limit to generate runback.
    K/A: AO1AA11 (3.7/3.7)
K/A: AO1AA11 (3.7/3.7)  
    T1G2, T1G2
T1G2, T1G2  
    Bank
Bank  
    Reference: Facility updated question bank question 41 IC020901 IC020901
Reference:  
                  ASYMMETRIC ROD RUNBACK LOGIC OP-OC-CRI-5.
Facility updated question bank question 41  
IC020901  
IC020901  
ASYMMETRIC ROD RUNBACK LOGIC OP-OC-CRI-5.


                              OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                      02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                      1 POINT
1 POINT  
79. Unit 1 conditions:
79. Unit 1 conditions:  
    INITIAL CONDITIONS:
INITIAL CONDITIONS:  
          - Reactor power = 100%
- Reactor power = 100%  
    CURRENT CONDITIONS:
CURRENT CONDITIONS:  
          - Spurious Turbine/Generator Trip
- Spurious Turbine/Generator Trip  
          - CT-1 Transformer lockout
- CT-1 Transformer lockout  
          - 1T Transformer lockout
- 1T Transformer lockout  
          - 1A and 1B OTSG S/U levels = 35" and increasing
- 1A and 1B OTSG S/U levels = 35" and increasing  
          - CETCs = 548&deg;F and decreasing
- CETCs = 548&deg;F and decreasing  
    Which ONE of the following describes the correct operator action?
Which ONE of the following describes the correct operator action?  
    A. Take manual control of 1FDW-315 and 316 (EFDW Control Valves), and reduce
A. Take manual control of 1FDW-315 and 316 (EFDW Control Valves), and reduce  
      XSUR levels to 30" to prevent overcooling.
XSUR levels to 30" to prevent overcooling.
    B. Throttle OTSG feedwater flow as required to minimize cooldown until a level of 240"
B. Throttle OTSG feedwater flow as required to minimize cooldown until a level of 240"  
      XSUR is reached.
XSUR is reached.
    C. Take manual control of 1 FDW-35 and 44 (Main FDW Control Valves), and reduce
C. Take manual control of 1 FDW-35 and 44 (Main FDW Control Valves), and reduce  
      OTSG levels to 25" SUR to stop overfeed.
OTSG levels to 25" SUR to stop overfeed.
    D. Throttle OTSG feedwater flow as required to minimize cooldown until a level of 50%
D. Throttle OTSG feedwater flow as required to minimize cooldown until a level of 50%  
        Operating Range is reached.
Operating Range is reached.


                            OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                    02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                      1 POINT
1 POINT  
A) B
A) B  
A. Incorrect - Manual control of 315/316 is necessary but level should be established
A. Incorrect - Manual control of 315/316 is necessary but level should be established  
  to 240" since RCPs were tripped on the loss of electrical.
to 240" since RCPs were tripped on the loss of electrical.
B. Correct - Required to prevent overcooling / pump/header flow limits being
B. Correct - Required to prevent overcooling / pump/header flow limits being  
  exceeded.
exceeded.
C. Incorrect - This would be a correct statement if Main FDW was available and RCPs
C. Incorrect - This would be a correct statement if Main FDW was available and RCPs  
  are operating.
are operating.
D. Incorrect - The first part of the statement is true concerning throttle feedwater but
D. Incorrect - The first part of the statement is true concerning throttle feedwater but  
  level requirements are 240" XSUR not 50% OR.
level requirements are 240" XSUR not 50% OR.
K/A: A04AAI1 (3.5/3.3)
K/A: A04AAI1 (3.5/3.3)  
T1G2, T1 G2
T1G2, T1 G2  
Bank
Bank  
Reference: Facility updated question bank 47 CF023402 CF023402
Reference:  
              CF-EF OBJ# 34 (37)
Facility updated question bank 47 CF023402 CF023402  
CF-EF OBJ# 34 (37)


                                OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                        02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                          1 POINT
1 POINT  
80. Which ONE of the following describes the operation of the AMSAC and the DSS
80. Which ONE of the following describes the operation of the AMSAC and the DSS  
    during an ATWS (Anticipated Transient Without Scram) with a complete loss of Main
during an ATWS (Anticipated Transient Without Scram) with a complete loss of Main  
    Feedwater?
Feedwater?  
    AMSAC trips the....
AMSAC trips the....
    A.         regulating rods and starts the EFDWPs while DSS trips the main turbine.
A.  
    B.         regulating rods while DSS trips the main turbine and starts the EFDWPs.
regulating rods and starts the EFDWPs while DSS trips the main turbine.
    C.         main turbine and starts the EFDWPs while DSS trips the regulating rods.
B.  
    D.         main turbine while DSS trips the regulating rods and starts the EFDWPs.
regulating rods while DSS trips the main turbine and starts the EFDWPs.
    A) C
C.  
    A. INCORRECT: AMSAC does not trip the regulating rods/ DSS does not trip the MT
main turbine and starts the EFDWPs while DSS trips the regulating rods.
    B. INCORRECT: AMSAC does not trip the regulating rods / DSS does not trip the MT
D.  
    or start EFWPT.
main turbine while DSS trips the regulating rods and starts the EFDWPs.
    C. CORRECT: AMSAC trips the turbine, starts all EFDWPS, DSS trips the control rods
A) C  
    (also +125 added to setpoint/not part of this question).
A. INCORRECT: AMSAC does not trip the regulating rods/ DSS does not trip the MT  
    D. INCORRECT: DSS does not start the EFDWPs.
B. INCORRECT: AMSAC does not trip the regulating rods / DSS does not trip the MT  
    Reference: Vol X, EFW System
or start EFWPT.
                E.O. 25
C. CORRECT: AMSAC trips the turbine, starts all EFDWPS, DSS trips the control rods  
(also +125 added to setpoint/not part of this question).
D. INCORRECT: DSS does not start the EFDWPs.
Reference: Vol X, EFW System  
E.O. 25


                                OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                        02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                          1 POINT
1 POINT  
81. Unit 1 conditions:
81. Unit 1 conditions:  
    INITIAL CONDITIONS:
INITIAL CONDITIONS:  
          - Reactor power = 20%
- Reactor power = 20%  
          - Unit startup in progress
- Unit startup in progress  
          - All RCPs operating
- All RCPs operating  
    CURRENT CONDITIONS:
CURRENT CONDITIONS:  
          - Reactor trip
- Reactor trip  
          - Reactor power = 1% and decreasing
- Reactor power = 1% and decreasing  
          - RCS pressure = 1950 psig and decreasing
- RCS pressure = 1950 psig and decreasing  
          - Condenser vacuum = 19 inches and decreasing
- Condenser vacuum = 19 inches and decreasing  
          - 1A2 RCP tripped
- 1A2 RCP tripped  
    Which ONE of the following is the cause of the reactor trip?
Which ONE of the following is the cause of the reactor trip?  
    A. Low RCS pressure.
A. Low RCS pressure.
    B. Power to flow to imbalance.
B. Power to flow to imbalance.
    C. Main turbine anticipatory.
C. Main turbine anticipatory.
    D. Loss of feedwater anticipatory trip.
D. Loss of feedwater anticipatory trip.
    A) D
A) D  
    A. Incorrect - RCS pressure > 1810 psig.
A. Incorrect - RCS pressure > 1810 psig.
    B. Incorrect - Rx power < min. flux/flow/imb trip setpoint.
B. Incorrect - Rx power < min. flux/flow/imb trip setpoint.
    C. Incorrect - Rx power < 29.75%, turb. anticipatory trip
C. Incorrect - Rx power < 29.75%, turb. anticipatory trip  
    bypassed.
bypassed.
    D. Correct - Operating MFDWP tripped on low vacuum.
D. Correct - Operating MFDWP tripped on low vacuum.
    K/A E02EK11 (3.6/3.6)
K/A E02EK11 (3.6/3.6)  
    T1G2, T1G2
T1G2, T1G2  
    Bank
Bank  
    Reference: Facility updated question bank (Question 5 IC090301 IC090301)
Reference: Facility updated question bank (Question 5 IC090301  
IC090301)


                                  OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                          02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                            1 POINT
1 POINT  
82. Unit 3 plant conditions:
82. Unit 3 plant conditions:  
        - Reactor Building Pressure = 3.5 psig
- Reactor Building Pressure = 3.5 psig  
        - RCS Pressure (ICCM) = 800 psig
- RCS Pressure (ICCM) = 800 psig  
        - RCS Tc = 445 0 F
- RCS Tc = 4450F
        - RCS Th = 465*F
- RCS Th = 465*F  
        - An average of ALL CETCs = 4890F
- An average of ALL CETCs = 4890F  
        - An average of 5 highest CETCs (ICCM Tr.B) = 518'F
- An average of 5 highest CETCs (ICCM Tr.B) = 518'F  
        - An average of the 5 highest of ALL qualified CETC's = 5470F
- An average of the 5 highest of ALL qualified CETC's = 5470F  
    Which ONE of the following is the correct Train "B" ICCM Core subcooling margin
Which ONE of the following is the correct Train "B" ICCM Core subcooling margin  
    indication the operator will observe on the SCM window LED on UBI?
indication the operator will observe on the SCM window LED on UBI?  
    SEE ATTACHMENT: EOP Encl. 5.18, P/T Curves
SEE ATTACHMENT: EOP Encl. 5.18, P/T Curves  
    A. 0&deg;F not flashing
A. 0&deg;F not flashing  
    B. (+) 9 0F not flashing
B. (+) 90F not flashing  
    C. 00 F flashing
C. 00F flashing  
    D. (-) 90 F flashing
D. (-) 90F flashing  
    A) C
A) C  
    A. incorrect - number "0" flashes in the sat. band
A. incorrect - number "0" flashes in the sat. band  
    B. incorrect - uses average of all CETC's
B. incorrect - uses average of all CETC's  
    C. correct - Average of the 5 highest CETC from B Train w/ 800 psig => saturated
C. correct - Average of the 5 highest CETC from B Train w/ 800 psig => saturated  
    condition
condition  
    D. Incorrect - uses 5 highest of ALL CETC's
D. Incorrect - uses 5 highest of ALL CETC's  
    Required reference: EOP Encl. 5.18, P/T Curves
Required reference: EOP Encl. 5.18, P/T Curves  
    K/A: E03EK21 (3.4/3.8)
K/A: E03EK21 (3.4/3.8)  
    T1G1, T1G1
T1G1, T1G1  
    Bank
Bank  
    Reference:     Facility updated question bank 21 IC084302 IC084302
Reference:  
Facility updated question bank 21 IC084302 IC084302


Draft AAA                                                                                      Enclosure 5.18
Enclosure 5.18
                                                                                                                                                                                                EP/1/AI1800/001
P/T Curves
                                                                                                      P/T Curves                                                                                Page 1 of 3
EP/1/AI1800/001  
              Normal Containment (P., < 3 psig):                                           Use OAC or ICCM.
Page 1 of 3
              Abnormal Containment (P.. > 3 psig): Use ICCM only.
Normal Containment (P., < 3 psig):  
        2400
Use OAC or ICCM.
        2400
Abnormal Containment (P.. > 3 psig): Use ICCM only.
              4
I
                      I         I
I
                    UNACCEPTABLE REGION
I
                          Decrease Pressure
I
                                            I         I        I          I
I  
                                                                                        I
I
                                                                                          I.ThT~                                                                                                                       II.'                    1        F'
UNACCEPTABLE REGION  
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        'I
Decrease Pressure
        2200                                                                          /                                                                                            11111 I
10
                                                                                                                                                                                      ~ii~~ii
150
        20D0                                                                        /                                                                                          III.......
200
                                                                                                                                                                                .....
I
                                                                                                                                                                                              ...JAIIlgA
2400
                                                                                                                                                                                                  t       .......           "Con'
2400
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      6
2200
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        0
20D0
                                                                                    I
1800
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  Co
1600
                                                                                                                                                                                                                            "stat' St
1400
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                0.
1200
        1800                                                                                                                                                                                                                  .4
1000
    C)
80o
        1600
600
                                                                      Il/I
400
                                                                    '-4"
200
                                                                -ti--H
0
                                                                                                I ..........           1. 1 1 Ii                                             ....   ..S..........
/
                                                                                                                                                                                                  .......
)1
        1400
/
                                                                  LU
I.
                                                                    lOll
I/
                                                                                                                                                              ...           ....
ThT~
                                                                                                                                                                            ..     j....       S......
11111  
                                                                                                                                                                                                  .......
~ii~~ii
                                                                                                                                                                                                                          Co.&#xa2;
III .......  
    U)
...
    0 1200
.....  
                                                                        )1                                                          I.........                                 ..
t ... ....
                                                                                                                                                                                              S......             ... .....
I ... .......
                                                                                                                                                                                                                  ..
1 .
        1000
1 1 ....
                                                                  /  . . ..
..
                                                                                        .. .....
Ii
                                                                                      ...
...  
                                                                                            ..
..  
                                                                                                          .4
....
                                                                                                    ... . . . . . ... . . . .. . ... . ..       #                            . . ........            ~~~~~~~~~~.
j ....
                                                                                                                                                                                                              ....                 . ...... . .         .......
I....  
    U
.....  
                                                                    . . ..                       . . . ....       ..   . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . ....             . . ......          ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~..
..
                                                                                                                                                                                                          .                    . . ..                       . .
II.'I
                              .   . ..... .. .... ..   ........     ......        . ...                      ........
IlgA
                                                                                                                  .                .. ........
JAI
                                                                                                                                        .         .......   ......                                           .....  . .. * ....
"Con'
                                                                                                                                                                                                                            . . .........      .. ...... .
"stat'
                                                                                .~~                                                                                             -=i
.4
        80o                                                                                                                                                              A
S..........  
                                S.. .. ...   . ....   .... .   .. .. ...     . ..             ......... 4 ..... ..       . ..                                                                                                               ........ ........
......
                                                                    . .......                                 ...     .   ....       .. ...   ...   . .. . .. . .. ...                   ~~~~~~~..
S......  
                                                                                                                                                                                                ..             ... ...       ............   R E IO
.......   
        600                      .....       ...       ..... .........                                     ...         .....                                                                 I plement ICC Procedure
S......  
        400    .. .   .. . .     .. . .       ..     .. . . .   . . ..                         ..... 4 ...... ...           .. ...................                                                                     ...... ... ....... . ...... . .... ...
... .....
                                  ..... ....... . ......                     ......       ... . ......
..
                                                                                          ...                                                                           ..........                   ............... ..... .... ...
Co.&#xa2;
                                                                                        ...... .....   ...                                     ...........                                       ...... . ... .. .. .. ... . . .. ...
1F'
        200
'I
            0
0
              10              150                    200                250                300                      350                   400                 450             500           550                 600                   650                 700
6
                                                                    REACTOR COOLANT TEMPERATURE (OF)
Co
St
0.
~~~~~~~~~~.  
....  
..  
..  
.
.
..  
.
.
.
.
..  
#
. . ..  
. . .
. . .
. . . ..  
. . ........  
. ......  
..
.......
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~..  
.
. . . . . . . . . .. . . ....  
. . ..  
. . . ....  
..  
. . . ..  
. . ......  
.
. ..  
. .
......  
..  
..  
.
. .....  
.. ..  
........  
. ...  
........  
.
.. ........  
.
.......  
.. ....  
.... .
. ..  
....
*  
.
. .........  
.. ...... .
.~~  
A
-=i  
S. ..  
..  
..  
. .. .
. ..  
.. .
.. .. ...  
. ..  
......... 4 ..... ..  
. ..  
........  
........
~~~~~~~..  
..  
.. ...  
...  
. .. . ..  
. .. ...  
. .......  
...  
...  
.
....  
...  
... .........
R E IO  
.....  
...  
..... .........  
...  
.....  
I plement ICC Procedure  
..
.
.. . .
. . . .
. .
.. . . .
. . ..  
..... 4 ...... ...  
.. ...................  
...... ... ....... . ......  
. .... ...
.... ..... .
.
.. ......  
..... .
...  
...
.
.... ..  
... .......  
.. ...... ... ... . .. ... ... . .. .
.. .. .. .
.. .....  
...........  
...... . ... .. .. .. ... . . .. ...
250
300
350  
400  
450  
500  
550  
600  
650  
700  
REACTOR COOLANT TEMPERATURE (OF)
4
C)
U)
0
U
Il/I
'-4"
-ti--H
lOll
LU
Draft AAA
...
.. .....
.4


Draft AAA                                          Enclosure 5.18
Enclosure 5.18
                                                                          EP/1/A/1800/001
P/T Curves
                                                    P/T Curves          Page 3 of 3
EP/1/A/1800/001  
            Normal Containment (P,. < 3 psig): Use OAC or ICCM.
Page 3 of 3
            Abnormal Containmenl (&. > 3 psig): Use ICCM only.
Normal Containment (P,. < 3 psig):  
      600
Use OAC or ICCM.
      500
Abnormal Containmenl (&. > 3 psig): Use ICCM only.
      400
600
    1
500
  0.
400  
  z  300
300  
  0
200
  0
100
  0
0
  0
50  
  U  200
100  
      100
150  
        0
200  
          50         100         150         200         250   300 350 400       450 500
250  
                                    REACTOR COOLANT TEMPERATURE (0 F)
300  
350  
400  
450  
500  
REACTOR COOLANT TEMPERATURE (0F)
1
0
z
0
0
0
0
U
Draft AAA


                                  OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                          02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                            1 POINT
1 POINT  
83. Given the following plant conditions:
83. Given the following plant conditions:  
        - The reactor is tripped.
- The reactor is tripped.
        - RCS subcooled margin is zero.
- RCS subcooled margin is zero.
    Which of the following actions would result in increasing RCS subcooling margin?
Which of the following actions would result in increasing RCS subcooling margin?  
    A.         Decrease RCS pressurizer level.
A.  
    B.         Decrease RCS hot leg flow.
Decrease RCS pressurizer level.
    C.         Increase RCS loop pressure.
B.  
    D.         Increase RCS hot leg temperature.
Decrease RCS hot leg flow.
    A) C
C.  
    A-This would further reduce RCS pressure, if a bubble still exists in the PZR, level may
Increase RCS loop pressure.
    increase ifvoids are forming.
D.  
    B- This would decrease the ability to transfer heat, and therefore would not increase SCM
Increase RCS hot leg temperature.
    C- CORRECT Raising pressure will increase the SCM by moving the RCS up and to the left on
A) C  
    the SPDS trace moving away from the saturation and zero SCM line.
A- This would further reduce RCS pressure, if a bubble still exists in the PZR, level may  
    D-This would move the RCS to the right on the ICCM trace and therefore decrease RCS SCM.
increase if voids are forming.
    Reference: Vol V, Bk 1 of 2, Loss of Subcooling
B- This would decrease the ability to transfer heat, and therefore would not increase SCM  
C- CORRECT Raising pressure will increase the SCM by moving the RCS up and to the left on  
the SPDS trace moving away from the saturation and zero SCM line.
D- This would move the RCS to the right on the ICCM trace and therefore decrease RCS SCM.
Reference: Vol V, Bk 1 of 2, Loss of Subcooling


                                  OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                          02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                              1 POINT
1 POINT  
84. Given the following plant conditions:
84. Given the following plant conditions:  
        - Time is 15 minutes after a reactor trip due to loss of both Main Feedwater
- Time is 15 minutes after a reactor trip due to loss of both Main Feedwater  
        Pumps.
Pumps.
        - No Emergency Feedwater Pumps are operating.
- No Emergency Feedwater Pumps are operating.
        - CETCs is 590&deg;F and increasing.
- CETCs is 590&deg;F and increasing.
        - RCS pressure is 2325 psig and increasing.
- RCS pressure is 2325 psig and increasing.
        - All 4 RCPs are running.
- All 4 RCPs are running.
        - "IA" OTSG level indicates 15 inches XSUR.
- "IA" OTSG level indicates 15 inches XSUR.
        - "IN' OTSG pressure is 1010 psig and stable.
- "IN' OTSG pressure is 1010 psig and stable.
        - "1 B" OTSG level indicates 13 inches XSUR.
- "1 B" OTSG level indicates 13 inches XSUR.
        - "1 B" OTSG pressure is 800 psig and decreasing.
- "1 B" OTSG pressure is 800 psig and decreasing.
        - RCS heat up rate is +30&deg;F / Hr.
- RCS heat up rate is +30&deg;F / Hr.
        - RCP "lAl" seal supply is 10 gpm.
- RCP "lAl" seal supply is 10 gpm.
    Which of the following action(s) is required concerning operation of the RCPs?
Which of the following action(s) is required concerning operation of the RCPs?  
    A.           Stop one RCP per loop.
A.  
    B.           Stop RCP lA1.
Stop one RCP per loop.
    C.           Stop all 4 RCPs.
B.  
    D.           Stop all but one RCP.
Stop RCP lA1.
    A) D
C.  
    A. RNO Step 3 of the EOP's Loss of Heat transfer tab, reduces the running RCPs to 1 per loop
Stop all 4 RCPs.
      but this step does not apply because HPI F/C would have been initiated.
D.  
    B. Misconception that leave 1 RCP for spray flow.
Stop all but one RCP.
    C. Do not place plant in NC with no other heat removal sources (OTSG), also have not
A) D  
      increased T incore 50&deg; since the trip.
A. RNO Step 3 of the EOP's Loss of Heat transfer tab, reduces the running RCPs to 1 per loop  
    D. Correct; RULE 4 (Initiation of HPI Forced Cooling) will have been perfromed because RCS
but this step does not apply because HPI F/C would have been initiated.
      pressure is > 2300 psig and no SG feed. RULE 4 reduces operating RCPs to one.
B. Misconception that leave 1 RCP for spray flow.
C. Do not place plant in NC with no other heat removal sources (OTSG), also have not  
increased T incore 50&deg; since the trip.
D. Correct; RULE 4 (Initiation of HPI Forced Cooling) will have been perfromed because RCS  
pressure is > 2300 psig and no SG feed. RULE 4 reduces operating RCPs to one.


                                  OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                            02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                              1 POINT
1 POINT  
85. With Unit 1 operating at 100% power and the ICS in the fully integrated mode, a loss of
85. With Unit 1 operating at 100% power and the ICS in the fully integrated mode, a loss of  
    KI (ICS AUTO) occurs. Which ONE of the following will occur IF the reactor trips one
KI (ICS AUTO) occurs. Which ONE of the following will occur IF the reactor trips one  
    minute later?
minute later?  
    ASSUME NO OPERATOR ACTION
ASSUME NO OPERATOR ACTION  
    A. Turbine Bypass Valves (TBVs) FAIL closed causing a RCS heatup.
A. Turbine Bypass Valves (TBVs) FAIL closed causing a RCS heatup.
    B. Excessive Main FDW flow will cause RCS overcooling.
B. Excessive Main FDW flow will cause RCS overcooling.
    C. Turbine bypass valves fail open causing overcooling.
C. Turbine bypass valves fail open causing overcooling.
    D. Reduced MFW flow will cause an RCS heatup.
D. Reduced MFW flow will cause an RCS heatup.
    A) B
A) B  
    A. Incorrect: TBVs are operable in manual on KU (hand) source.
A. Incorrect: TBVs are operable in manual on KU (hand) source.
    B.Correct: Loss of KI reverts all stations to manual. FDW valves and pumps remain in manual
B.Correct: Loss of KI reverts all stations to manual. FDW valves and pumps remain in manual  
    and FDW does not runback upon unit trip.
and FDW does not runback upon unit trip.
    C.Incorrect: TBVs are operable in manual on KU (hand) source.
C.Incorrect: TBVs are operable in manual on KU (hand) source.
    D.Incorrect: TBVs are operable in manual on KU (hand) source.
D.Incorrect: TBVs are operable in manual on KU (hand) source.
    K/A: E05EA1 1 (4.2/4.2
K/A: E05EA1 1 (4.2/4.2  
    T1G1, T1G1
T1G1, T1G1  
    Bank
Bank  
    Reference:     Facility updated question bank 31 STG123302 STG123302
Reference:  
Facility updated question bank 31 STG123302 STG123302


                                OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                        02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                          1 POINT
1 POINT  
86. Which one of the following is the reason why post LOCA boron dilution valves are
86. Which one of the following is the reason why post LOCA boron dilution valves are  
    opened following a LOCA?
opened following a LOCA?  
    A. To limit localized boric acid concentrations in the core.
A. To limit localized boric acid concentrations in the core.
    B. To limit localized boric acid concentrations in the RB Emergency Sump.
B. To limit localized boric acid concentrations in the RB Emergency Sump.
    C. To prevent the moderator temperature coefficient from going positive.
C. To prevent the moderator temperature coefficient from going positive.
    D. To allow for RCS cooldown where injection flow only is required for cooling.
D. To allow for RCS cooldown where injection flow only is required for cooling.
    A)A
A) A  
    Reference: Book IIof II,Vol 6, OP-OC-EAP-E31, page 11 of 11.
Reference: Book II of II, Vol 6, OP-OC-EAP-E31, page 11 of 11.
    EO-4
EO-4  
    K/A: E08EK22 (4.0/4.0)
K/A: E08EK22 (4.0/4.0)  
    RO/SRO: Both
RO/SRO: Both  
    Level: M
Level: M  
    Author: rfa
Author: rfa


                                  OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                          02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                            1 POINT
1 POINT  
87. Given the following plant conditions:
87. Given the following plant conditions:  
      - Reactor trip has occurred.
- Reactor trip has occurred.
      - Natural Circulation in progress with Emergency Feedwater.
- Natural Circulation in progress with Emergency Feedwater.
      - 30 minutes later, a transition is made from EFW to MFW.
- 30 minutes later, a transition is made from EFW to MFW.
    Which of the following identifies the resulting core delta T (Thot minus Tcold)
Which of the following identifies the resulting core delta T (Thot minus Tcold)  
    following this transition?
following this transition?  
    A.         Decreases because OTSG saturation temperature decreases.
A.  
    B.         Decreases because natural circulation flow in the RCS decreases due to a
Decreases because OTSG saturation temperature decreases.
              higher thermal center with MFW.
B.  
    C.         Increases because natural circulation flow in the RCS decreases due to
Decreases because natural circulation flow in the RCS decreases due to a  
              hotter water with MFW.
higher thermal center with MFW.
    D.         Remains the same because of the hotter water and lower thermal center
C.  
              with MFW.
Increases because natural circulation flow in the RCS decreases due to  
    A) C
hotter water with MFW.
    A.This only affects the OTSG Tcold.
D.  
    B. The thermal center is lower with MFW.
Remains the same because of the hotter water and lower thermal center  
    C. CORRECT: Lower thermal center less driving head lower flow therefore higher delta T
with MFW.
    D. With lower flow and lower center delta T has to change.
A) C  
    Reference: Vol VII, Accident Mitigation Core Cooling mechanics
A. This only affects the OTSG Tcold.
B. The thermal center is lower with MFW.
C. CORRECT: Lower thermal center less driving head lower flow therefore higher delta T  
D. With lower flow and lower center delta T has to change.
Reference: Vol VII, Accident Mitigation Core Cooling mechanics


                              OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                      02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                      1 POINT
1 POINT  
88. Unit 3 plant conditions:
88. Unit 3 plant conditions:  
        - Reactor power = 100%
- Reactor power = 100%  
        - Statalarm 3SA-8/D3 (FDWPT A Turning Gear Motor Overload) actuates
- Statalarm 3SA-8/D3 (FDWPT A Turning Gear Motor Overload) actuates  
        - The CRSRO is in the OSC
- The CRSRO is in the OSC  
    Which ONE of the following is correct per NSD-509 (Site Standards in Support of
Which ONE of the following is correct per NSD-509 (Site Standards in Support of  
    Operational Focus)?
Operational Focus)?  
    After acknowledging the alarm the BOP must...
After acknowledging the alarm the BOP must...
    A. brief the OSM on the alarm OR call the WCC and communicate the alarm to the
A. brief the OSM on the alarm OR call the WCC and communicate the alarm to the  
      WCC SRO.
WCC SRO.
    B. page the CRSRO to the Control Room using the Plant PA system AND call the
B. page the CRSRO to the Control Room using the Plant PA system AND call the  
      WCC and communicate the alarm to the WCC SRO.
WCC and communicate the alarm to the WCC SRO.
    C. brief the CRSRO on the alarm upon return to the Control Room OR find the
C. brief the CRSRO on the alarm upon return to the Control Room OR find the  
        CRSRO and communicate the alarm face-to-face.
CRSRO and communicate the alarm face-to-face.
    D. page the CRSRO to the Control Room using the Plant PA system AND
D. page the CRSRO to the Control Room using the Plant PA system AND  
        communicate the alarm to the OSM.
communicate the alarm to the OSM.
    A) C
A) C
    Reference: NSD-509
Reference: NSD-509


                                  OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                        02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                          1 POINT
1 POINT  
89. Plant conditions:
89. Plant conditions:  
    INITIAL CONDITIONS:
INITIAL CONDITIONS:  
            - Reactor power = 75%
- Reactor power = 75%  
    CURRENT CONDITIONS:
CURRENT CONDITIONS:  
            - A load rejection occurs
- A load rejection occurs  
            - Reactor power is decreasing
- Reactor power is decreasing  
            - Pressurizer subcooled
- Pressurizer subcooled  
    When looking at a Unit "Pressure vs. Temperature" or P/T screen, which ONE of the
When looking at a Unit "Pressure vs. Temperature" or P/T screen, which ONE of the  
    following correctly describes the indication you would observe?
following correctly describes the indication you would observe?  
    The yellow point would...
The yellow point would...
    A. turn cyan and move down and left on the P/T screen.
A. turn cyan and move down and left on the P/T screen.
    B. turn cyan and "SUBCOOLED PZR" would appear on the lower right hand corner of
B. turn cyan and "SUBCOOLED PZR" would appear on the lower right hand corner of  
        the screen.
the screen.
    C. stay yellow and "SUBCOOLED PZR" would appear on the lower right hand corner
C. stay yellow and "SUBCOOLED PZR" would appear on the lower right hand corner  
        of the screen.
of the screen.
    D. stay yellow and move to the left and up on the P/T screen.
D. stay yellow and move to the left and up on the P/T screen.
    A) D
A) D  
    K/A: G2.1.19 (3.0/3.0)
K/A: G2.1.19 (3.0/3.0)  
    RO - T3
RO - T3  
    Bank
Bank  
    Reference:
Reference:  
    Facility updated question bank 37 SF100701   SF100701
Facility updated question bank 37 SF100701  
SF100701


                                OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                        02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                          1 POINT
1 POINT  
90. Which one of the following set of requirements is correct for "Out of Sequencing of
90. Which one of the following set of requirements is correct for "Out of Sequencing of  
    Procedure Steps" as stated in OMP 1-9, "Use of Procedures?"
Procedure Steps" as stated in OMP 1-9, "Use of Procedures?"  
    A. The performer AND the Operations Shift Manager shall initial the applicable step(s).
A. The performer AND the Operations Shift Manager shall initial the applicable step(s).
        An evaluation of the consequences of the change shall be performed by the
An evaluation of the consequences of the change shall be performed by the  
        Operations Shift Manager. An explanation for the sequence change shall be
Operations Shift Manager. An explanation for the sequence change shall be  
        documented on the procedure.
documented on the procedure.
    B. The performer ONLY shall initial the applicable step(s). The re-sequencing of the
B. The performer ONLY shall initial the applicable step(s). The re-sequencing of the  
        step does not alter the acceptance criteria or overall intent of the procedure. An
step does not alter the acceptance criteria or overall intent of the procedure. An  
        evaluation of the consequences of the change shall be performed by the
evaluation of the consequences of the change shall be performed by the  
        Operations Shift Manager.
Operations Shift Manager.
    C. The performer AND the Operations Shift Manager shall initial the applicable step(s).
C. The performer AND the Operations Shift Manager shall initial the applicable step(s).
        An evaluation of the consequences of the change shall be performed by the
An evaluation of the consequences of the change shall be performed by the  
        Operations Shift Manager. The re-sequencing of the step MAY alter the
Operations Shift Manager. The re-sequencing of the step MAY alter the  
        acceptance criteria or overall intent of the procedure.
acceptance criteria or overall intent of the procedure.
    D. The performer ONLY shall initial the applicable step(s). An evaluation of the
D. The performer ONLY shall initial the applicable step(s). An evaluation of the  
        consequences of the change shall be performed by the Operations Shift Manager.
consequences of the change shall be performed by the Operations Shift Manager.
        An explanation for the sequence change should be documented on the procedure.
An explanation for the sequence change should be documented on the procedure.
    A) A
A) A  
    Reference: Lesson Plans Vol X, OP-OC-BPS-BP, page 27 of 47.
Reference: Lesson Plans Vol X, OP-OC-BPS-BP, page 27 of 47.
    EO - 5.5C.2
EO - 5.5C.2  
    K/A: G2.1.20 (4.3/4.2)
K/A: G2.1.20 (4.3/4.2)  
    RO/SRO: BOTH
RO/SRO: BOTH  
    Level: M
Level: M  
    Author: rfa
Author: rfa


                                OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                        02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                          1 POINT
1 POINT  
91. Plant conditions:
91. Plant conditions:  
        "* A fire in the SSF Diesel Room has been detected
"* A fire in the SSF Diesel Room has been detected  
        "* PBM Pushbutton is depressed for TWO seconds
"* PBM Pushbutton is depressed for TWO seconds  
    Which ONE of the following is the response of the SSF Diesel Carbon Dioxide Fire
Which ONE of the following is the response of the SSF Diesel Carbon Dioxide Fire  
    Suppression System?
Suppression System?  
    A. Carbon dioxide is IMMEDIATELY discharged into the Diesel Room and stops
A. Carbon dioxide is IMMEDIATELY discharged into the Diesel Room and stops  
        discharging after TWO seconds.
discharging after TWO seconds.
    B. Carbon dioxide is IMMEDIATELY discharged into the Diesel Room and is
B. Carbon dioxide is IMMEDIATELY discharged into the Diesel Room and is  
        automatically stopped by a pre-set timer.
automatically stopped by a pre-set timer.
    C. After -sixty (60) seconds, carbon dioxide is discharged into the Diesel Room and is
C. After -sixty (60) seconds, carbon dioxide is discharged into the Diesel Room and is  
        automatically stopped by a pre-set timer.
automatically stopped by a pre-set timer.
    D. After -sixty (60) seconds, carbon dioxide is discharged into the Diesel Room for a
D. After -sixty (60) seconds, carbon dioxide is discharged into the Diesel Room for a  
        TWO second period.
TWO second period.
    A) C
A) C  
    A. Incorrect. If PBM pushbutton is used C02 does not actually discharge until about
A. Incorrect. If PBM pushbutton is used C02 does not actually discharge until about  
      60 sec. At the end of the first timer (60 sec.) another timer will actuate and a full
60 sec. At the end of the first timer (60 sec.) another timer will actuate and a full  
      C02 system discharge will occur for about 60 sec.
C02 system discharge will occur for about 60 sec.
    B. Incorrect. See A
B. Incorrect. See A  
    C. Correct. See A
C. Correct. See A  
    D. Incorrect. See A
D. Incorrect. See A  
    Reference: Lesson Plans Book 1 of 2 Vol V, OP-OC-EAP-SSF , page 46 of 83.
Reference: Lesson Plans Book 1 of 2 Vol V, OP-OC-EAP-SSF , page 46 of 83.
    EO - 26.4
EO - 26.4  
    K/A: G2.1.28 (3.2/3.3)
K/A: G2.1.28 (3.2/3.3)  
    RO/SRO: Both
RO/SRO: Both  
    Level: M
Level: M  
    Author: rfa
Author: rfa


                                  OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                          02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                          1 POINT
1 POINT  
92. Which ONE of the following is the MAXIMUM MVAR load when operating at 500 MW
92. Which ONE of the following is the MAXIMUM MVAR load when operating at 500 MW  
    at a .9 Power Factor, and 30 psig H2 in generator?
at a .9 Power Factor, and 30 psig H2 in generator?
    SEE ATTACHMENT: Generator Capability Curve
SEE ATTACHMENT: Generator Capability Curve  
    A. 675
A. 675  
    B. 445
B. 445  
    C. 321
C. 321  
    D. 140
D. 140  
    A) B
A) B
    Reference: Book I of II, Vol 2, OP-OC-STG-01 5, page 40 of 45.
Reference:  
    EO - 7
EO - 7
    K/A: G2.1.7 (3.7/4.4)
Book I of II, Vol 2, OP-OC-STG-01 5, page 40 of 45.
    RO/SRO: Both
K/A: G2.1.7 (3.7/4.4)  
    Level: C
RO/SRO: Both  
    Author: rfa
Level: C  
Author: rfa


                                        Enclosure 4.7
Enclosure 4.7  
                                                            OP/i/A/ 106/001
Capability Curve  
                                      Capability Curve     Page 1 of I
Reference Use
                                      Reference Use
I  
I
C,,  
C,,
S  
S
0  
0
C  
C
0  
0
C
C
    CURVE AB LIMITED BY FIELD HEATING
OP/i/A/ 106/001
    CURVE BC LIMITEO BY ARMATURE HEATING
Page 1 of I
    CURVE CD LIMITED BY ARMATURE CORE END HEATING
CURVE AB LIMITED BY FIELD HEATING  
                                                        A5/       '1.h7
CURVE BC LIMITEO BY ARMATURE HEATING  
CURVE CD LIMITED BY ARMATURE CORE END HEATING
A5/  
'1.h7


                                OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                        02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                          1 POINT
1 POINT  
93. Which of the following will REQUIRE INITIATION of a reactor shutdown per Technical
93. Which of the following will REQUIRE INITIATION of a reactor shutdown per Technical  
    Specifications?
Specifications?  
    SEE ATTACHMENT: TS 3.4.13 (RCS Operational Leakage)
SEE ATTACHMENT: TS 3.4.13 (RCS Operational Leakage)  
    A.         Unidentified RCS leakage of 1 gpm for 1 hour.
A.  
    B.         Identified RCS leakage of 10 gpm for 1 hour.
Unidentified RCS leakage of 1 gpm for 1 hour.
    C.         300 gpd total primary to secondary leakage through ALL OSTG's OR 150
B.  
                gpd primary to secondary leakage through any one OTSG for 12 hours.
Identified RCS leakage of 10 gpm for 1 hour.
    D.         300 gpd total primary to secondary leakage through ALL OSTG's AND 150
C.  
                gpd primary to secondary leakage through any one OTSG for 5 hours.
300 gpd total primary to secondary leakage through ALL OSTG's OR 150  
    A) D
gpd primary to secondary leakage through any one OTSG for 12 hours.
    Reference required: TS 3.4.13
D.  
    K/A: 2.2.22 (3.4/4.1)
300 gpd total primary to secondary leakage through ALL OSTG's AND 150  
    RO/SRO: Both
gpd primary to secondary leakage through any one OTSG for 5 hours.
    Level: M
A) D  
    Author: rfa
Reference required: TS 3.4.13  
K/A: 2.2.22 (3.4/4.1)  
RO/SRO: Both  
Level: M  
Author: rfa


                                                                      RCS Operational LEAKAGE
RCS Operational LEAKAGE  
                                                                                        3.4.13
3.4.13
3.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (RCS)
3.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (RCS)  
3.4.13 RCS Operational LEAKAGE
3.4.13 RCS Operational LEAKAGE
LCO 3.4.13             RCS operational LEAKAGE shall be limited to:
LCO 3.4.13
                      a.   No pressure boundary LEAKAGE;
RCS operational LEAKAGE shall be limited to:
                      b.   1 gpm unidentified LEAKAGE;
a.  
                      C.   10 gpm identified LEAKAGE;
No pressure boundary LEAKAGE;  
                      d.   300 gallon per day total primary to secondary LEAKAGE through all
b.  
                            steam generators (SGs); and
1 gpm unidentified LEAKAGE;  
                        e.   150 gallon per day primary to secondary LEAKAGE
C.  
                              through any one SG.
10 gpm identified LEAKAGE;  
APPLICABILITY:         MODES 1, 2, 3, and 4.
d.  
ACTIONS
300 gallon per day total primary to secondary LEAKAGE through all  
          CONDITION                       REQUIRED ACTION                 COMPLETION TIME
steam generators (SGs); and  
  A. RCS LEAKAGE not             A.1       Reduce LEAKAGE to         4 hours
e.  
      within limits for reasons             within limits.
150 gallon per day primary to secondary LEAKAGE  
      other than pressure
through any one SG.
      boundary LEAKAGE.
APPLICABILITY:
  B. Required Action and           B.1       Be in MODE 3.             12 hours
MODES 1, 2, 3, and 4.
      associated Completion
ACTIONS  
      Time of Condition A not     AND
CONDITION  
      met.
REQUIRED ACTION  
                                    B.2       Be in MODE 5.             36 hours
COMPLETION TIME  
      OR
A.  
        Pressure boundary
RCS LEAKAGE not  
        LEAKAGE exists.
A.1  
  OCONEE UNITS 1, 2, & 3                    3.4.13-1             Amendment Nos. 300, 300, & 300
Reduce LEAKAGE to  
4 hours  
within limits for reasons  
within limits.
other than pressure  
boundary LEAKAGE.
B. Required Action and  
B.1  
Be in MODE 3.  
12 hours  
associated Completion  
Time of Condition A not  
AND  
met.
B.2  
Be in MODE 5.  
36 hours  
OR  
Pressure boundary  
LEAKAGE exists.
Amendment Nos. 300, 300, & 300
3.4.13-1
OCONEE UNITS 1, 2, & 3


                                                              RCS Operational LEAKAGE
RCS Operational LEAKAGE  
                                                                                    3.4.13
3.4.13
SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS
SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS  
                    SURVEILLANCE                                     FREQUENCY
SURVEILLANCE  
SR 3.4.13.1           -----       NOTE-       -------------
FREQUENCY  
              Not required to be performed until 12 hours
SR 3.4.13.1  
              after establishment of steady state operation.
-----  
              Evaluate RCS Operational LEAKAGE.               72 hours
NOTE-  
SR 3.4.13.2   Verify steam generator tube integrity is in     In accordance with the
-------------
              accordance with the Steam Generator Tube         Steam Generator Tube
Not required to be performed until 12 hours  
              Surveillance Program.                           Surveillance Program
after establishment of steady state operation.
  OCONEE UNITS 1, 2, & 3             3.4.13-2             Amendment Nos. 300. 300, & 300
Evaluate RCS Operational LEAKAGE.  
72 hours  
SR 3.4.13.2  
Verify steam generator tube integrity is in  
In accordance with the  
accordance with the Steam Generator Tube  
Steam Generator Tube  
Surveillance Program.  
Surveillance Program
Amendment Nos. 300. 300, & 300
OCONEE UNITS 1, 2, & 3
3.4.13-2


                                  OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                          02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                            1 POINT
1 POINT  
94. Given the following plant conditions:
94. Given the following plant conditions:  
        - PZR off scale low
- PZR off scale low  
        - RCS pressure 1200 psig and decreasing slowly
- RCS pressure 1200 psig and decreasing slowly  
        - Core Exit Thermocouples (CETCs) reading 950&deg;F and increasing slowly
- Core Exit Thermocouples (CETCs) reading 950&deg;F and increasing slowly  
        - NI-1/2 reading 5000 cps and increasing
- NI-1/2 reading 5000 cps and increasing  
        - Self Powered Neutron Detectors (SPNDs) current readings increasing
- Self Powered Neutron Detectors (SPNDs) current readings increasing  
    Which one of the following would explain the excore detectors increasing value?
Which one of the following would explain the excore detectors increasing value?  
    A.         Boron precipitation in the core.
A.  
    B.         Fuel coefficients effects.
Boron precipitation in the core.
    C.         Voiding in the downcomer.
B.  
    D.         Temperature effects on the excore detectors.
Fuel coefficients effects.
    A)C
C.  
    A. Boron would be decreasing the neutron population.
Voiding in the downcomer.
    B. Fuel coefficients would have a negative affect on neutron population.
D.  
    C. CORRECT: Given the conditions with the plant in region 3 of ICC would have downcomer
Temperature effects on the excore detectors.
    voiding which will increase leakage for the excore detectors.
A) C  
    D. Temperature will not cause the indication to increase in the detectors.
A. Boron would be decreasing the neutron population.
    Reference: Vol VIII, Ni's,
B. Fuel coefficients would have a negative affect on neutron population.
                Vol VII, Loss of DHR
C. CORRECT: Given the conditions with the plant in region 3 of ICC would have downcomer  
voiding which will increase leakage for the excore detectors.
D. Temperature will not cause the indication to increase in the detectors.
Reference: Vol VIII, Ni's,  
Vol VII, Loss of DHR


                                  OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                          02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                            1 POINT
1 POINT  
95. An individual has accumulated the following doses:
95. An individual has accumulated the following doses:  
        - Committed Dose Equivalent (CDE) is 2525 mr
- Committed Dose Equivalent (CDE) is 2525 mr  
        - Deep Dose Equivalent (DDE) is 2355 mr
- Deep Dose Equivalent (DDE) is 2355 mr  
        - Lens Dose Equivalent (LDE) is 744 mr
- Lens Dose Equivalent (LDE) is 744 mr  
        - Committed Effective Dose Equivalent (CEDE) is 605 mr
- Committed Effective Dose Equivalent (CEDE) is 605 mr  
        - Shallow Dose Equivalent (SDE) is 435 mr
- Shallow Dose Equivalent (SDE) is 435 mr  
    Which ONE of the following is the individual's Total Effective Dose Equivalent (TEDE)?
Which ONE of the following is the individual's Total Effective Dose Equivalent (TEDE)?  
    A. 2790 mr
A. 2790 mr  
    B. 2960 mr
B. 2960 mr  
    C. 3534 mr
C. 3534 mr  
    D. 4880 mr
D. 4880 mr  
    A) B
A) B  
    A. 2355 + 435 = 2790
A. 2355 + 435 = 2790  
    B. Correct. TEDE = 605 (CEDE) + 2355 (DDE) = 2960
B. Correct. TEDE = 605 (CEDE) + 2355 (DDE) = 2960  
    C. 2355 + 744 + 435 = 3534
C. 2355 + 744 + 435 = 3534  
    D. 2525 + 2355 = 4880
D. 2525 + 2355 = 4880  
    K/A: G2.3.1 (2.6/3.0)
K/A: G2.3.1 (2.6/3.0)  
    T3, T3
T3, T3  
    Bank/Mod
Bank/Mod  
    Reference:     Facility updated question bank 61 RAD022501 RAD022501
Reference:  
Facility updated question bank 61  
RAD022501  
RAD022501


                                  OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                        02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                          1 POINT
1 POINT  
96. A valve needs to be repositioned for the completion of a surveillance. The valve is
96. A valve needs to be repositioned for the completion of a surveillance. The valve is  
    located in a high radiation area. Lead shielding is draped over the valve handwheel.
located in a high radiation area. Lead shielding is draped over the valve handwheel.
    Which of the following is an accepted ALARA practice for repositioning the valve?
Which of the following is an accepted ALARA practice for repositioning the valve?  
    A.         Reposition the lead shielding along the valve piping enough to reposition
A.  
              the valve; replace the shielding to its original position; inform Radiation
Reposition the lead shielding along the valve piping enough to reposition  
              Protection when you have completed the task.
the valve; replace the shielding to its original position; inform Radiation  
    B.         Reposition the lead shielding so that it stays between you and the valve;
Protection when you have completed the task.
              reposition the valve by reaching around the shielding; replace the shielding
B.  
              to its original position.
Reposition the lead shielding so that it stays between you and the valve;  
    C.         Remove the lead shielding; reposition the valve;contact the WCC SRO to
reposition the valve by reaching around the shielding; replace the shielding  
              have the lead shielding replaced.
to its original position.
    D.         Stop work, contact WCC SRO to have an evaluation performed.
C.  
    A) D
Remove the lead shielding; reposition the valve;contact the WCC SRO to  
    Reasons:
have the lead shielding replaced.
    Do not move or remove shielding without RP and engineering evaluation.
D.  
    Reference: GET Manual, Page 44
Stop work, contact WCC SRO to have an evaluation performed.
A) D  
Reasons:  
Do not move or remove shielding without RP and engineering evaluation.
Reference: GET Manual, Page 44


                                OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                      02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                        1 POINT
1 POINT  
97. Which one of the following is considered to be an equivalent to a dose of 1 REM?
97. Which one of the following is considered to be an equivalent to a dose of 1 REM?  
    A. A dose of 1 REM of gamma radiation, a dose of 1 RAD of beta, a dose of 0.1 RADs
A. A dose of 1 REM of gamma radiation, a dose of 1 RAD of beta, a dose of 0.1 RADs  
        of high energy protons, a dose of 0.5 RADs of alpha.
of high energy protons, a dose of 0.5 RADs of alpha.
    B. A dose of 1 RAD of gamma radiation, a dose of 1 RAD of beta, a dose of 0.05
B. A dose of 1 RAD of gamma radiation, a dose of 1 RAD of beta, a dose of 0.05  
        RADs of neutrons, a dose of 0.1 RADs of alpha.
RADs of neutrons, a dose of 0.1 RADs of alpha.
    C. A dose of 1 REM of gamma radiation, a dose of 0.1 RADs of high energy protons, a
C. A dose of 1 REM of gamma radiation, a dose of 0.1 RADs of high energy protons, a  
        dose of 0.05 RADs of neutrons, a dose of 0.5 RADs of alpha.
dose of 0.05 RADs of neutrons, a dose of 0.5 RADs of alpha.
    D. A dose of 1 RAD of gamma radiation, a dose of 1 RAD of beta, a dose of 0.1 RADs
D. A dose of 1 RAD of gamma radiation, a dose of 1 RAD of beta, a dose of 0.1 RADs  
        of high energy protons, a dose of 0.05 RADs of alpha.
of high energy protons, a dose of 0.05 RADs of alpha.
    A) D
A) D  
    Reference: Lesson Plans Vol 2, OP-OC-RAD-RPP, page 23 of 77.
Reference: Lesson Plans Vol 2, OP-OC-RAD-RPP, page 23 of 77.
    EO - 1
EO - 1  
    K/A: G2.3.4 (2.5/3.1)
K/A: G2.3.4 (2.5/3.1)  
    RO/SRO: BOTH
RO/SRO: BOTH  
    Level: M
Level: M  
    Author: rfa
Author: rfa


                                  OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                        02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                          1 POINT
1 POINT  
98. Given the following plant conditions:
98. Given the following plant conditions:  
        - 100% power.
- 100% power.
        - A tube rupture occurs that results in an ES actuation on low RCS pressure.
- A tube rupture occurs that results in an ES actuation on low RCS pressure.
        - An ALERT is declared based on the Fission Product Barrier Matrix.
- An ALERT is declared based on the Fission Product Barrier Matrix.
    Which one of the following identifies the INITIAL notification requirements for the
Which one of the following identifies the INITIAL notification requirements for the  
    NRC Operations Center, State and County agencies?
NRC Operations Center, State and County agencies?  
    A.         Notify the NRC Operations Center within 75 minutes; notify the State and
A.  
                County agencies as soon as possible.
Notify the NRC Operations Center within 75 minutes; notify the State and  
    B.         Notify the NRC Operations Center in less than one (1) hour; notify the
County agencies as soon as possible.
                State and County agencies within 15 minutes.
B.  
    C.         Notify the NRC Operations Center within 75 minutes; notify the State and
Notify the NRC Operations Center in less than one (1) hour; notify the  
                County agencies within 15 minutes.
State and County agencies within 15 minutes.
    D.         Notify the NRC Operations Center within 15 minutes; notify the State and
C.  
                County agencies in less than one (1) hour.
Notify the NRC Operations Center within 75 minutes; notify the State and  
    A) B
County agencies within 15 minutes.
    A. Notify the NRC Operations Center in less than one (1) hour; notify the State and County
D.  
      agencies within 15 minutes.
Notify the NRC Operations Center within 15 minutes; notify the State and  
    B. CORRECT: Notify the NRC Operations Center in less than one (1) hour; notify the State
County agencies in less than one (1) hour.
      and County agencies within 15 minutes.
A) B  
    C. Notify the NRC Operations Center in less than one (1) hour; notify the State and County
A. Notify the NRC Operations Center in less than one (1) hour; notify the State and County  
      agencies within 15 minutes.
agencies within 15 minutes.
    D. Notify the NRC Operations Center in less than one (1) hour; notify the State and County
B. CORRECT: Notify the NRC Operations Center in less than one (1) hour; notify the State  
      agencies within 15 minutes.
and County agencies within 15 minutes.
    Reference: Vol. V, Bk 1 of 2, OP-OC-EAP-SEP
C. Notify the NRC Operations Center in less than one (1) hour; notify the State and County  
                Nuclear System Directives 114, 201,202
agencies within 15 minutes.
                RP/1002, Enc, 4.2 Alert
D. Notify the NRC Operations Center in less than one (1) hour; notify the State and County  
    E.O. 17.2
agencies within 15 minutes.
Reference: Vol. V, Bk 1 of 2, OP-OC-EAP-SEP  
Nuclear System Directives 114, 201,202  
RP/1002, Enc, 4.2 Alert
E.O. 17.2


                                OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                        02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                          1 POINT
1 POINT  
99. Given the following plant conditions:
99. Given the following plant conditions:  
        - 100% power
- 100% power  
        - RCS pressure 2155 psig
- RCS pressure 2155 psig  
        - RCS temperature 579 0 F
- RCS temperature 5790F
        - RCS makeup flow has increased from 40 to 45 gpm and stable
- RCS makeup flow has increased from 40 to 45 gpm and stable  
        - Pressurizer level decreased and is now at setpoint and stable
- Pressurizer level decreased and is now at setpoint and stable  
        - RIA-40, (CSAE Off-Gas Monitor) is in alarm
- RIA-40, (CSAE Off-Gas Monitor) is in alarm  
    Which one of the following entry conditions has been met?
Which one of the following entry conditions has been met?  
    A.         A small break LOCA is in progress, enter the EOP and perform the
A.  
              Immediate and Subsequent Actions.
A small break LOCA is in progress, enter the EOP and perform the  
    B.         A small break LOCA is in progress, enter the SGTR tab section of the EOP.
Immediate and Subsequent Actions.
    C.         A tube leak is in progress, enter the EOP and perform the Immediate and
B.  
              Subsequent Actions.
A small break LOCA is in progress, enter the SGTR tab section of the EOP.
    D.         A tube leak is in progress, enter AP/31, Primary to Secondary Leakage.
C.  
    A) D
A tube leak is in progress, enter the EOP and perform the Immediate and  
    Reference: AP/31, Primary to Secondary Leakage
Subsequent Actions.
    C/A
D.  
A tube leak is in progress, enter AP/31, Primary to Secondary Leakage.
A) D  
Reference: AP/31, Primary to Secondary Leakage  
C/A


                                    OCONEE NRC RO EXAM
OCONEE NRC RO EXAM  
                                          02-18-2002
02-18-2002  
                                            1 POINT
1 POINT  
100. Plant conditions:
100. Plant conditions:  
        - A fire has occurred
- A fire has occurred  
        - Appendix R pumps required for plant shutdown cannot be operated from their
- Appendix R pumps required for plant shutdown cannot be operated from their  
            normal power supply
normal power supply  
    Which ONE of the following is correct?
Which ONE of the following is correct?  
    I&E will align power to these pumps from...
I&E will align power to these pumps from...
    A. CT-5 (Lee Station feeder) through the Appendix R Switchgear.
A. CT-5 (Lee Station feeder) through the Appendix R Switchgear.
    B. CT-5 (Lee Station feeder) through motor starters on the back of the Appendix R
B. CT-5 (Lee Station feeder) through motor starters on the back of the Appendix R  
        Portable Valve Control Panel.
Portable Valve Control Panel.
    C. CT-4 (Keowee underground feeder) through the Appendix R Switchgear.
C. CT-4 (Keowee underground feeder) through the Appendix R Switchgear.
    D. CT-4 (Keowee underground feeder) through motor starters on the back of the
D. CT-4 (Keowee underground feeder) through motor starters on the back of the  
        Appendix R Portable Valve Control Panel.
Appendix R Portable Valve Control Panel.
    A)C
A) C  
    K/A: (2.9/3.4)
K/A: (2.9/3.4)  
    T3, T3
T3, T3  
    Bank
Bank  
    Reference:     Facility updated question bank 46 CP101202 CP101202
Reference:  
                                          END OF EXAM
Facility updated question bank 46 CP101202 CP101202
END OF EXAM
}}
}}

Latest revision as of 19:16, 16 January 2025

Feb. 2002 Exam 50-269, 270, 287/2002-301 Final RO Written Examination
ML020920552
Person / Time
Site: Oconee  Duke Energy icon.png
Issue date: 02/11/2002
From:
Division of Nuclear Materials Safety II
To:
Duke Energy Corp
References
50-269/02301, 50-270/02301, 50-287/02301
Download: ML020920552 (147)


See also: IR 05000269/2002301

Text

Final Submittal

(Blue Paper)

Reactor Operator Written Examination

OCONEE EXAM

50-269, 270, 287/2002-301

FEBRUARY 11 - 15, 2002

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

32. Which one of the following contains completely correct statements with respect to

RBCU operation following an ES actuation?

A. RB Aux fans receive a start signal, upon an ES signal, RBCUs are in low speed,

LPSW-565 (RB AUX FANS COOLERS INLET) opens and LPSW-566 ("B" RBCU

ISOLATION) closes restoring full LPSW flow to the "B" RBCU.

B. RBCUs receive a signal from ES 1 & 2, all RBCUs go to low speed, LPSW-565 (RB

AUX FANS COOLERS INLET) opens and LPSW-566 ("B" RBCU ISOLATION)

closes restoring full LPSW flow to the "B" RBCU.

C. Fusible dropout plates will drop if the RB air temperature heats up to a temperature

between 150°F and 165 0F, One second after the fusible dropout plates drop, the

RBCU fans swap to high speed.

D. RBCUs receive a signal from ES 5 & 6, all RBCUs go to low speed, and the RBCU

LPSW outlet valves go full open.

A) D

EO: 4 and 5.2

K/A: 022A301 (4.1/4.3)

Reference: Vol IV, OP-OC-PNS-RBC Pages 16 and 18 of 23.

Author: RFA

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

33. The following conditions exist on Unit #1:

- Rx Power = 100%

- PZR level = 220"

- LDST level = 70"

- LDST Pressure = 35 psig

Which ONE of the following MIMIMUM actions should be taken?

SEE ATTACHMENT: (LDST Pressure vs. Level & TS's)

A. Declare both trains of HPI inoperable and be in mode 3 within 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br />.

B. Declare both trains of HPI inoperable and restore at least 1 train within 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br />.

C. Declare both trains of HPI inoperable and be in mode 3 within 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> AND

decrease RCS pressure to < 800 psig.

D. No actions required.

A) A

A. Correct - P/T is above and to left of curve in 1108/01. Per

same encl. in 1108/01, both trains of HPI should be declared

inoperable and TS 3.5.2 (BB3.5.2-6 applies)

K/A: 022AA101 (3.4/3.3)

T1G2, T1G2

Bank/Modified

Reference:

Facility updated question bank 4 PNS113501

PNS113501

TS 3.5.1, 3.5.2 (B3.5.2-6).

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

1. Shutdown margin has been reduced with the intent of going critical and reactor startup

has been temporarily suspended.

In accordance with the Controlling procedure for Unit Startup (OP/1,2,3/A1 102/01),

which one of the following describes the MINIMUM required operator actions?

A. Insert CRDs to group 1 at 50% and calculate a shutdown margin per PT/1 103/015,

Reactivity balance Calculation.

B. Limit SG levels to < 40 inches on Startup Range and maintain >1%delta K/K

Shutdown Margin for 200 F RCS temperature with a Xenon free core.

C. Insert CRDs to group 1 at 50% and limit SG levels to < 40 inches on Startup Range.

D. Calculate a shutdown margin per PT/1 103/015, Reactivity balance Calculation and

maintain >1%delta K/K Shutdown Margin for 200 F RCS temperature with a Xenon

free core.

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

A) A

Distractor Analysis:

When in mode 3 or higher, maintain the following:

Limit SG levels to < 40 inches on Stertup Range OR maintain >1%delta K/K Shutdown Margin

for 200 F RCS temperature with a Xenon free core.

This prevents accidental criticality caused by a MS line break overcooling.

If shutdown margin has been reduced with intent of going critical and reactor Startup is

suspended (this does not apply during ZPPT) then:

Insert CRDs to group 1 at 50% and calculate a shutdown margin per PT/1 103/015, Reactivity

balance Calculation.

Inserting rods to group 1 at 50% will place the reactor in a condition of being shutdown by the

worth of the safety rods, while having further shutdown capability with the remaining worth of

Group 1.

Reference: Lesson Plans Vol 2, OP-OC-CP-01 1, page 11 of 43.

EO - 23

K/A: 001A411 (3.5/4.1)

RO/SRO: Both

Level: C

Author: rfa

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

2. The unit is operating at 80% power when it is determined that the Control Rods (CRs)

are in the restricted area due to a momentary continuous rod withdrawal . A calculation

has been completed that indicates RCS boron concentration will have to be increased

from 435 ppm to 460 ppm to return CRs to an acceptable position. The following

conditions exist for CBAST:

- CBAST concentration = 11,240 ppm

- CBASTvolume = 13,200 gal.

- RCS Hot Volume = 59,860 gals

- RCS Cold Volume = 88,000 gals

Which ONE of the following is the volume of CBAST that will have to be added to the

RCS to accomplish this concentration change?

A. 117 gallons

B. 139 gallons

C. 173 gallons

D. 204 gallons

Answer B

A. calculated using 13,200 ppm and hot volume (59860)

B. correct - 11 240(X)+435(59860)=460(59860+X)

C. calculated using 13,200 ppm and cold volume (88,000)

D. calculated using 11,240 ppm and cold volume

K/A: 001AK103 (3.9/4.0)

T1G2, T1GI

Bank

Reference:

Facility updated question bank 26 CP050102 CP050102

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

3. The following conditions exist:

- A reactor startup is in progress.

- Control rod groups 1 through 3 are fully withdrawn.

- Group 4 rod withdrawal is stopped at 48%

- Source range NI counts are 540 cps and slowly increasing on NI-1 and NI-2

- Start-up rate is 0.2 DPM and constant on NI-1 and NI-2

- All rod motion has been stopped for 20 seconds

Which of the following states the appropriate actions for the conditions stated above?

A.

Monitor the increasing count rate and verify power stabilizes below the point

of adding heat before continuing rod withdrawal.

B.

Insert group 4 control rods, verify a Shutdown Margin of more than 1%

exists and inform the Reactor Engineer of plant conditions.

C.

Insert groups 1 through 4 to group I at 50% withdrawn, request Chemistry

to resample the RCS for boron concentration, and calculate a SDM.

D.

Trip the reactor and enter the EOP's, perform the Immediate Manual

Actions tab, and transfer to Unanticipated Nuclear Power tab.

A) C

Reasons

A.

The indications in the stem of this question show that the reactor has

achieved criticality on Safety Rods. Continued power increase should not be

permitted.

B.

Insertion of all safety rods is required for these conditions. Insertion of

only group 4 rods is not adequate.

C.

Correct Answer: In accordance with PT/1 103/15, Reactivity Balance

Calculation.

D.

Immediate tripping of reactor is not required. If reactor was tripped transfer to

UNPP would not be performed.

Reference: EP/I1A/1800/001, EOP Immediate manual Actions tab.

OP/I/A/1 102/001, Controlling Procedure for Unit SU.

PT/1103/15, Reactivity Balance Calculation

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

4. Which one of the following set of conditions will cause a regulating control rod group

asymmetric runback?

Assume in all cases a 9" asymmetric fault also occurred.

A. If a group 5 rod drops, causing a group 5 in limit, and NI power is >60% or if a

group 7 rod drops causing a group 7 in limit and group 6 rods are > 80% an

asymmetric runback will occur.

B. If a group 6 rod drops, causing a group 6 in limit and the remainder of group 6 rods

are > 80% withdrawn, an asymmetric runback will occur. The runback will continue

to 55% even if the 9" asymmetric fault clears before reaching 55%.

C. If a group 5 rod drops, causing a group 5 in limit, and NI power is >80% or if a

group 6 rod drops, causing a group 6 in limit and group 5 rods are > 60%

withdrawn, an asymmetric runback will occur.

D. If a group 7 rod drops causing a group 7 in limit and the remainder of group 7 rods

are > 80% withdrawn, an asymmetric runback will occur. The runback will continue

to 55% even if the 9" asymmetric fault clears before reaching 55%.

A) A

Reference: Lesson Plans Vol VIII, OP-OC-IC-CRI , page 26 of 62.

EO - 9

K/A: 001 K507 (3.3/4.0)

RO/SRO: BOTH

Level: C

Author: rfa

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

5. The initial power escalation following a refueling outage is being performed. The

reactor power level is stabilized to perform testing. The following indications are

available to the operator at the control board:

NI-5

NI-6

NI-7

NI-8

26.0%

29.0%

26.0%

29.0%

T-hot Loop A

588.50 F

T-hot Loop B

588.00 F

T-cold Loop A

570.00 F

T-cold Loop B

569.50 F

Tave

579.00 F

Generator output 320 MWe

Which of the following is an accurate estimate

reactor at this point?

of the thermal power level of the

SEE ATTACHMENT: Encl.13.12 (Loop deltaT vs. Rx Power)

Encl.13.13 (Gross Load vs. Rx Power)

A.

B.

C.

668 MWt

745 MWt

899 MWt

D.

1078 MWt

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

A) D

Reasons:

A, B, C. Due to the change in Tcold on a power increase, the NIs will need calibrating

at approximately 25% power increments. Using alternate indications, such as core

delta-T is a more accurate indication of power level. A core delta-T of 18.50 F indicates

a power level of approximately 42% with a corresponding thermal power level of

approximately 1070 MWt.

A.

If the student uses the value of power displayed on NI 5 and NI 7, this

answer will be obtained.

(.26 X 2568 MWt = 668 MWt)

B.

If the student uses the highest value of power displayed on NI 6 and NI 8,

this answer will be obtained.

(.29 X 2568 MWt = 745 MWt)

C.

If the student uses use enclouse 12.13, Gross Load vs Reator Power,

320 MWe = 35% reactor power.

Thermal, this answer will be obtained.

(35% power X 2568 MWt = 898.8 = 899 MWe)

D.

18.50 on 4 RCP curve - 42% power 42% x 2568 = 1078.56 = 1079 MWt

OC reference: OP/1AN1102/001, Controlling procedure for unit SU.

OP/I/A/1 102/004, Operation at power

PT/600/01, Periodic Instrument Surveillance

Enclosure 13.13

Gross Load Vs. Reactor Power

PT/1/A/0600/001

Page I of I

900

800

7D0

600

500

400

300

200

100

0

I0OD

900

800

700

600

400

300

200

100

0

100

Reactor Power (%FP)

I

I

2

0 (D

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

0

Enclosure 13.12

Unit 1 Cycle 20

Loop AT Vs. Reactor Power

PT/1/A/0600/001

Page 1 of I

7mpu* I IM

lii

100

90

80

70

80

50

rr

t=4'

.~

.

.

.

..

.

.

.1

1

10

15

T3+K

20

25

tW

30

35

40

Loop Oelta-T (degrees F)

- .1

U.

I

40

30

20

10

0

0

45

50

La:A

iiLl ý:IE:.7iz,

7d -

4

R-H

P

...--

-

-4-

4

-

T

...

H

I

SPump Curye

kl

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

6. Given the following plant conditions:

- Reactor is at 70% power.

- ICS Reactor Bailey and Diamond stations are in

- All other ICS stations are in AUTOMATIC.

- Group 5 rod 6 is dropped fully into the core.

MANUAL.

Which of the following indicates the core power distribution CONCERN, and the Tave

parameter response?

ASSUME NO OPERATOR ACTIONS

A.

Negative Quadrant Power Tilt; Tave decreases and remains low.

B.

Negative Quadrant Power Tilt; Tave decreases and returns to setpoint.

C.

Positive Quadrant Power Tilt; Tave decreases and remains low.

D.

Positive Quadrant Power Tilt; Tave decreases and returns to setpoint.

A) D

NB/C. QPT will become more negative in the quadrant the rod is dropped into but the

main operator limit concern is the flux shift and the positive QPT for the other 3

quadrants. Tave will return to setpoint as MFW has Tave control with the reactor in

manual.

D. CORRECT; As the rod is fully dropped into the core, power distribution is changed

between the quadrants. The quadrant that the rod is dropped into is poisoned and the

flux decreases and shifts the flux to the other quadrants. The quadrant that contains

the dropped rod will indicate a negative QPT value and the other quadrants will indicate

positive. These positive quadrants are producing most of the power and is the

operators main power distribution limit concern. Tave will return to setpoint as MFW

has Tave control with the reactor in manual.

Reference: AOP Vol 1 of 2, AP/1/A/1700/015

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

7. Unit 2 plant conditions:

- Reactor power = 55%

- RCS Tave = 579°F

- 2B2 RCP AC Oil Lift Pump operating:

- Pressure = 700 psig

- 2A CC Pump operating:

- CRD Outlet Hdr flow = 150 gpm

- Total CC flow = 890 gpm

Which ONE of the following describes why the 2B2 Reactor Coolant Pump will NOT

start at this time?

is too

A. RCS temperature / high

B. Reactor power / high

C. Oil lift pressure / low

D. CC flow / low

A) B

A. Incorrect - RCS temperature is > 3250F which is required to start the 4th RCP. If

RCS temperatutre was < 3250F this would be a correct answer.

B. Correct - Reactor power should be < 50% to start any RCP. Rx Power must be

below 50% to satisfy the start interlock circuitry.

C. Incorrect - Oil lift press is > 600 psig which meets the requirement of the start

interlock. If Oil Lift Pressure was < 600 psig this would be a correct answer.

D. Incorrect - CC flow is > 575 gpm If Total CC flow was < 575 gpm this would be a

correct answer. To answer correctly the student must know that the interlock is fed

from TOTAL flow and not CRD RETURN flow.

K/A: 003K402 (2.5/2.7)

T2G1, T2G1

Bank

Reference:

Facility updated question bank 5 PNS061403 PNS061403

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

8. Which one of the following DW solutions

lower the RCS from 1500 ppm B to 1300

59860 gallons?

is correct assuming the operator wants to

ppm B. The RCS is hot and has a volume of

The operator has just added 500 gallons of "A" BHUT at 1700 ppmB

Assume DW added is at 0 ppmB

A. 8566 gallons of DW

B. 9209 gallons of DW

C. 9363 gallons of DW

D. 9863 gallons of DW

A) C

Distractor Analysis:

8566 gal.

9209 gal.

9363 gal.

9863 gal.

(uses feed and bleed formula without consideration for ,,A' BHUT addition) - incorrect

(uses wrong ppmB, 1300, for calculating XA"

BHUT addition) - incorrect

[(1 500)(59860)+(1700)(500)+(0)(V3)=(1 300)(59860+500+V3)] - correct answer

(uses total make-up volume.. .without subtracting ,,A" BHUT volume) - incorrect

Reference: Lesson Plans Vol 2, OP-OC-CP-016, page 14 of 43.

EO - 5.1

K/A: 004A404 (3.2/3.6)

RO/SRO: Both

Level: C

Author: rfa

a.

b.

C.

d.

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

9. Given the following plant conditions:

- 100% power.

- "1B" HPI pump is in operation.

- LDST Level "2" is selected.

Which of the following describes the response of the HPI system if the LDST level "1"

transmitter fails low?

A.

Only 1HP-24, "IA" HPI BWST suction, will receive an open signal.

B.

Only 1HP-25, "1B" HPI BWST suction, will receive an open signal.

C.

Both 1 HP-24 and 1 HP-25, "1A" AND "1 B" HPI BWST suction, will receive

an open signal.

D.

Neither 1HP-24, "1A" HPI BWST suction NOR 1HP-25, "IB" HPI BWST

suction, will receive an open signal.

A) D

Reference: Vol IV, HPI System

C/A

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

10. Given the following:

- Reactor power = 100%

- All ICS stations in AUTOMATIC

- RCS boron concentration = 1050 ppm

- "IA" BHUT = 1245 ppmB

- "IB" BHUT = <10 ppmB

- Group 7 CRs @ 88% withdrawn

- Group 7 CRs rod worth = -.0068%Aik/o%

- Differential Boron worth = -.0078%Ak/kIppm

(ASSUME: RCS hot volume of 59860 gallons)

Which ONE of the following will be the Group 7 (% withdrawn) rod position that

resulted from an addition of 1900 gallons from "IA" BHUT to the RCS?

A. 91%

B. 93%

C. 95%

D. 100%

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

A) C

A.

B.

C.

Incorrect: See calculation below

Incorrect: Reverses coefficient values for rods and boron.

Correct: (59860)(1050) + (1245)(1900) = (Cf)(61760)

RCS

+ A BHUT

= (Cf) ( RCS final volume)

Cf = 1056 ppmB

RCS boron increase from 1050 to 1056 = 6 ppmB increase

6 ppmB x .0078 = .0468%deltaK/K

.0468 / .0068 = 6.88 % rod motion (outward)

88% + 6.88% = 95%

D. Incorrect: Uses RCS final volume of 59860 in calculation.

K/A: 004K105 (2.7/3.2)

SRO -T2G1

Bank

Reference:

Facility updated question bank 7 CP050105 CP050105

C/A

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

11. Which one of the following group of action(s) is/are correct given the following plant

conditions?

- Control rod 3 in group 7 has dropped to the bottom and stuck.

- Control rod 4 in group 4 has misaligned 8 inches and stuck.

- ICS is in AUTO.

- An ASYMM. FAULT caused the reactor to run back to 60% then it stopped.

A. Verify greater than or equal to one dropped rod and trip the reactor.

B. Verify the reactor is critical and if so then ensure all control rods are inserted to at

least group 1 at 50% WD.

C. Initiate a power reduction to 55% FP.

D. Ensure ICS re-ratios feedwater to establish approximately 0 Delta Tc.

A) C

Distractor Analysis:

Distractor d is for abnormal RCP operation.

Distractors a and b are for a misaligned rod > 9 inches.

Reference: AP/1/A/1700/015, Unit 1, Vol 1 electronic ref - OX002RG, page 1 of 5.

EO - 8 and 9, LP Vol VIII, OP-OC-IC-CRI, page 8 of 62

EO - 8, LP Vol I, OP-OC-CP-018, page 3 of 22

K/A: 005AA203 (3.5.4.4)

RO/SRO: Both

Level: C

Author: rfa

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

12. Unit 1 is experiencing a loss of component cooling (CC). Which one of the following

AUTOMATIC action(s) should have occurred given that:

- Letdown Temperature is 1380F.

- CRD stator temperatures are 190'F.

- CC flow = 500 gpm

- CC Surge Tank Level = 30 inches decreasing.

A. The standby CC pump should have started AND 1HP-5 should have closed.

B. The standby CC pump should have started AND the reactor should have tripped.

C. ALL RCP seal return valves should have closed AND the reactor should have

tripped.

D. ALL RCP seal return valves should have closed AND 1HP-5 should have closed.

A) A

Distractor Analysis:

The standby CC pump should starts at 575 gpm CC total flow decreasing.

1HP-5 closes at letdown temperature > 135 degrees F.

All RCP seal return valves close upon loss of both RCP seal injection and CC with RCS

pressure > 400 psig.

If IAAT >/= two CRD stator temperatures > 180 degrees F then MANUALLY trip the reactor.

Reference: API1IAI1700/020, Unit 1, Vol 1 electronic ref - OX002GX, page 1 of 11.

EO - 17 and 18, LP Vol IV, OP-OC-PNS-CC, page 7 of 23

K/A: 008K303 (4.1/4.2)

RO/SRO: Both

Level: C

Author: rfa

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

13. Unit 1 conditions:

Time = 0812:

"*

RCS pressure = 1700 psig, decreasing

"*

All SCMs indicate 00F.

Time = 0815:

"*

CETCs = 5840F

"*

RCS pressure = 1370 psig, decreasing

"*

ALL SCMs = 0°F

"*

Reactor Power level = 0%

"*

All RCPs running; pump amps are cycling

Which ONE of the following is the correct operator action?

A.

Leave all RCPs running

B.

Trip all RCPs immediately

C.

Trip all RCPs after two minutes

D.

Reduce the number of running RCPs to one RCP/loop operation

A)A

A. Correct:

RCPs would be left running because amps not normal

B. Incorrect:

Per OMP 1-18, Rule 2 and EOP LOSCM - trip all RCPs if reactor power

Is < 1% and amps are normal and stable.

C. Incorrect: Trip all RCPs. Two minutes would be allowed if saturated following RCP

restart.

D. Incorrect: Trip all RCPs. no guidance on securing selectd RCPs

Reference: EOPs, Immediate manual Actions tab

AP/l/A/1700/16, RCP Abnormal Procedure (Units 2 and 3 only)

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

14. Which one of the following correctly list some of the 7 (seven) events which Oconee

has made provisions to prevent a reactor vessel overpressurizarion at low

temperatures?

A. HP-120 fails open, Temporary loss of DHR, All pressurizer heaters erroneously

energized or failed on.

B. Inadvertent HPI initiation, Erroneous opening of a CFT discharge valve, Failure of

the PORV.

C. HP-120 fails open, Temporary loss of DHR, Failure of the PORV.

D. Inadvertent HPI initiation, Erroneous opening of a CFT discharge valve, Both trains

of LTOP are out of service.

A) A

Reference: Lesson Plans Vol 2, OP-OC-CP-017, page 8 of 28.

EO - 2

K/A: 010K403 (3.8/4.1)

RO/SRO: Both

Level: M

Author: rfa

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

15. The following Core Flood Tank parameters exist:

"A" CFT

- Pressure = 629 psig

- Level = 13.04 ft.

"B" CFT

- Pressure = 619 psig

- Level = 12.06 ft.

Which ONE of the following describes the adverse effect of the CFT(s) during a large

LOCA?

CFT "A"

/ CFT "B"

A. may inject nitrogen into the RCS / will dump an inadequate borated water volume.

B. will dump an inadequate volume of borated water / will dump at too low of an RCS

pressure.

C. may inject nitrogen into the RCS / will dump borated water at too high of an RCS

pressure

D. will dump borated water at too low of an RCS pressure / will dump an inadequate

amount of borated water.

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

A) A

A. Correct - "A" CFT pressure is too high >625 psig and will cause the tank to dump

too early and at a higher RCS pressure this will cause nitrogen intrusion into the

RCS. "B" CFT level is too low which will cause inadequate borated volume to refill

the hot spot of the core.

B. Incorrect - "A" CFT has

OK.

C. Incorrect - First part is

procedural limit.

D. Incorrect - "A" CFT will

low. "B" CFT will dump

adequate water volume at 13.04 ft. "B" CFT pressure is

true, Second part incorrect because pressure is within

dump too soon and at too high of an RCS pressure not too

an inadequate amount because level is to low.

K/A: 011EA109 (4.3/4.3)

T1G2, T1G1

Bank

Reference:

Facility updated question bank question 45 PNS051702 PNS051702

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

16. Immediately following actuation of ES channels 7

throttled to approximately:

and 8, each RBS header should be

A. 800

B. 1000

C. 1200

D. 1500

A) D

A.

B.

C.

D.

Incorrect,

Incorrect, Throttle to this number after swap to RBES.

Incorrect,

Correct, per EOP

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

17. Which one of the following combinations will result in ALL CRD motors being

de-energized?

SEE ATTACHMENT: CRD Power Supplies One Line Diagram

A. Primary breaker "A", DC breaker D, and F contactors open. The "A" breaker

de-energizes the "C" DC hold bus, and one set of SCR's to the regulating groups.

The "D" breaker trip de-energizes the other set of regulating group SCRs by

removing their gating POWER.

B. DC breaker, "D", and the "F" contactors open. This scheme de-energizes both DC

hold buses, and both sets of regulation group SCRs by removing their gating

POWER.

C. Primary breaker "B", DC breaker D, and F contactors open. The "B" breaker

de-energizes the "C" DC hold bus, and one set of SCR's to the regulating groups.

The "D" breaker trip de-energizes the other set of regulating group SCRs by

removing their gating SUPPLIES.

D. DC breaker, "D", and the "F" contactors open. This scheme de-energizes both DC

hold buses, and both sets of regulation group SCRs by removing their gating

SUPPLIES.

A) A

REFERENCE REQUIRED: A one line diagram of the CRD groups power supplies.

Reference: Lesson Plans Vol VIII, OP-OC-IC-RPS, page 45 of 56.

EO - 20.2

K/A: 012K201 (3.3/3.7)

RO/SRO: BOTH

Level: C

Author: rfa

z

1;

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

18. Which one of the following is correct concerning the RPS "MANUAL BYPASS"?

A.

Takes both channels out of "MANUAL BYPASS" when the second RPS

channel is placed in "MANUAL BYPASS".

B.

The first RPS channel in "MANUAL BYPASS" will trip the second RPS

channels Reactor Trip Module, if that channel is placed in "MANUAL

BYPASS".

C.

The first RPS channel placed in "MANUAL BYPASS" administratively

prevents placing any additional channels in "MANUAL BYPASS".

D.

The reactor trips if a second RPS channel is placed in "MANUAL BYPASS".

A) C

A. Admin and electrical interlock prevent two channels in bypass at same time see (C.)

B. Admin and electrical interlock prevent two channels in bypass at same time see (C.)

C. CORRECT: this interlock will actuate a relay that will prevent any of the remaining

three channels to be placed in bypass.

D. Admin and electrical interlock prevent two channels in bypass at same time see (C.)

Reference: Vol VIII, RPS

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

19. Which one of the following correctly describes the operation of the LPI Trip Bistable?

A. It allows for manual bypassing when RC pressure is < 900 psig. Once tripped, it

must be manually reset. Its output is fed through an "OR" gate to digitial channels 3

&4.

B. Once tripped, it must be manually reset. The bypass is automatically removed when

RC pressure increases above 550 psig. Its output is fed through an "OR" gate to

digitial channels 3 & 4.

C. It allows for manual bypassing when RC pressure is < 550 psig. The bypass is

automatically removed when RC pressure increases above 900 psig.

D. It will trip if RC pressure decreases below 550 psig unless bypassed. Once tripped,

it must be manually reset.

A) D

Reference: Lesson Plans Vol VIII, OP-OC-IC-ES, page 15 of 33.

EO - 3.1

K/A: 013A301 (3.7/3.9)

RO/SRO: BOTH

Level: C

Author: rfa

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

20. Given the following plant conditions:

- The reactor is shutdown.

- The "HPI BYPASS PERMIT" Stat Alarm is in.

- At 1700 psig, the operator bypasses all three channels for both trains of HPI.

- An RCP seal leak then develops, causing the operator to trip the affected RCP

and increase the plant cooldown rate.

- RCS pressure decreases to 900 psig.

- Reactor Building pressure increases to 3.4 psig

Select the appropriate ES response:

A.

HPI initiates on low RCS pressure due to the RCS leak.

B.

HPI initiates on high reactor building pressure.

C.

LPI initiates on low RCS pressure due to the RCS leak.

D.

RBS initiates on high reactor building pressure.

A) B

A. HPI was bypassed and will not actuate on RCS pressure.

B. CORRECT: HPI will actuate on high RB pressure even if bypassed.

C. LPI will actuate on high RB pressure. The low RCS pressure LPI setpoint is not

actuated at this pressure

D. RBS will not trip at this pressure.

Reference: Lesson Plan, IC-ES: Page 14 and 15

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

21. From the group below, which ONE of the following lists of signals would NOT provide

an initiating logic path to generate a Load Shed signal?

1. ES 1 actuation

2. MFB #1 undervoltage for 23 seconds

3. MFB #2 undervoltage for 22 seconds

4. Breakers NI and El open

5. Startup and normal source undervoltage

6. STAR relay

A. 5and6

B. 2and3

C. 1,2, and 4

D. 1,3, and 6

A) D

A. Incorrect - This path would satisfy the logic for load shed

B. Incorrect - This path would satisfy the logic for load shed via a MFBMP signal

C. Incorrect - This path would satisfy the logic for load shed

D. Correct - MFB #1 would be energized and the logic would not be completed.

Note:

  1. 1 logic path - A, E
  1. 2 logic path - A, B and D
  1. 3 logic path - B and C

K/A: 013K101 (4.2/4.2)

T2G1, T2G1

Bank

Reference:

Facility updated question bank 65 EL050501 EL050501

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

22. Which ONE of the following identifies the rod position indicating (RPI) system selected

on the Control Rod Position Indication Panel for normal monitoring and describe why

this one is selected?

A. ABSOLUTE - allows immediate verification that all control rods are fully inserted on

a reactor trip.

B. ABSOLUTE - allows continuous monitoring of sequence fault conditions during

control rod motion.

C. RELATIVE - allows immediate verification that all control rods are fully inserted on a

reactor trip.

D. RELATIVE-- allows continuous monitoring of sequence fault conditions during

control rod motion.

A) A

A. Correct - API reed switch array provides physical position of rods.

B. Incorrect - Sequence fault monitoring is provided and by RPI.

C. Incorrect - RPI will not respond to rod insertion on reactor trip due to CRD

de-energizing... step motor of RPI will not respond because CRD phases are not

energized.

D. Incorrect - RPI will not respond as indicated in "C" above.

K/A: 014A102 (3.2/3.6)

RO - T2G2

Bank

Reference: Facility updated question bank question 36 IC020601

IC020601

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

23. Following a loss of off site power, what are the indications, if any, that Control Rod

groups 1 through 7 are fully inserted?

A.

The CRD panel is de-energized, there are no indications that CRD groups 1

through 7 are fully inserted.

B.

All in-limit lights on the position indication panel and the diamond control

panel are on.

C.

Only the in-limit lights on the position indication panel are on.

D.

Only the in-limit lights on the diamond control panel are on.

A) B

Reasons:

B. Correct, All lights would be operable.

Reference: Vol V, OP/O/A/1 105/009, Control Rod Drive System

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

24.

Given the following plant conditions:

- A power increase is in progress.

- Group 7 rods are at 50% withdrawn

- Rod 7-4 is stuck at 47% withdrawn.

- PI panel indication is selected to RPI.

Which one of the following would indicate that rod 7-4 is NOT moving?

A.

Individual control rod position indication on PI panel.

B.

Individual control rod position indication on the plant computer.

C.

Control rod group average indication on the plant computer.

D.

Individual control rod position on zone reference indication.

A) D

Reason:

A. & B.

With RPI selected neither the PI panel or plant computer will

indicate actual rod position, only rod position as a function of field

rotation.

C.

The group average cannot determine which particular rod is not moving.

D. CORRECT: the zone reference would show all the other rods at the 50% zone

reference point and rod 7-4 would not have reached the 50 % level.

Reference: Vol VIII, Control Rod Indication

AOP Vol 1, AP/1/A/1700/015

MEM

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

25. Which one of the following is correct following a power supply failure to the NIs?

A. It causes a complete loss of output signal and computer alarms fail high.

B. It causes a complete loss of output signal and statalarms fail in the NO alarm state.

C. It causes a complete loss of output signal and statalarms actuate.

D. Statalarms fail in the NO alarm state and computer alarms fail high.

A) C

Reference: Lesson Plans Vol VIII, OP-OC-IC-NI, page 39 of 41.

EO - 27.1

K/A: 015A201 (3.5/3.9)

RO/SRO: BOTH

Level: M

Author: rfa

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

26. Which one of the following is the correct response for a reactor at 100%

+25% axial power imbalance?

RTP with a

Power at the top of the core is approximately

% and at the bottom it is

%

A. 25/75

B. 75/25

C. 63/37

D. 37/63

A) C

Distractor Analysis:

Improved TS defines Axial Power Imbalance as follows. The power at the top half of the core,

expressed as a percentage of RTP minus the power in the bottom half of the core, expressed

as a percentage of RTP.

Top half minus bottom half = imbalance.

Solution:

a - b = 25%

a + b = 100%

a = 62.5, b = 37.5

Reference: Lesson Plans Vol 2, OP-OC-CP-01 8, page 6 of 22.

EO - 1

K/A: 015A304 (3.3/3.5)

RO/SRO: Common

Level: C

Author: rfa

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

27. Unit 2 conditions:

INITIAL CONDITIONS:

- Reactor power = 45%

CURRENT CONDITIONS:

- Reactor power = 45%

- All RCPs operating

- 2B2 RCP experiences a 9% impeller degradation (instantaneously)

Which ONE of the following is the correct signal the ICS will receive for Tave input?

A. Loop A Tave

B. Loop B Tave

C. Tave is blocked to the ICS

D. An average of Loop A and B Tave

A) D

K/A: 015AK105 (2.7/3.3)

TIG1, T1G1

Bank

Reference:

Facility updated question bank question 53 IC083202 IC083202

ASYMMETRIC ROD RUNBACK LOGIC OP-OC-CRI-5.

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

28. Which one of the following groups of power reduction rates is correct when an

automatic load limit is received?

A. Loss of RC flow - 20%/min, Loss of RCPs - 25%/min, Maximum Runback 20%/min.

B. Loss of FWP - 20%/min, Loss of RC flow - 25%/min, Loss of RCPs - 20%/min.

C. Loss of RC flow - 20%/min, Loss of RCPs - 25%/min, Maximum Runback 25%/min.

D. Loss of FWP - 25%/min, Loss of RC flow - 25%/min, Loss of RCPs - 20%/min.

A) A

Reference: Lesson Plans Book II of II, Vol III, OP-OC-STG-ICS, page 27-28.

EO - 3.2

K/A: 015K105 (3.9/3.9)

RO/SRO: BOTH

Level: M

Author: rfa

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

29. Which one of the following statements is correct concerning the Smart Automatic

Signal Selector (SASS)?

A. If PZR level #1 is selected then the SASS input will be from that selected level

channel and the second SASS input will be from level #3. If level #2 is selected

then the second SASS input defaults to level #1. If level #3 is selected and #3

fails, SASS will automatically select PZR level 2, and the operator will have the

ability to manually select PZR level #1.

B. If PZR level #3 is selected then the SASS input will be from that selected level

channel and the second SASS input will be from level #1. If level #2 is selected

then the second SASS input defaults to level #1. If level #1 is selected and #1 fails,

SASS will automatically select PZR level 3, and the operator will have the ability to

manually select PZR level #2.

C. If PZR level #1 or 2 is selected then the SASS input will be from that selected level

channel and the second SASS input will be from level #3. If level #2 is selected

then the second SASS input defaults to level #1. If level #1 is selected and #1

fails, SASS will automatically select PZR level 2.

D. If PZR level #1 or 2 is selected then the SASS input will be from that selected level

channel and the second SASS input will be from level #3. If level #3 is selected

then the second SASS input defaults to level #1. If level #3 is selected and #3

fails, SASS will automatically select PZR level 1.

A) D

Reference: Lesson Plans Vol VIII, OP-OC-IC-RCI , page 20 of 62.

EO - 3

K/A: 016A301 (2.9/2.9)

RO/SRO: BOTH

Level: C

Author: rfa

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

30. Given the following RCS instruments, during full power operation:

INSTRUMENT

PZR Level Ch 1

RCS Tcold (NR)

PZR Temp

RCS Press (NR)

Which instrument would

automatic TRANSFER?

INITIAL

220

555

648

2155

FINAL (rapid change)

208

557

665

2135

the Smart Auto Signal Selector (SASS) module perform an

PZR Level

RCS Tcold

PZR Temp

RCS Press

CORRECT, Pressurizer

Non SASS controlled.

Non SASS controlled.

Non SASS controlled.

Level is only one SASS controlled.

Reference: Vol. VIII, Instrumentation & Controls, Reactor Coolant Instrumentation

A.

B.

C.

D.

A) A

A.

B.

C.

D.

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

31. Which one of the following is a correct list of RCS pressure indications and a portion of

what they feed?

A. RCS WR Pressure "A" feeds: WR Recorder, pressurizer spray and heaters.

B. RCS WR Pressure "A" feeds: WR Recorder, LPI interlock, and pressurizer heaters.

C. RCS NR Pressure "A" feeds: NR Recorder, pressurizer spray, heaters and PORV.

D. RCS NR Pressure "A" feeds: NR Recorder, pressurizer spray, LPI interlock, and

PORV.

A) C

Reference: Lesson Plans Vol 2, OP-OC-CP-01 2, page 24 of 32.

EO - 22 (OP-OC-lC-RCI, Vol VIII, Page 9 of 62)

K/A: 016K403 (2.8/2.9) ( NNIS Pressure Input to control systems)

RO/SRO: Both

Level: M

Author: rfa

Enclosure 3.39

LDST Pressure Vs. Level (All Units)

OP/O/A/ 108/001

Page 1 of 2

(Instrument Error Included)

LDST Indicated Level (inches)

100

90

80

70

60

50

40

Co

C)

'-4

Co

(A

C.)

'-4

H

Co

A

30

20

10

0

11040261.tcw

Rev. 5

RTR 1/18/01

Enclosure 3.39

OP/O/A/I 108/001

LDST Pressure Vs. Level (All Units)

Page 2 of 2

1. Minimum LDST level when a HPI Pump is operating is 55" OR actions should be take to increase

LDST level > 55". (3)

2.

When HPI Pumps are operating: (3)

2.1

LDST pressure and level should be within limits of "LDST Pressure Vs. Level" curves to

prevent gas from entering HPI Pumps in event of HPI Emergency Injection.

Normal LDST operation pressure should NOT exceed 50 psig.

"* "LDST Pressure Vs. Level" curves are also located on OAC.

2.2

IF LDST pressure CANNOT be maintained Ž_ 0 psig, a LDST vent path must be established.

(1)(2)(3)GWD-19 (LDST VENT) AND (1)(2)(3)GWD-20 (LDST Vent Blk) must be

open.

3. If LDST Pressure Vs. Level is above and to the left of Curve 1, then declare BOTH trains of HPI

INOPERABLE.

3.1

Immediately depressurize LDST below Curve 1.

3.2

Refer to TS 3.0.3 for shutdown requirements.

3.3

Make notifications as required by OMP 1-14 (Notifications).

4.

If LDST Pressure Vs. Level is below and the right of Curve 2, then perform the following:

4.1

Pressurize LDST back into normal operating region of the "LDST Pressure Vs. Level" curve

unless LDST is being depressurized intentionally by an approved procedure.

CAUTION:

If LDST Pressure Vs. Level is below and to the right of curve 2, it may be possible to

draw a vacuum in LDST resulting in HPI Pump damage due to inadequate NPSH. This

could occur even though sufficient LDST level exists.

4.2

Carry a note on the Turnover Sheet to the effect that if a transient occurs which requires

additional HPI flow, immediately open (1)(2)(3)HP-24 and (1)(2)(3)HP-25 to provide an

adequate suction source to HPI Pumps.

LCO Applicability

3.0

3.0 LIMITING CONDITION FOR OPERATION (LCO) APPLICABILITY

LCO 3.0.1

LCOs shall be met during the MODES or other specified conditions in the

Applicability, except as provided in LCO 3.0.2 and LCO 3.0.7.

LCO 3.0.2

Upon discovery of a failure to meet an LCO, the Required Actions of the

associated Conditions shall be met, except as provided in LCO 3.0.5 and

LCO 3.0.6.

If the LCO is met or is no longer applicable prior to expiration of the

specified Completion Time(s), completion of the Required Action(s) is not

required, unless otherwise stated.

LCO 3.0.3

When an LCO is not met and the associated ACTIONS are not met, an

associated ACTION is not provided, or if directed by the associated

ACTIONS, the unit shall be placed in a MODE or other specified

condition in which the LCO is not applicable. Action shall be initiated

within 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> to place the unit, as applicable, in:

a.

MODE 3 within 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br />;

b.

MODE 4 within 18 hours2.083333e-4 days <br />0.005 hours <br />2.97619e-5 weeks <br />6.849e-6 months <br />; and

c.

MODE 5 within 37 hours4.282407e-4 days <br />0.0103 hours <br />6.117725e-5 weeks <br />1.40785e-5 months <br />.

Exceptions to this Specification are stated in the individual Specifications.

Where corrective measures are completed that permit operation in

accordance with the LCO or ACTIONS, completion of the actions

required by LCO 3.0.3 is not required.

LCO 3.0.3 is only applicable in MODES 1, 2, 3, and 4.

LCO 3.0.4

When an LCO is not met, entry into a MODE or other specified condition

in the Applicability shall not be made except when the associated

ACTIONS to be entered permit continued operation in the MODE or other

specified condition in the Applicability for an unlimited period of time.

This Specification shall not prevent changes in MODES or other specified

conditions in the Applicability that are required to comply with ACTIONS

or that are part of a shutdown of the unit.

Amendment Nos. 300, 300, & 300

OCONEE UNITS 1, 2, & 3

3.0-1

LCO Applicability

3.0

3.0 LCO APPLICABILITY

LCO 3.0.4

Exceptions to this Specification are stated in the individual Specifications.

(continued)

LCO 3.0.4 is only applicable for entry into a MODE or other specified

condition in the Applicability in MODES 1, 2, 3, and 4.

LCO 3.0.5

Equipment removed from service or declared inoperable to comply with

ACTIONS may be returned to service under administrative control solely

to perform testing required to demonstrate its OPERABILITY or the

OPERABILITY of other equipment. This is an exception to LCO 3.0.2 for

the system returned to service under administrative control to perform the

testing required to demonstrate OPERABILITY.

LCO 3.0.6

When a supported system LCO is not met solely due to a support system

LCO not being met, the Conditions and Required Actions associated with

this supported system are not required to be entered. Only the support

system LCO ACTIONS are required to be entered. This is an exception

to LCO 3.0.2 for the supported system. In this event, an evaluation shall

be performed in accordance with Specification 5.5.16, "Safety Function

Determination Program (SFDP)." If a loss of safety function is

determined to exist by this program, the appropriate Conditions and

Required Actions of the LCO in which the loss of safety function exists

are required to be entered.

When a support system's Required Action directs a supported system to

be declared inoperable or directs entry into Conditions and Required

Actions for a supported system, the applicable Conditions and Required

Actions shall be entered in accordance with LCO 3.0.2.

LCO 3.0.7

Test Exception LCO 3.1.8 allows specified Technical Specification (TS)

requirements to be changed to permit performance of special tests and

operations. Unless otherwise specified, all other TS requirements remain

unchanged. Compliance with Test Exception LCOs is optional. When a

Test Exception LCO is desired to be met but is not met, the ACTIONS of

the Test Exception LCO shall be met. When a Test Exception LCO is not

desired to be met, entry into a MODE or other specified condition in the

Applicability shall be made in accordance with the other applicable

Specifications.

Amendment Nos. 300, 300, & 300

3.0-2

OCONEE UNITS 1, 2, & 3

HPI

3.5.2

3.5 EMERGENCY CORE COOLING SYSTEMS (ECCS)

3.5.2 High Pressure Injection (HPI)

The

a.

b.

C.

d.

e.

f.

HPI System shall be OPERABLE with:

Two HPI trains OPERABLE;

An additional HPI pump OPERABLE;

Two LPI-HPI flow paths OPERABLE;

Two HPI discharge crossover valves OPERABLE;

HPI suction headers cross-connected; and

HPI discharge headers separated.

APPLICABILITY:

MODES 1 and 2,

MODE 3 with Reactor Coolant System (RCS) temperature

> 3500F.

ACTIONS

CONDITION

REQUIRED ACTION

COMPLETION TIME

A.

One HPI pump

A.1

Restore HPI pump to

72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br />

inoperable.

OPERABLE status.

OR

AND

One or more HPI

A.2

Restore HPI discharge

72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br />

discharge crossover

crossover valve(s) to

valve(s) inoperable.

OPERABLE status.

(continued)

Amendment Nos. 314, 314, & 314 1

LCO 3.5.2

OCONEE UNITS 1, 2, & 3

3.5.2-1

HPI

3.5.2

ACTIONS (continued)

CONDITION

REQUIRED ACTION

COMPLETION TIME

B.

Required Action and

B.1

Reduce THERMAL

12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br />

associated

POWER to 5 75% RTP.

Completion Time of

Condition A not met.

AND

B.2

Verify by administrative

12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br />

means that the ADV

flow path for each

steam generator is

OPERABLE.

AND

B.3

Restore HPI pump to

30 days from initial entry

OPERABLE status.

into Condition A

AND

B.4

Restore HPI discharge

30 days from initial entry

crossover valve(s) to

into Condition A

OPERABLE status.

(continued)

Amendment Nos. 314, 314, & 314 1

3.5.2-2

OCONEE UNITS 1, 2, & 3

HPI

3.5.2

ACTIONS (continued)

CONDITION

REQUIRED ACTION

I

COMPLETION TIME

C.

One HPI train

inoperable.

C.1

-NOTE

Only required when

inoperable HPI train is

incapable of automatic

actuation and incapable

of actuation through

remote manual

alignment.

Reduce THERMAL

POWER to *75% RTP.

AND

-.

NOTE

Only required when

THERMAL POWER

< 75% RTP.

Verify by administrative

means that the ADV

flow path for each

steam generator is

OPERABLE.

AND

C.3

Restore HPI train to

OPERABLE status.

3 hours3.472222e-5 days <br />8.333333e-4 hours <br />4.960317e-6 weeks <br />1.1415e-6 months <br />

3 hours3.472222e-5 days <br />8.333333e-4 hours <br />4.960317e-6 weeks <br />1.1415e-6 months <br />

72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br />

D.

HPI suction headers

D.1

Cross-connect HPI

72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br />

not cross-connected.

suction headers.

E.

HPI discharge

E.1

Hydraulically separate

72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br />

headers cross-

HPI discharge headers.

connected.

(continued)

Amendment Nos. 314, 314, & 314 1

C.2

OCONEE UNITS 1, 2, & 3

3.5.2-3

HPI

3.5.2

ACTIONS

(continued)

CONDITION

REQUIRED ACTION

COMPLETION TIME

F.

One LPI-HPI flow

F.1

Restore LPI-HPI flow

72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br />

path inoperable,

path to OPERABLE

status.

G.

Required Action and

G.1

Be in MODE 3.

12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br />

associated

Completion Time of

AND

Condition B, C, D, E,

or F not met.

G.2

Reduce RCS

60 hours6.944444e-4 days <br />0.0167 hours <br />9.920635e-5 weeks <br />2.283e-5 months <br />

temperature to < 3500F.

H.

Two HPI trains

H.1

Enter LCO 3.0.3.

Immediately

inoperable.

OR

Two LPI-HPI flow

paths inoperable.

SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS

SURVEILLANCE

FREQUENCY

SR 3.5.2.1

Verify each HPI manual and non-automatic

31 days

power operated valve in the flow path, that is

not locked, sealed, or otherwise secured in

position, is in the correct position.

SR 3.5.2.2

--

--

NOTE

Not applicable to operating HPI pump(s).

Vent each HPI pump casing.

31 days

(continued)

Amendment Nos. 314, 314, & 314 1

OCONEE UNITS 1, 2, & 3

3.5.2-4

HPI

3.5.2

SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS

(continued)

SURVEILLANCE

FREQUENCY

SR 3.5.2.3

Verify each HPI pump's developed head at the

In accordance with the

test flow point is greater than or equal to the

Inservice Testing Program

required developed head.

SR 3.5.2.4

Verify each HPI automatic valve in the flow

18 months

path that is not locked, sealed, or otherwise

secured in position, actuates to the correct

position on an actual or simulated actuation

signal.

SR 3.5.2.5

Verify each HPI pump starts automatically on

18 months

an actual or simulated actuation signal.

SR 3.5.2.6

Verify, by visual inspection, each HPI train

18 months

reactor building sump suction inlet is not

restricted by debris and suction inlet trash

racks and screens show no evidence of

structural distress or abnormal corrosion.

SR 3.5.2.7

Cycle each HPI discharge crossover valve and

18 months

LPI-HPI flow path discharge valve.

Amendment Nos. 314, 314, & 314 I

OCONEE UNITS 1, 2, & 3

3.5.2-5

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

34. An electrical fault has resulted in 1TC 4160 switch gear being de-energized.

Which of the following components will be unavailable as a result of this malfunction?

A.

Reactor Building Cooling Unit "IA"

B.

CC Pumps 1A and 1B

C.

Inverter 1KVID

D.

The unit 1 Turning Gear Oil Pump

A) A

Reasons:

A.

Correct Answer: Reactor Building Cooling Unit "A" is powered from TC

4160 SG and would be lost if this component is de-energized.

B.

1A1 RCP is not powered from containment cooling fan power suppies.

C.

Inverter KVID is not dependent on a single power supply and does not

receive power from TC.

D.

The Turning Gear Oil Pump is not powered from TC.

OC Reference: LP Book I of II, Vol 2, OP-OC-STG-CCW

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

35. Which one of the following is the correct purpose/purposes for installing the LP-1 9

flange for RCS drain down on Unit 1?

A. Must be done ONLY for a refueling outage; The flange is NOT required to be on

prior to draining < 100 inches.

B. Must be done for every drain down prior to draining < 100 inches; Provides for a

backup decay heat drop line.

C. Must be done ONLY for a refueling outage; Provides for a backup decay heat drop

line.

D. It is ONLY required for refueling outages since other outages are considered "short

term."

A) B

Reference: Lesson Plans Vol 2, OP-OC-CP-RCD, page 20 of 39.

EO - 12

K/A:

025AK301 (3.1/3.4)

G2.2.27 (2.6/3.5)

RO/SRO: Both

Level: M

Author: rfa

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

36. Which one of the following statements, regarding the Unit 1 RBS

when RB pressure reaches 10 psig?

A. ES channels

and "B" RBS

open signal.

7 & 8 actuate causing ALL RBS pumps to start,

HEADER RB ISOLATION) open, 1LP-21 AND 1

system, is correct

1 BS-1 and 1 BS-2 ("A"

LP-22 receive an

B. ES channels 5 & 6 actuate causing ALL RBS pumps to start, 1BS-11 and 1BS-16

("A" and "B" RBS DISCHARGE CHECK) open, 1LP-21 AND 1LP-22 ("A" and "B"

LPI BWST SUCTION) receive an open signal.

C. ES channels 7 & 8 actuate causing ONLY ONE RBS pump to start, 1BS-1 and

1BS-2 will open ("A" and "B" RBS HEADER RB ISOLATION), 1LP-21 AND 1LP-22

("A" and "B" LPI BWST SUCTION) will receive an open signal.

D. ES channels 5 & 6 actuate causing ONLY ONE RBS pump to start, 1 BS-1 1 and

1BS-16 ("A" and "B" RBS DISCHARGE CHECK) will open, 1LP-21 and 1LP-22

("A" and "B" LPI BWST SUCTION) will receive an open signal, but will NOT open.

A) A

K/A: 026A301 (4.3/4.5)

EO: 10

Reference: Vol IV, OP-OC-PNS-BS, Page 14 of 14.

Author: RFA

Distractor Analysis:

At 10 psig RB pressure, ES channels 7 and 8 actuate, All RBS pumps start, BS-1 and

BS-2 open, LP-21 and LP-22 receive an open signal.

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

37. Unit I conditions:

- Reactor power = 100%

- IA/AIA system pressure decreases to 85 psig and stabilizes

- RED OPEN light ON for 1CC-8 on ES RZ module

- Statalarms actuated:

1SA-9/B1 CC CRD RETURN FLOW LOW

1SA-9/C1 CC COMP COOLING RETURN FLOW LOW

- CC Pump status:

1A CC Pump switch ON - RED light OFF / GREEN light illuminated

1 B CC Pump switch AUTO - RED light OFF / GREEN light illuminated

Which ONE of the following describes the correct operator action to restore operation

of the CC system at this time, if possible?

A. Dispatch an NLO to manually open 1CC-8.

B. Reopen 1CC-8 from the ES Channel 6 RZ Module.

C. Manually start the 1 B CC Pump by placing the switch to ON.

D. CC cannot be restored, manually trip the reactor and all RC Pumps.

A) C

A - Incorrect - CC-8 closes < 80 psig IA pressure. The valve is open pe rthe ES RZ

module indication.

B. Incorrect - CC-8 is normally operated from the ES Channel 6 RZ Module but the

valve should be open at IA pressure of 90 psig.

C. Correct - IA pressure is not low enough (>80 psig) to fail CC-8 closed so the

automatic start circuitry has failed and requires the operator to manually start the

standby CC pump.

D. Incorrect - This would be correct if CC-8 was failed shut and could not be manually

reopened locally by an NLO and a loss of HPI seal injection occurred.

K/A: 026G2.1.7 (3.7/4.4)

TIG1, T1G1

Bank

Reference:

Facility updated question bank 37 PNS021702 PNS021702

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

38. Unit I plant conditions:

INITIAL CONDITIONS:

- Reactor Power = 100%

- SASS is DEENERGIZED

- PZR LEVEL #2 selected on UB1

CURRENT CONDITIONS:

- PZR TEMPERATURE "A" indicates 1207F

- PZR TEMPERATURE "B" indicates 645°F

Which ONE of the following describes the effects on the RCS makeup system and

RCS volume?

MAKEUP FLOW

ACTUAL PZR LEVEL

A.

Increases

Increases

B.

Decreases

Increases

C.

Increases

Decreases

D.

Decreases

Decreases

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

A) A

A. Correct - PZR Level #2 fed by Temp compensation RTD "A" As PZR

temperature

compensation fails low this decreases indicated PZR level. As indicated PZR level

decreases an error between indicated controlling level vs. setpoint on HP-1 20 controller

is developed causing HP-120 to open and try

to raise level to setpoint. As HP-120 opens MAKEUP FLOW will increase causing

actual PZR LEVEL RCS inventory to increase.

B. Incorrect

C. Incorrect

D. Incorrect

K/A: 027AA201 (3.4/3.8)

T1G1, T1G2

Bank

Reference:

Facility updated question bank 10 IC051 IC051

NRC DB95 (IC-RCI p21-23) Objective 10,11, and 13

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

39. Unit 3 Conditons:

- Reactor power = 100%

- Pressurizer (PZR) Level Instrument #1 selected for control.

- 3HP-120 (RC Volume Control) in AUTOMATIC.

- SASS in MANUAL

Which ONE of the following describes the Pressurizer level indication response and

3HP-120 (RC Volume Control) response following an internal failure of ICCM Train

"3A"?

A. PZR level indication fails low, 3HP-120 fully opens and both PZR level High/Low

statalarms actuate.

B. PZR level indication fails as is, 3HP-120 controls level as demanded by the failed

instrument and the PZR level Emergency High/Low statalarm is inoperable.

C. PZR level indication swaps to Instrument #2, 3HP-120 controls level at setpoint and

the PZR level Emergency High/Low statalarm remains operable.

D. PZR level indication swaps to Instrument #3, 3HP-120 controls level at setpoint and

the PZR level Emergency High/Low statalarm remains operable.

A) B

A. Incorrect - would be correct for power failure to ICCM train with SASS in automatic.

B. Correct - SASS will not detect failure as output from ICCM train has not changed

C. Incorrect - SASS selects operable Pzr level signal in opposite ICCM train.

D. Incorrect - SASS will not detect failure and will not select PZR level #3 following a

ICCM Train A internal failure.

K/A: 027AK203 (2.6/2.8)

T1G1, T1G2

Bank

Reference:

Facility updated question bank 32 PNS143501

PNS143501

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

40. Which one of the following parameters is controlled to limit the

RB atmosphere following a LOCA?

amount of iodine in the

The volume of galvanized metal inside containment.

The volume of aluminum inside containment.

The pH of the RB sump.

The temperature of the RB atmosphere.

This parameter is limited to reduce the amount of post-LOCA hydrogen

and does not affect iodine in the RB atmosphere.

This parameter is limited to reduce the amount of post-LOCA hydrogen

and does not affect iodine in the RB atmosphere.

Correct Answer. TSP baskets inside containment adjust the pH of the

RB sump to between 7.0 and 11.0. This range of pH creates non-volatile

iodine and limits the amount of iodine in the RB atmosphere.

RB spray limits containment pressure by spraying liquid into the steam

atmosphere but any reduction of RB temperature is a byproduct of this

pressure reduction and not intended to limit iodine in the RB

atmosphere.

Reference: Vol IV, RB Spray

A.

B.

C.

D.

A) C

Reasons:

A.

B.

C.

D.

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

41. Given the following plant conditions:

- 100% power

The following events occur:

- Both MFW pumps trip

The following alarms are actuated:

- EFW actuated

- DSS channel trip

- Main turbine trip

- AMSAC trip

Control rod groups 5, 6, and 7 rods indicate fully inserted.

NO OPERATOR ACTIONS HAVE OCCURRED

Which of the following describes the status of the CRD Diamond panel trip confirm

light, and the breaker trip lights on the RPS cabinets?

A.

Trip confirm : LIT

Breaker trip lights : DIM

B.

Trip confirm : OFF

Breaker trip lights : BRIGHT

C.

Trip confirm : LIT

Breaker trip lights : BRIGHT

D.

Trip confirm: OFF

Breaker trip lights : DIM

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

A) D

A. RPS failed, no trip confirm because CRD breakers did

5,6,7 rods. NO operator actions means no manual trip

B. RPS failed, no trip confirm because CRD breakers did

5,6,7 rods. NO operator actions means no manual trip

C. RPS failed, no trip confirm because CRD breakers did

5,6,7 rods. NO operator actions means no manual trip

not open, DSS tripped the groups

not open, DSS tripped the groups

not open, DSS tripped the groups

D. CORRECT: RPS failed therefore no breakers tripped and no trip confirm, DSS tripped the

rods however, the reactor did not trip from RPS.

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

42. Which one of the following is correct if SCMs equal 00F during an ATWS event?

RCPs should not be tripped during an ATWS until power is less than or equal to:

A. 5% to provide flow through the core for heat removal.

B. 5% to provide pressure control through the spray valve.

C. 1% to provide flow through the core for heat removal.

D. 1% to provide pressure control through the spray valve.

A) C

Reference: Book II of II, Vol 6, OP-OC-EAP-UNPP, page 7 of 19.

EO-4

K/A: 029EK312 (4.4/4.7)

RO/SRO: Both

Level: M

Author: rfa

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

43. Refueling is in progress with eight (8) fuel assemblies in the core. As the ninth

assembly is being placed in the core the following NI readings are observed:

- NI-1 increases from a base count of 203 to 430 cps.

- NI-4 increases from a base count of 250 to 480 cps.

- NI-2 and NI-3 are out-of-service.

Which one of the following actions, if any, should be taken?

A.

No action is required, this is an expected NI response.

B.

Continue inserting assembly, reactor engineering should be contacted to

perform a subcritical multiplication.

C.

Cease insertion of the fuel assembly and notify the Refueling SRO to

perform an evaluation.

D.

Withdraw the fuel assembly, reactor engineering should be contacted to

perform a subcritical multiplication.

A) C

A. An action is required, count rate has increased by more than 1.5 times. This is an

unexpected change of Netron Flus countrate. The correct response is to suspend refueling

and perform an evaluation.

B. The assembly should not be placed into the core. Refuel ing should stop.

C. Correct, The fuel movement should stop and an evaluation performed.

D. The fuel movement should stop and an evaluation performed.

Reference: OP/1/N1 502/007, Step 2.13, page 4 of 6.

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

44. Which one of the following states when the potential reactivity effects of a steam line

break, with the ICS in manual are most severe and why?

Beginning of core life because this results

reactivity addition.

Beginning of core life because this results

reactivity addition.

End of core life because this results in the

addition.

End of core life because this results in the

addition.

in the maximum negative

in the maximum positive

maximum negative reactivity

maximum positive reactivity

As the core ages MTC becomes increasingly more negative. A steam line break results in a

cooldown of the RCS and MTC adds positive reactivity as this occurs. Because MTC has a

larger negative value as the core ages, the effect of the steam line break gets greater also.

Reference: Vol VII, Plant Transient Response

Vol III, Bk 2 of 2, OTSG

A.

B.

C.

D.

A) D

Reasons:

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

45. Which one of the following set of consequences will happen if the Moore controllers for

MS-1 12/173, Second Stage Reheater (SSRH) Control, lose power.?

A. MS-1 12/173 will go to the closed position and upon regaining of power will re-open

if power is _> 75%. MS-77, 78, 80, 81 (MS to MSRH) will receive an open signal but

will not open until power is 2! 75%. MS-77, 78, 80, 81 will close if in automatic and

power is _< 1% when power is restored to MS-1 12/173.

B. MS-1 12/173 will go to the closed position. MS-77, 78, 80, 81 (MS to MSRH) will

receive an open signal AND will open in automatic if turbine load is _> 1%. MS-77,

78, 80, 81 will remain open if power is _>75% when power is restored to

MS-1 12/173.

C. MS-1 12/173 will go to the closed position AND remain closed even if power is

restored. MS-77, 78, 80, 81 (MS to MSRH) will receive an open signal AND will

open in automatic if turbine load is >_ 75%. MS-77, 78, 80, 81 will remain open if

power is < 75% when power is restored to MS-1 12/173.

D. MS-1 12/173 will go to the closed position and upon regaining of power will re-open

if power is >_ 1%. MS-77, 78, 80, 81 (MS to MSRH) will receive an open signal AND

will open in automatic if turbine load is _> 1%. MS-77, 78, 80, 81 will remain open if

power is < 75% when power is restored to MS-1 12/173.

A) B

Reference: Lesson Plans Book II of II, Vol III, OP-OC-STG-MSR , page 17 of 33.

EO - 10

K/A: 039A302 (3.1/3.5)

RO/SRO: BOTH

Level: C

Author: rfa

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

46. Which of the following is available on

the main feedwater pump turbine?

the main control board (1 UB1 bench board) for

Control valve position.

First stage pressure.

Steam pressure (chest).

Stop valve position.

A.

B.

C.

D.

Main Turbine indication

Main Turbine indication

Main Turbine indication

CORRECT:

in

in

in

control room, NOT MFW turbine.

control room, NOT MFW turbine.

control room, NOT MFW turbine.

Reference: Vol III, Bk 2 of 2, ICS

MEM

A.

B.

C.

D.

A) D

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

47. Unit 2 plant conditions:

- ONE train of MSLB isolation circuit is disabled

- 2A Main Steam line break occurs

Which one of the following is correct?

A. The TDEFDWP will start if in AUTO.

B. The FDW Control Valves will close if in MANUAL.

C. The FDW Control Valves will fail "as is".

D. MSLB circuitry will NOT trip the Main FDW Pumps.

A) B

Reference: Book II of II, Vol 6, OP-OC-EAP-HPICD, page 13 of 36.

EO-4

K/A: 040AK302 (4.4/4.4) [assuming AFW initiation is synonymous with ESFAS initiation]

RO/SRO: Both

Level: C

Author: rfa

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

48. Unit 3 plant conditions:

Power level = 100%

ICS is in AUTOMATIC

"B" TBVs fail FULL OPEN

ASSUMING the unit does not trip and ICS remains in AUTO, which ONE of the

following predicts the final stabilized response of Reactor power, Tave, and MWe?

Reactor power will _

, Tave will __ , and MWe will __

A. increase / decrease / decrease

B. increase / decrease / remain constant

C. remain constant / decrease / remain constant

D. remain constant / remain constant / decrease

A) D

A. Incorrect, Power and Tave will return to previous value, MW will decrease.

B. Incorrect, Power increase and Tave decrease would occur if ICS in manual.

C. Incorrect, Power remains constant, Tave will does not decrease.

D. Correct, Power remains constant due to CTP demand remaining at 100%. MSCVs

close to maintain THP resulting in decrease of steam to turbine to compensate for TBV

flow. Tave is maintained by reactor control in auto with MWe decreasing.

K/A: 041 K302 (3.8/3.9)

RO - T2G3

Bank

Reference:

Facility updated question bank STG120801

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

49. Which one of the following statements is correct regarding the turbine power/load

unbalance (PLU) circuit?

The PLU circuit will NOT generate...

A. a reactor trip until the turbine is at approximately 110.00% of rated speed.

B. a reactor trip until the turbine is at approximately 111.25% of rated speed.

C. a reactor trip until turbine speed is above 100 RPM and BOTH speed signals are

lost.

D. an automatic reactor trip signal.

A) D

Reference: Book I of II, Vol 2, OP-OC-STG-EHC, page 13 & 14 of 30.

EO - 8

K/A: 045K1 20 (3.4/3.6) Considering the PLU circuit as a protection system

RO/SRO: Both

Level: M

Author: rfa

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

50. Unit 3 plant conditions:

- 3A & 3B Main FDW pumps have tripped

- ALL EFWPs have started with 200 gpm EFW flow to each SG

- 3FDW-315 & 316 (3A and 3B OTSG EFW Flow Control Valves) in manual

- 3A and 3B SG levels = 33" XSUR and stable

- 3A Main Feedwater pump is reset

- 3A Main Feedwater pump hydraulic oil pressure = 115 psig

- 3A MFW Pump discharge pressure = 670 psig

Which ONE of the following is correct?

If 3FDW-315 & 316 are placed in Automatic, then 3FDW 315 & 316 will...

A. be controlled by the Manual Loader signal.

B. close and stay closed until SG level decreases below 25" on SU level.

C. close and stay closed until SG level decreases below 30".

D. close and stay closed until the SG Dryout Protection circuit places 3FDW-315 &

316 on Auto Level Control.

A) C

A- No automatic is controlling signal to valves

B - No 25" on SU is control level for MFDW

C - Correct

D- No - on automatic level control when automatic is selected

K/A: 054AA202 (4.1/4.4)

T1G2, TIG2

Bank

Reference: Facility updated question bank question 17 CF023203 CF023203

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

51. Which one of the following set of RCS parameters is correct if the operator is

maintaining RCS P/T stable as MS pressure decreases during a Station Blackout?

RCS Temperature will

__

as decay heat load decreases over time following the

initiating event. To combat this, the operator would

__

on either the TBVs or ADVs.

A. remain the same; throttle close

B. remain the same; throttle open

C. decrease; throttle open

D. decrease; throttle close

A) D

Distractor analysis:

If the operator is maintaining RCS P/T stable, as MS pressure decreases, RCS temperature

would attempt to decrease. This would begin to occur as decay heat load decreased over time

following the initiating event. To combat this the operator would close down on either TBVs or

ADVs (depending on which was being used). Once the Pressure Control Valves were fully

closed, additional decreases in decay heat load would result in a decreasing MS pressure and

decreasing RCS temperature and pressure. Once this condition is reached it becomes

necessary to throttle EFDW flow to the SG's to control RCS temperature. This will likely result

in a decrease in SG levels as well.

Reference: Book II of II, Vol 6, OP-OC-EAP-BO, page 8 of 50.

EO-4

K/A: 055EA202 (4.4/4.6)

RO/SRO: Both

Level: C

Author: rfa

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

52. Which one of the following is correct concerning CCW siphon flow during a loss of

offsite power?

A. The first siphon takes a suction from the condenser inlet piping, supplies flow

through the condenser, and discharges to the Keowee Hydro tailrace. The high

point that this first siphon must overcome is the discharge of the CCW Pumps.

B. The second siphon takes a suction from the condenser inlet piping, supplies flow

through the condenser and discharges to the Keowee Hydro tailrace. The high

point that the second siphon must overcome is just down stream of the condenser.

C. The first siphon takes suction from the CCW intake canal and supplies flow to the

CCW crossover header where the LPSW system takes its suction. The high point

that the first siphon must overcome is just down stream of the condenser.

D. The second siphon takes suction from the CCW intake canal and supplies flow to

the CCW crossover header where the LPSW system takes its suction. The high

point that this second siphon must overcome is the discharge of the CCW Pumps.

A) B

Distractor Analysis:

The first siphon takes suction from the CCW intake canal and supplies flow to the CCW

crossover header where the LPSW system takes its suction. The high point that this second

siphon must overcome is the discharge of the CCW Pumps.

The second siphon takes a suction from the condenser inlet piping, supplies flow through the

condenser and discharges to the Keowee Hydro tailrace. The high point that the second

siphon must overcome is just down stream of the condenser.

Reference: Book I of II, Vol 2, OP-OC-STG-CCW, page 20 of 39.

EO - 11

K/A: A07AK21 (3.7/3.5)

RO/SRO: Both

Level: C

Author: rfa

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

53. Plant conditions:

INITIAL CONDITIONS:

- ONS Units 1 and 2 are operating at 100% power

- ONS Unit 3 MFB's are powered by Central Switchyard via CT-5

- Keowee Unit 1 is generating to the grid @ 40 MWe

CURRENT CONDITIONS:

- ONS Unit 2 has a LOCA/LOOP resulting in PROPER actuation of ES Channels

1-6

After power has been regained to ONS Unit 2 MFB's, which ONE of the following

statements is correct?

Assume NO operator action

A. 2C LPIP may be started immediately.

B. 2C LPIP may be started after 30 seconds.

C. 2X5 will Load Shed, re-energizing in 30 seconds.

D. 2X5 will NOT Load Shed and will remain energized.

A) D

A & B incorrect - LPIP C cannot be started during a Ioadshed

LPIP are not running.

C. Incorrect - See D explanation.

unless either "A" or "B"

D. Correct - 2X5 wIl not load shed upon ES even if at least 1 of the SL breakers is

closed.

K/A: 056AA254 (2.9/3.0)

T1G3, T1 G3

Bank

Reference:

Facility updated question bank 26

EL050601

EL050601

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

54. Which one of the following trip the condensate booster pump?

A. FDWP suction pressure drops to * 360 psig and the associated FDWP suction

valve is open.

B. FDWPT bearing oil pressure < 4 psig AND the associated FDWP discharge valve is

open.

C. A CBP suction or discharge valve is moved from full open position to 50%.

D. The discharge header pressure on both MFDWPs is < 770 psig.

A) C

Reference: Lesson Plans Vol X, OP-OC-CF-C, page 36 of 58.

EO - 24

K/A:056K419 (1.9/1.9)

RO/SRO: BOTH

Level: M

Author: rfa

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

55. Which ONE of the following describes how the Reactor Operator is initially alerted to a

trip of C-61 (COND COOLER BYPASS CONTROL) and the resulting plant response

following the trip?

C-61 tripped...

A. statalarm / Generator field and stator winding temperatures decreasing

B. OAC Alarm / Generator field and stator winding temperatures decreasing.

C. statalarm / Generator field and stator winding temperatures increasing

D. OAC Alarm / Generator field and stator winding temperatures increasing

A) D

A. incorrect, No statalarm available and field and stator winding temperatures will

increase.

B. incorrect, OAC alarm will actuate but field and stator winding temperatures will

increase, as described in "A" above.

C. incorrect, field and stator winding temperatures will increase but there is no

statalarm. increase as stated in "C" above.

D: correct, OAC alarm that C-61 has tripped open and field and stator temperatures will

increase due to decreased cooling flow through the Hydrogen coolers.

ONSW Bank question: CF127

Reference: Book I of II, Vol 2, OP-OC-STG-FHS, page 14 & 20 of 27.

EO - 18, 19

K/A: 056K603 (1.4/1.5)

RO/SRO: Both

Level: M

Author: rfa

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

56. Unit 2 plant conditions:

- A loss of power to MCC 2XO has occurred

- Regulated Power panelboards (2KRAI2KRB) are being supplied by SOURCE 2

(Motor Control Center (MCC) 2XP)

Which ONE of the following will occur if Unit 2 experiences a loss of power to MCC

2XP?

A. 2KRA/2KRB will become de-energized.

B. Any Vital Bus Inverter on "AC Line" will swap to "Inverter".

C. The Isolating Diodes output will be supplied by their backup source.

D. 2KRA/2KRB will be supplied from the I&C Batteries until power is restored from

MCC 2XO or 2XP.

A) A

A.Correct

B.Incorrect - Vital bus inverters do not have an auto swap feature.

C.Incorrect - The statement is false. A loss of 2XO/2XP has no affect on Battery

Charger operation. Isolating Diode output would be from their normal source, the

Battery Charger.

D.Incorrect - KRA/KRB do not have battery backup.

K/A: 057AA106 (3.5/3.5)

T1G1, T1G1

Bank

Reference:

Facility updated question bank 18 EL070901

EL070901

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

57. Unit 1's DCA Bus has been inadvertently de-energized. Which ONE of the following

correctly describes the status of 1 KI (ICS) Inverter?

1 KI (ICS) Inverter is automatically supplied from ....

A. the AC Line.

B. the 1 CA battery.

C. the I DCB bus via isolating diodes.

D. an alternate unit via isolating diodes.

A) C

K/A: 058AA101 (3.4/3.5)

T1G2, T1G2

Bank

Reference:

Facility updated question bank 27 EL262 EL2621

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

58. Which one of the following is correct concerning this system and the closing of the

FDW valves during an MSLB?

A. The FDW control valves can be in AUTO or MANUAL for the system to operate. If

instrument air is lost, the FDW control valves will fail "as is."

B. The FDW control valves must be in AUTO for the system to operate. The auto-start

feature of the TDEFW pump is inhibited.

C. The FDW block valves can be in AUTO or MANUAL for the system to operate. The

auto-start feature of the TDEFW pump is inhibited.

D. The FDW block valves must be in AUTO for the system to operate. If instrument air

is lost, the FDW block valves will fail closed.

A) A

Reference: Lesson Plans Vol X, OP-OC-CF-FDW , page 29 of 33.

EO- 16 and 17

K/A:059A306 (3.2/3.3)

RO/SRO: BOTH

Level: C (must understand new modification logic)

Author: rfa

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

59. Plant conditions:

Reactor power = 80%

ICS SG Master in MANUAL

ICS Turbine Master in MANUAL

All other ICS stations are in AUTO

A 50 psi INCREASE in Main Steam Pressure occurs

Which ONE of the following is correct?

ICS Main Feedwater Pump speed will initially...

A.

increase due to the resulting Turbine Header Pressure error signal.

B.

decrease due to the resulting Turbine Header Pressure error signal.

C.

increase and FDW valves would initially throttle in the open direction.

D.

decrease and FDW valves would initially throttle in the closed direction.

A) C

A. Incorrect: THP error is blocked by the SG master in Hand.

B. Incorrect: THP error is blocked by the SG master in Hand.

C. Correct: FDW valve DP would decrease causing FDWP demand to increase. FDW

valves open due to increase in flow as SG pressure decreased.

D. Incorrect: FDW valve DP decreases causing the FDWPs demand to increase.

Valves throttle open due to decreased flow with higher SG pressure

OC Reference: AP/1/A/1700/028, ICS Instrument Failures

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

60. Unit 1 conditions:

  • Mode 3
  • RCS Average Temperature = 4850F

switches selected to AUTO 1

Which ONE of the following conditions will initiate

MDEFDWPs?

(MDEFDWP) "IA" and "1B" control

an automatic start of the

A. BOTH channels of AMSAC actuate

B. BOTH "B" SG XSUR levels = 20" for 40 seconds

C. Hydraulic oil pressure = 0 psig on the operating MFDWP

D. Low MFDWP discharge pressure on the operating MFDWP

A) B

A. INCORRECT - AUTO 2 function

B. CORRECT - Dry-Out protection is signaled from the AUTO 1 position. BOTH XSUR

level indications < 21" for > 30 seconds starts both MDEFWPs.

C. INCORRECT - AUTO 2 function, both Main FDW Pumps would not be operating at

this temperature.

D. INCORRECT - AUTO 2 function, both Main FDW Pumps would not be operating at

this temperature.

Reference: Lesson Plans Vol X, OP-OC-CF-EFW , page 23 of 46.

EO - 24

K/A:061 K402 (4.5/4.6)

RO/SRO: BOTH

Level: C (must understand Auto 1/Auto2 logic)

Author: rfa

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

61. Plant conditions:

- Keowee Unit #2 is supplying ONS Unit 1, 2, 3 via the CT-4

- CT-4 cooling fans and oil pumps operating as required

Which ONE of the following CT-4 parameters indicate that the 22.4 MVA transformer

rating on CT-4 has been exceeded?

MEGAWATTS =

/ MEGAVARS=

SEE ATTACHMENT AP/11: Encl. 5.1A (CT-4 overload limits)

A. 18 / 11

B. 11 / 16

C. 14.5 / 16

D. 18 / 14.5

A) D

A. Incorrect - This combination does not exceed the 112% line on the curve. The

combination exceeds the 100% curve (20.6 MVA)

B. Incorrect - This combination does not exceed the 112% line on the curve. The

combination exceeds the 100% curve (20.6 MVA)

C. Incorrect - This combination does not exceed the 100% or 112% line on the curve

D. Correct - This combination exceeds the 112% line on the curve

Attachment required: AP/11, encl. 5.1a (CT-4 overload limits)

K/A: 062A101 (3.4/3.8)

T2G2, T2G2

Bank

Reference:

Facility updated question bank 62 EL041201

EL041201

Enclosure 5.1A

CT-4 Overload Limits

AP/1/A/1700/011

Page 1 of 1

ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE

RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED

I

I

CAUTION

CT-4 is NOT designed for loads > 112%. Under extreme emergency conditions, 112% MVA limit

may be exceeded. Maximum transformer oil and winding limits should NEVER be exceeded. j

1.

_IAAT

either of the following computer

points exceed the maximum limit:

SComputer Pt.

Maximum

OIA0835

130 0C

O1A0836

130°C

THEN take immediate action to reduce

the load on CT-4.

2.

Verify both of the following available:

CT-4 MEGA WATTS

CT-4 MEGA VARS

Use Unit 1 Switchyard Mimic board

AC KILOAMPERES to determine

transformer limits:

  • 0.50 AC KILOAMPERES Incoming

(100%)

  • 0.60 AC KILOAMPERES Incoming

(100%)

  • 0.93 AC KILOAMPERES Incoming

(112%)

I

NOTE

The following statalarms may provide early warning that transformer limits are being approached:

"* SA-18/B-4 (TRANSFORMER CT-4 OIL TEMPERATURE HIGH) (90°C)

"* SA-18/C-4 (TRANSFORMER CT-4 WINDING TEMP HIGH) (1 170C)

I

I

Enclosure 5.IA

CT-4 Overload Limits

AP/1/A/1700/011

Page 3 of 3

ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE

RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED

3.

-Maintain CT-4 within the limits of

Figure 1.

FIGURE 1

MEGAWATTS

[]

Fal

4.

-I

AA..Zý'I

UItkt't.LVLS

.7

.*fl

.

THEN EXIT this enclosure.

C',

NC

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

62. Which ONE of the following actions is REQUIRED per SLC 16.11-3, if 1 RIA-35 (Low

Pressure Service Water) fails low and is declared inoperable with Unit 1 operating at

100% power?

SEE ATTACHMENT: SLC 16.11-3 (Radioactive Effluent Monitoring)

A. Release may continue, provided that grab samples are taken every eight (8) hours

and analyzed within twenty-four (24) hours.

B. Release may continue, provided that grab samples are taken and analyzed

immediately and every twelve (12) hours thereafter.

C. Explain inoperability in next Semiannual Radioactive Effluent Release Report.

D. Submit a work request for repair using the normal scheduling process.

A) B

Required Attachment: SLC 16.11-3 (Radioactive Effluent Monitoring)

K/A: 062G2.1.20 (4.3/4.2)

T1G1, TIG1

Bank

Reference:

Facility updated question bank 46 WE011301 WE011301

Radioactive Effluent Monitoring Instrumentation

16.11.3

16.11 RADIOLOGICAL EFFLUENTS CONTROL

16.11.3 Radioactive Effluent Monitoring Instrumentation

COMMITMENT

APPLICABILITY:

Radioactive Effluent Monitoring Instrumentation shall be OPERABLE as

follows:

a.

Liquid Effluents

The radioactive liquid effluent monitoring instrumentation channels

shown in Table 16.11.3-1 shall be OPERABLE with their alarm/trip

setpoints set to ensure that the limits of SLC 16.11.1 .a are not

exceeded.

b.

Gaseous Process and Effluents

The radioactive gaseous process and effluent monitoring

instrumentation channels shown in Table 16.11.3-2 shall be

OPERABLE with their alarm/trip setpoints set to ensure that the

limits of SLC 16.11.2.a are not exceeded.

c.

The setpoints shall be determined in accordance with the

methodology described in the ODCM and shall be recorded.

Correction to setpoints determined in accordance with Commitment c

may be permitted without declaring the channel inoperable.

According to Table 16.11.3-1 and Table 16.11.3-2.

ACTIONS

CONDITION

A.

Alarm/trip setpoint less

conservative than

required for one or

more effluent

monitoring instrument

channels.

REQUIREr) ACTION

A.1

Declare channel

inoperable.

OR

A.2

Suspend release of

effluent monitored by

the channel.

COMPLETION TIME

Immediately

Immediately

01/31/00 I

16.11.3-1

ACTIONS

I

Radioactive Effluent Monitoring Instrumentation

16.11.3

CONDITION

REQUIRED ACTION

COMPLETION TIME

B.

One or more required

B.1

Enter the Condition

Immediately

liquid effluent monitoring

referenced in Table

instrument channels

16.11.3-1 for the

inoperable.

function.

AND

B.2

Restore the

30 days

instrument(s) to

OPERABLE status.

C. One or more required

C.1

Enter the Condition

Immediately

gaseous effluent

referenced in Table

monitoring instrument

16.11.3-2 for the

channels inoperable,

function.

AND

C.2

Restore the

30 days

instrument(s) to

OPERABLE status.

D. Required Action and

D.1

Explain in next Annual

April 30 of following

associated Completion

Radiological Effluent

calendar year

Time of Required Action

Release Report why

B.2 or C.2 not met.

inoperability was not

corrected in a timely

manner.

01/31/00 I

16.11.3-2

Radioactive Effluent Monitoring Instrumentation

16.11.3

CONDITION

REQUIRED ACTION

COMPLETION TIME

E. As required by Required

E.1.1

Analyze two

Prior to initiating

Action B.1 and

independent samples

subsequent release

referenced in Table

in accordance with

16.11.3-1. (RIA-33)

SLC 16.11.4.

AND

E.1.2

Conduct two

Prior to initiating

independent data entry

subsequent release

checks for release rate

calculations

AND

E.1.3

Conduct two

Prior to initiating

independent valve

subsequent release

lineups of the effluent

pathway.

OR

E.2

Suspend release of

Immediately

radioactive effluents by

this pathway.

F. As required by Required

F.1

Suspend release of

Immediately

Action B.1 and

radioactive effluents by

referenced in Table

this pathway.

16.11.3-1. (RIA-54)

OR

F.2

Collect and analyze

Prior to each discrete

grab samples for gross

release of the sump

radioactivity (beta

and/or gamma) at a

lower limit of detection

of at least 10-7 .Ci/ml.

16.11.3-3

03/27/99

Radioactive Effluent Monitoring Instrumentation

16.11.3

CONDITION

R

REQUIRED ACTION

COMPLETION TIME

G. As required by Required

Action B.1 and

referenced in Table

16.11.3-1. (Liquid

Radwaste Effluent Line

Flow Rate Monitor)

--

-

-.NOTE -

-

--

Not required during short,

controlled outages of liquid

effluent monitoring

instrumentation. Short controlled

outages are defined as planned

removals from service for

durations not to exceed 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br />,

for purposes of sample filter

changeouts, setpoint

adjustments, service checks,

and/or routine maintenance

procedures. This guidance may

be applied successively,

provided that time between

successive short, controlled

outages is always at least equal

to duration of immediately

preceding outage.

G.1

OR

G.2

Suspend release of

radioactive effluents by

this pathway.

Estimate flow rate

during actual releases.

Immediately

Immediately

AND

Once per 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br />

thereafter

16.11.3-4

03/27/99

Radioactive Effluent Monitoring Instrumentation

16.11.3

CONDITION

REQUIRED ACTION

COMPLETION TIME

H. As required by Required

Action B.1 and

referenced in Table

16.11.3-1. (RIA-35, #3

Chemical Treatment

Pond Composite

Sampler and Sampler

Flow Moditor (Turbine

Building Sumps

Effluent))

NOTE

Not required during short,

controlled outages of liquid

effluent monitoring

instrumentation. Short controlled

outages are defined as planned

"removals from service for

durations not to exceed 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br />,

for purposes of sample filter

changeouts, setpoint

adjustments, service checks,

and/or routine maintenance

procedures. This guidance may

be applied successively,

provided that time between

successive short, controlled

outages is always at least equal

to duration of immediately

preceding outage.

H.1

Suspend release of

radioactive effluents by

this pathway.

OR

H.2

Collect and analyze

grab samples for gross

radioactivity (beta

and/or gamma) at a

lower limit of detection

of at least 10i7 iCi/ml.

Immediately

Immediately

AND

Once per 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br />

thereafter

01/31/00 1

16.11.3-5

Radioactive Effluent Monitoring Instrumentation

16.11.3

CONDITION

REQUIRED ACTION

COMPLETION TIME

As required by Required

Action CA and

referenced in Table

16.11.3-2 for effluent

releases from waste gas

tanks (RIA-37, RIA-38)

or containment purges

(RIA-45).

NOTE

Not required during short,

controlled outages of gaseous

effluent monitoring

instrumentation. Short controlled

outages are defined as planned

removals from service for

durations not to exceed 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br />,

for purposes of sample filter

changeouts, setpoint

adjustments, service checks,

and/or routine maintenance

procedures. This guidance may

be applied successively,

provided that time between

successive short, controlled

outages is always at least equal

to duration of immediately

preceding outage.

1.1.1

Analyze two

independent samples.

AND

1.1.2

Conduct two

independent data entry

checks for release rate

calculations

AND

1.1.3

Conduct two

independent valve

lineups of the effluent

pathway.

OR

1.2

Suspend release of

radioactive effluents by

this pathway.

Prior to initiating

subsequent release

Prior to initiating

subsequent release

Prior to initiating

subsequent release

Immediately

01/31/00 1

16.11.3-6

Radioactive Effluent Monitoring Instrumentation

16.11.3

CONDITION

REQUIRED ACTION

COMPLETION TIME

J.

As required by Required

Action C.1 and

referenced in Table

16.11.3-2. (Effluent

Flow Rate Monitor (Unit

Vent, Containment

Purge, Interim

Radwaste Exhaust, Hot

Machine Shop Exhaust,

Radwaste Facility

Exhaust, Waste Gas

Discharge ))

NOTE

Not required during short,

controlled outages of gaseous

effluent monitoring

instrumentation. Short controlled

outages are defined as planned

removals from service for

durations not to exceed 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br />,

for purposes of sample filter

changeouts, setpoint

adjustments, service checks,

and/or routine maintenance

procedures. This guidance may

be applied successively,

provided that time between

successive short, controlled

outages is always at least equal

to duration of immediately

preceding outage.

J.1

Suspend release of

radioactive effluents by

this pathway.

OR

J.2

Estimate flow rate

01/31/00 1

Immediately

Immediately

AND

Once per 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br />

thereafter

I

16.11.3-7

Radioactive Effluent Monitoring Instrumentation

16.11.3

CONDITION

REQUIRED ACTION

COMPLETION TIME

K. As required by Required

Action C.1 and

referenced in Table

16.11.3-2. '(RIA-45.

RIA-53, 4RIA-45)


NOTE --------

Not required during short,

controlled outages of gaseous

effluent monitoring

instrumentation. Short controlled

outages are defined as planned

removals from service for

durations not to exceed 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br />,

for purposes of sample filter

changeouts, setpoint

adjustments, service checks,

and/or routine maintenance

procedures. This guidance may

be applied successively,

provided that time between

successive short, controlled

outages is always at least equal

to duration of immediately

preceding outage.

K.1

Suspend release of

radioactive effluents by

this pathway.

OR

K.2.1

Collect grab sample.

AND

K.2.2

Analyze grab samples

for gross activity (beta

and/or gamma).

Immediately

Immediately

AND

Once per 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br />

24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> from collection

of sample

16.11.3-8

11/14/001

Radioactive Effluent Monitoring Instrumentation

16.11.3

CONDITION

REQUIRED ACTION

COMPLETION TIME

L. As required by Required

Action C.1 and

referenced in Table

16.11.3-2. (Unit Vent

Monitoring Iodine

Sampler, Unit Vent

Monitoring Particulate

Sampler, Interim

Radwate Building

Ventilation Monitoring

Iodine Sampler, Interim

Radwaste Building

Ventilation Monitoring

Particulate Sampler, Hot

Machine Shop Iodine

Sampler, Hot Machine

Shop Particulate

Sampler, Radwaste

Facility Iodine Sampler,

Radwaste Facility

Particulate Sampler)

-NOTE

Not required during short,

controlled outages of gaseous

effluent monitoring

instrumentation. Short controlled

outages are defined as planned

removals from service for

durations not to exceed 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br />,

for purposes of sample filter

changeouts, setpoint

adjustments, service checks,

and/or routine maintenance

procedures. This guidance may

be applied successively,

provided that time between

successive short, controlled

outages is always at least equal

to duration of immediately

preceding outage.

L.1

Suspend release of

radioactive effluents by

this pathway.

OR

L.2.1

NOTE

The collection time of

each sample shall not

exceed 7 days.

Collect samples

continuously using

auxiliary sampling

equipment.

AND

L.2.2

Analyze each sample.

Immediately

Immediately

48 hours5.555556e-4 days <br />0.0133 hours <br />7.936508e-5 weeks <br />1.8264e-5 months <br /> from end of

each sample collection

01/31/00 1

16.11.3-9

Radioactive Effluent Monitoring Instrumentation

16.11.3

CONDITION

REQUIRED ACTION

COMPLETION TIME

M. As required by Required

Action C.1 and

referenced in Table

16.11.3-2 for effluent

releases from ventilation

system or condenser air

ejectors. (RIA-40)

-NOTE

Not required during short,

controlled outages of gaseous

effluent monitoring

instrumentation. Short controlled

outages are defined as planned

removals from service for

durations not to exceed 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br />,

for purposes of sample filter

changeouts, setpoint

adjustments, service checks,

and/or routine maintenance

procedures. This guidance may

be applied successively,

provided that time between

successive short, controlled

outages is always at least equal

to duration of immediately

preceding outage.

M.1

Continuously monitor

release through the unit

vent.

OR

M.2

Suspend release of

radioactive effluents by

this pathway.

OR

M.3.1

Collect grab sample.

AND

M.3.2

Analyze grab sample for

gross activity (beta

and/or gamma).

Immediately

Immediately

Immediately

AND

Once per 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br />

24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> from collection

of grab sample

16.11.3-10

01/31/00 I

01/31/001

16.11.3-10

Radioactive Effluent Monitoring Instrumentation

16.11.3

SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS

SURVEILLANCE

SR 16.11.3.1

The Channel Response check shall consist of

verifying indications during periods of release.

Channel response checks shall be made at

least once per calendar day on days in which

continuous, periodic or batch releases are

made.

Perform Channel Response Check.

SR 16.11.3.2

S------NOTE ..

..----------

The Channel Response check shall consist of

verifying indications during periods of release.

Channel response checks shall be made at

least once per calendar day on days in which

continuous, periodic or batch releases are

made.

Perform Channel Response Check.

FREQUENCY

During each release via

this pathway

24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br />

SR 16.11.3.3

Perform Source Check.

24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br />

SR 16.11.3.4

Perform Source Check.

31 days

SR 16.11.3.5

Perform Source Check.

92 days

16.11.3-11

03/27/99

Radioactive Effluent Monitoring Instrumentation

16.11.3

SR 16.11.3.7

-NOTE

The CHANNEL FUNCTIONAL TEST shall

also demonstrate that automatic isolation of

this pathway and control room annunciation

occurs if any of the following conditions exist:

1.

Instrument indicates measured levels

above the alarm/trip setpoint.

2.

Circuit failure (downscale only).

Perform CHANNEL FUNCTIONAL TEST.

-

-

-- ~~NOTE-

-

-

-

The CHANNEL FUNCTIONAL TEST shall

also demonstrate that control room

annunciation occurs if any of the following

conditions exist:

1.

Instrument indicates measured levels

above the alarm/trip setpoint.

2.

Circuit failure (downscale only).

Perform CHANNEL FUNCTIONAL TEST.

FREQUENCY

92 days

92 days

01/31/00 I

SURVEILLANCE

SR 16.11.3.6

SR 16.11.3.8

Perform CHANNEL FUNCTIONAL TEST.

92 days

16.11.3-12

Radioactive Effluent Monitoring Instrumentation

16.11.3

-NOTE

The initial CHANNEL CALIBRATION shall be

performed using one or more of the reference

standards certified by the National Bureau of

Standards or using standards that have been

obtained from suppliers that participate in

measurement assurance activities with the

National Institute of Standards and

Technology (NIST). The standards shall

permit calibrating the system over its intended

range of energy and measurement. For

subsequent CHANNEL CALIBRATION,

sources that have been related to the initial

calibration shall be used. (Operating plants

may substitute previously established

calibration procedures for these

requirements.)

Perform CHANNEL CALIBRATION.

FREQUENCY

12 months

SR 16.11.3.10

Perform CHANNEL CALIBRATION.

12 months

SR 16.11.3.11

Perform leak test.

When cylinder gates or

wicket gates are

reworked

SR 16.11.3.12

Perform Source Check.

Within 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> prior to

each release via

associated pathway

01/31/00 I

SURVEILLANCE

SR 16.11.3.9

16.11.3-13

Radioactive Effluent Monitoring Instrumentation

16.11.3

Table 16.11.3-1

LIQUID EFFLUENT MONITORING INSTRUMENTATION

OPERATING CONDITIONS AND SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS

CONDITION

REFERENCED

MINIMUM

FROM

OPERABLE

SURVEILLANCE

REQUIRED

INSTRUMENT

CHANNELS

APPLICABILITY

REQUIREMENTS

ACTION B.1

Monitors Providing

Automatic Termination of

Release

a.

Liquid Radwaste

Effluent Line Monitor,

RIA-33

b. Turbine Building Sump.

RIA-54

2.

Monitors not Providing

Automatic Termination

of Release

Low Pressure Service Water

RIA-35

3.

Flow Rate Measuring

Devices

a.

Liquid Radwaste

Effluent Line Flow Rate

Monitor

(OLW CR0725 or

OLW SS0920)

b.

Liquid Radwaste

Effluent Line Minimum

Flow Device

c. Turbine Building Sump

Minimum Flow Device

d. Low Pressure Service

Water Minimum Flow

Device

At all times

At all times

At all times

At all times

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

SR 16.11.3.1

SR 16.11.3.3

SR 16.11.3.6

SR 16.11.3.9

SR 16.11.3.2

SR 16.11.3.4

SR 16.11.3.7

SR 16.11.3.9

SR

SR

SR

SR

16,11.3.2

16.11.3.4

16.11.3.7

16.11.3.9

SR 16.11.3.1

SR 16.11.3.10

SR 16.11.3.1

SR 16.11.3.10

SR 16.11.3.1

SR 16.11.3.10

SR 16.11.3.1

SR 16.11.3.10

E

F

H

G

NA

NA

NA

16.11.3-14

I

I

I

03/27/99

Radioactive Effluent Monitoring Instrumentation

16.11.3

Table 16.11.3-1

LIQUID EFFLUENT MONITORING INSTRUMENTATION

OPERATING CONDITIONS AND SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS

CONDITION

REFERENCED

MINIMUM

FROM

OPERABLE

SURVEILLANCE

REQUIRED

INSTRUMENT

CHANNELS

APPLICABILITY

REQUIREMENTS

ACTION B.1

e.

Keowee Hydroelectric

NA

NA

SR 16.11.3.11

NA

Tailrace Discharge (a'

4.

Continuous Composite

Sampler

  1. 3 Chemical Treatment

1

At all times

SR 16.11.3.2

H

Pond Composite Sampler

SR 16.11.3.10

and Sampler Flow Monitor

(Turbine Building Sumps

Effluent)

(a)

Flow is determined from the number of hydro units operating. If no hydro units are operating, leakage flow will be

assumed to be 38 cfs based on historical data.

16.11.3-15

03/27/99

Radioactive Effluent Monitoring Instrumentation

16.11.3

Table 16.11.3-2

GASEOUS EFFLUENT MONITORING INSTRUMENTATION

OPERATING CONDITIONS AND SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS

MINIMUM

CONDITION

OPERABLE

REFERENCED

CHANNELS

FROM

(PER RELEASE

SURVEILLANCE

REQUIRED

INSTRUMENT

PATH)

APPLICABILITY

REQUIREMENTS

ACTION CA

1.

Unit Vent Monitoring System

a.

Noble Gas Activity

Monitor Providing Alarm

and Automatic

Termination of

Containment Purge

Release (RIA45 - Purge

Isolation Function)

b.

Noble Gas Activity

Monitor Providing Alarm.

(RIA-45 - Vent Stack

Monitor Function)

c.

Iodine Sampler

d.

Particulate Sampler

e.

Effluent Flow Rate

Monitor (Unit Vent Flow)

(GWD CR0037)

f.

Sampler Flow Rate

Monitor W, (Annunciator)

g.

Effluent Flow Rate

Monitor (Containment

Purge) (PR CR0082)

h.

CSAE Off Gas Monitor

(RIA-40)

2.

Interim Radwaste Building

Ventilation Monitoring System

a.

Noble Gas Activity

Monitor (RIA - 53)

b.

Iodine Sampler

c.

Particulate Sampler

d.

Effluent Flow Rate

Monitor (Interim

Radwaste Exhaust)

(GWD FTO082)

e.

Sampler Flow Rate

Monitorl') (Annunciator)

At All Times

At all times

At All Times

At All Times

At All Times

At All Times

1

During Containment

Purge Operation

During Operation

of CSAE

At All Times

At All Times

At All Times

At All Times

1

At All Times

16.11.3-16

SR 16.11.3.2

SR 16.11.3.4

SR 16.11.3.7

SR 16.11.3.9

SR 16.11.3.2

SR 16.11.3.4

SR 16.11.3.7

SR 16.11.3.9

SR 16.11.3.2

SR 16.11.3.2

SR 16.11.3.2

SR 16.11.3.10

SR 16.11.3.2

SR 16.11.3.10

SR 16.11.3.2

SR 16.11.3.10

SR 16.11.3.2

SR 16.11.3.5

SR 16.11.3.8

SR 16.11.3.9

K

L

L

J

NA

J

M

K

SR

SR

SR

SR

16.11.3.2

16.11.3.4

16.11.3.7

16.11.3.9

SR 16.11.3.2

SR 16.11.3.2

SR 16.11.3.2

SR 16.11.3.10

SR 16.11.3.2

SR 16.11.3.10

L

L

J

NA

1

03/27/99

Radioactive Effluent Monitoring Instrumentation

16.11.3

Table 16.11.3-2

GASEOUS EFFLUENT MONITORING INSTRUMENTATION

OPERATING CONDITIONS AND SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS

MINIMUM

CONDITION

OPERABLE

REFERENCED

CHANNELS

FROM

(PER RELEASE

SURVEILLANCE

REQUIRED

INSTRUMENT

PATH)

APPLICABILITY

REQUIREMENTS

ACTION C.1

3.Hot Machine Shop Ventilation

Sampling System

a.

Iodine Sampler

b.

Particulate Sampler

c.

Effluent Flow Rate

Monitor (Hot Machine

Shop Exhaust)

(Totalizer)

d.

Sampler Flow Rate

Monitor 0ý (Annunciator)

4.

Radwaste Facility Ventilation

Monitoring System

a.

Noble Gas Activity

Monitor (4-RIA-45)

b.

Iodine Sampler

c.

Particulate Sampler

d.

Effluent Flow Rate

Monitor (Radwaste

Facility Exhaust) (0VS

CR2060)

e.

Sampler Flow Rate

Monitor 41) (Annunciator)

5. Waste Gas Holdup Tanks

a.

Noble Gas Activity

Monitor - Providing

Alarm and Automatic

Termination of Release

(RIA-37,-38)b

b.

Effluent Flow Rate

Monitor (Waste Gas

Discharge Flow) (GWD

CR033)

1

1

At All Times

At All Times

At All Times

At All Times

1

At All Times

At All Times

At All Times

At All Times

At All Times

1

During Waste Gas

Holdup Tank Releases

During Waste Gas

Holdup Tank Releases

16.11.3-17

SR 16.11.3.2

SR 16.11.3.2

SR 16.11.3.2

SR 16.11.3.10

SR 16.11.3.2

SR 16.11.3.10

SR 16.11.3.2

SR 16.11.3.4

SR 16.11.3.7

SR 16.11.3.9

SR 16.11.3.2

SR 16.11.3.2

SR 16.11.3.2

SR 16.11.3.10

SR 16.11.3.2

SR 16.11.3.10

SR 16.11.3.1

SR 16.11.3.6

SR 16.11.3.9

SR 16.11.3.12

SR 16.11.3.1

SR 16A11.3.10

L

L

J

NA

K

L

L

J

NA

J

(a)Alarms indicating low flow may be substituted for flow measuring devices.

(b)Either Normal or High Range monitor is required dependent upon activity in tank being released.

1

1

1

03/27/99

Radioactive Effluent Monitoring Instrumentation

16.11.3

BASES

The radioactive liquid effluent instrumentation is provided to monitor and control, as applicable,

the releases of radioactive materials in liquid effluents during actual or potential releases. The

alarm/trip setpoints for these instruments shall be calculated in accordance with NRC approved

methods in the ODCM to assure that the alarmtrip will occur prior to exceeding 10 times the

limits of 10 CFR Part 20. The operability and use of this instrumentation is consistent with the

requirements of General Design Criteria 60, 63, and 64 of Appendix A to 10 CFR Part 50.

The radioactive gaseous effluent instrumentation is provided to monitor and control, as

applicable, the releases of radioactive materials in gaseous effluents during actual or potential

releases. The alarm/trip setpoints for these instruments shall be calculated in accordance with

NRC approved methods in the ODCM to assure that the alarm/trip will occur prior to exceeding

applicable dose limits in SLC 16.11.2. The operability end use of this instrumentation is

consistent with the requirements of General Design Criteria 60, 63, and 64 of Appendix A to 10

CFR Part 50.

For certain applicable cases, grab samples or flow estimates are required at frequencies

between every 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> end every 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> upon RIA removal from service. SLC 16.11.3 does

not explicitly require Action (grab samples or flow estimates) to be initiated immediately upon

RIA removal from service, when removal is for the purposes of sample filter changeouts,

setpoint adjustments, service checks, or routine maintenance. Therefore, during the defined

short, controlled outages, Action is not required.

For the cases in which Action is defined as continuous sampling by auxiliary equipment (Action

L) initiation of continuous sampling by auxiliary sampling equipment requires approximately 1

hour. One hour is the accepted reasonable time to initiate collect and change samples.

Therefore. for the defined short, controlled outages (not to exceed 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br />), Action is not

required.

Failures such as blown instrument fuses, defective indicators, and faulted amplifiers are, in

many cases, revealed by alarm or annunciator action. Comparison of output and/or state of

independent channels measuring the same variable supplements this type of built-in

surveillance. Based on experience in operation of both conventional and nuclear systems, when

the unit is in operation, the minimum checking frequency stated is deemed adequate.

REFERENCES:

1. 10CFRPart20.

2. 10 CFR Part 50, Appendix A.

3. Offsite Dose Calculation Manual.

4. UFSAR, Section 7.2.3.4.

01/31/00 1

16.11.3-18

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

63. Which ONE of the following statements describes the operation of the startup feeder

breakers to TA and TB (6.9 kv) following a valid switchyard isolation and a subsequent

resetting of the switchyard isolation logic?

The breakers will open upon actuation of...

A. both channels of Switchyard isolation and will reclose automatically if in AUTO.

B. either channel of Switchyard isolation and will reclose automatically if in AUTO.

C. both channels of Switchyard isolation and will only reclose MANUALLY.

D. either channel of Switchyard isolation and will only reclose MANUALLY.

A) A

A. Correct, it takes both trains of Switchyard isolation to actuate the tripping of the 7kV

breakers and if the switchyard isolation signal is reset without taking the breakers to

manual the breakers will reclose automatically.

B. Incorrect, it takes both trains.

C. Incorrect, the breaker will reclose in automatic.

D. Incorrect, it takes both trains of Switchyard isolation to trip the 7kV breakers.

Reference: Lesson Plans Vol IX, OP-OC-EL-EPD, page 34 of 76.

EO - 15.1

K/A: 062K402 (2.5/2.7)

RO/SRO: BOTH

Level: C

Author: rfa

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

64. Which ONE of the following statements correctly describes how to reset a 230 KV

SWYD Yellow Bus Differential Lockout?

The 230 KV SWYD Yellow Bus Differential Lockout must be manually reset via ...

A. switches on the affected PCBs.

B. switches in the 230 KV relay house.

C. pushbuttons on cable room panels.

D. control room reset pushbuttons.

A) B

Reference: Lesson Plans Vol IX, OP-OC-EL-CB, page 35 of 57.

EO - 5.2

K/A: 062K404 (2.2/2.9)

RO/SRO: BOTH

Level: M

Author: rfa

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

65. Plant conditions:

-

Reactor power = 100%

Which ONE of the following will result from de-energizing the KU panelboard?

A. All ICS stations will transfer to HAND and NI-9 will fail LOW

B. EHC cabinets and FDWP turbine control will be de-energized

C. ICS feedwater control will be available ONLY in automatic mode

D. Non-nuclear instrumentation and fire protection system will lose power

A) C

Reference: Lesson Plans Vol IX, OP-OC-EL-DCD, page 36 of 55.

EO - 6.3

K/A: 063K201 (2.9/3.1)

RO/SRO: BOTH

Level: M

Author: rfa

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

66. After a switchyard isolation is initiated, which one of the following is the purpose for the

8.5 sec timer on the Keowee Hydro Unit?

A. Prevent closing of the Keowee overhead breaker (ACB-1/2), until timer has timed

out, to ensure separation of the unit from the 230 KV red bus.

B. Prevent closing of the Keowee overhead breaker (ACB-1/2), until timer has timed

out, to ensure all RCPS have tripped.

C. It initiates a trip signal to the underground breaker (ACB 3/4), after it times out, if

that unit was generating to the grid at the time the emergency start signal was

generated.

D. It initiates a trip signal to the underground breaker (ACB 3/4), until timer has timed

out, if that unit was generating to the grid at the time the emergency start signal was

generated to ensure all RCPS have tripped.

A) B

After a SWYD isolation, the 8.5 sec timer ensures ACB 1/2 will not close to ensure that all

RCPs will have tripped due to a loss of power longer than 3 seconds.

Reference: Lesson Plans Vol IX, OP-OC-EL-KHG, page 26 of 33.

EO - 5

K/A: 064A302 (3.4/3.7) (This K/A is for EDG, however, Oconee has hydro-electric)

RO/SRO: BOTH

Level: M

Author: rfa

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

67. Plant conditions:

INITIAL CONDITIONS:

- Reactor power = 100%

CURRENT CONDITIONS:

- Instrument Air pressure is rapidly DECREASING

- NO ES actuation signals have been received

Assume NO operator actions are taken

The LDST level will decrease and the pressurizer level will increase.

Which one of the following has caused this?

A. HP-5 and HP-31 both failed open.

B. HP-5 and HP-31 both failed closed.

C. HP-5 failed closed and HP-31 failed open.

D. HP-5 failed open and HP-31 failed closed.

A) C

HP-5 will fail closed isolating all letdown, which stops input to the LDST. HP-31 fails

open increasing input to the PZR.

K/A: 065AK303 (2.9/3.4)

T1G3, T1 G2

Bank

Reference:

Facility updated question bank 20 SSS044701 SSS044701

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

68. Which of the following areas contain material

fire?

A.

B.

C.

D.

A)

A.

B.

C.

D.

which would be limited to a Class "B"

Document control storage vault.

"A" ES 4160V switch gear room.

TB lube oil purifier.

I&C calibration lab in maintenance facility.

C

Paper Class "A".

Electical equipment Class "C".

CORRECT: Oil Class "B"

No fire hazard for Class "B"

Reference: Nuclear System Directives 112 and 316

GET

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

69. Given the following plant conditions:

- Fire in the cable spreading room, the Control Room has been evacuated (no

time to take actions prior to leaving control room) and transfer to the Aux

Shutdown Panel is in progess.

- During the transfer, RCS pressure decreased to 1400 psig and initiated

Engineering Safeguards.

Which one of the following identifies the starting status of the Keowee Hydro

Generators for this scenario?

A.

The Keowee Hydo Generators will ONLY auto start following a loss of

power to the Main Feeder Buses.

B.

Can ONLY be manually started from the Oconee Control Room.

C.

Should have started when the local/remote switches transferred Keowee

control to the Oconee Control Room.

D.

Should have auto started as a result of the Engineering Safeguards

actuation.

A) D

A. Local start is not required, auto start still functions.

B. Auto start still functions.

C. The transfer switch will not start the Keowee Emergency Generator.

D. CORRECT, ES actuates on low RCS pressure, AND this is the one circuit that ES will still

actuate when control is transfered to the RSP.

Reference: Vol. IX, Keowee Hydro Generators.

(This K/A has to do with ED/G. However, Oconee use hydroelectric)

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

70. Unit 1 plant conditions:

INITIAL CONDITIONS:

- DATE / TIME = 3-14-99 / 0015

"- "1B" GWD Tank release commenced

- Waste Gas Flow Monitor "OOS"

"- "1B" GWD Tank pressure = 68 psig

CURRENT CONDITIONS:

-DATE / TIME = 3-14-99 / 0245

- Release completed

"-"1B" GWD Tank pressure = 5 psig

Which ONE of the following indicates the estimated flow rate (scfm) for the 1 B GWD

Tank release?

SEE ATTACHED: (1108/01, Encl. 3.3, GWD Tank Volume vs Pressure Curve)

A. 42

B. 32

C. 26

D. 10

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

A) B

Flow estimate:

A. Incorrect, directly from the curve; 68 psig = 6300 scf 150

= 42 scfm

B. Correct, 68 to 5 psig ý 4800 scf 150 minutes = 32 scfm

C. Incorrect, mis-reading curve at 58 psig instead of 68 psig;

58 psig ý 5500 scf - 1500 scf 150 minutes = 26 scfm

D. Incorrect, directly from the curve; 5 psig = 1500 scf 150

= 10 scfm

Required reference: 1108/01, Encl. 3.3, GWD Tank Volume vs Pressure Curve

K/A: 071A202 (3.3/3.6)

T2G1, T2G1

Bank

Reference:

Facility updated question bank 57 WE011101 WE011101

SLC 16.11-3.5.b,(J) states effulent flow rate monitor can be

OOS and releases continue provided the flow rate is estimated

at least one every four hours.

Enclosure 3.3

OP/0/A/I 108/001

GWD Tank Volume Vs. Pressure Curve (A, B, 3A, 3B)

Page 1 of 1

xx

I

I

0

5

10

15 20 25

30 35

40

45

50

55 "60 65

70

75

80

85 90

95

PRESSURE (PSI)

Gwd tank l.bmp

9

8

7

6

"LL

0to

W :

0

H-

5

100

2z6

ell

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

71. Which ONE of the following is the purpose for performing a check source of an Area

Radiation Monitor?

A.

To perform a calibration of the monitor's output circuitry.

B.

To verify the monitor's power source voltage is at the proper level.

C.

To ensure the detector and its circuits respond to radiation.

D.

To provide an output indication for adjustment of the alarm setpoints.

A) C

Reference: Vol 1, Radiation Indicating Alarms

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

72. Concerning the Sorrento Radiation Monitoring System, which ONE of the following is

correct?

The RM-80 ...

A. outputs directly to any associated interlock functions.

B. outputs directly to the control room view nodes.

C. will NOT function without the Transient Monitor System.

D. will NOT provide local indication of sample flow rate.

A) A

A. Correct. Interlocks will operate even if Transient Monitor system computer is

B.

C.

D.

OOS.

Incorrect. Outputs to Transient Monitor System and then to View Nodes.

Incorrect. RM-80 will function with the Transient Monitor System OOS.

Incorrect. Does provide local indication of sample flow rate.

K/A: 072K403 (3.2/3.6)

RO - T2GI

Bank

Reference:

Facility updated question bank 28 RAD010702 RAD010702

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

73. Plant conditions:

- Unit 1 = MODE 1

- Unit 2 = MODE 5

- 2B CCW pump operating

- Unit 3 = MODE 1

Which ONE of the following is correct if 2B CCW pump is secured?

A. 2CCW-26/28 and 2V-87/88 will remain in their current position

B. The CCW inlet line high point vent valves, 2CCW-26/28, will open

C. The continuous priming tank normal inlet control valve, 2V-87, will closes

D. The continuous priming tank emergency inlet control valve, 2V-88, will opens

A) A

A. Correct: Valves remain "as is" due to CCWPs continuing to operate on Unit 3.

B. Incorrect: Open on first CCW pump start.

C. Incorrect: Correct if not CCW pump on Unit 2 or 3 operating or both CVP secured

D. Incorrect: Correct if not CCW pump on Unit 2 or 3 operating or both CVP secured

K/A: 075A202 (2.5/2.7)

RO - T2G2

Bank

Reference: Facility updated question bank question 33 STG040801

STG040801

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

74. Which one of the following is correct?

will trip SSF OTS1 normal power supply breaker from B2T-4 which will

A. Either an ES channel 2 on any unit OR a maximum motor bearing oil temperature

of 160°F / trip OTS1-2 (SSF ASW PUMP) breaker.

B. Either a source undervoltage for > 30 seconds OR a maximum pump bearing oil

temperature of 160'F / close OTS1-4 (SSF DIESEL GENERATOR) breaker.

C. Either an ES channel 1 on any unit OR a Unit 2 channel "A" loadshed / trip

OTS1-2 (SSF ASW PUMP) breaker.

D. Either a source undervoltage for > 30 seconds OR the full load current for the SSF

auxiliary service water pump is 240 amps / close OTS1-4 (SSF DIESEL

GENERATOR) breaker.

A) C

Reference: Lesson Plans Book 1 of 2 Vol V, OP-OC-EAP-SSF , page 39 of 83.

EO - 21

K/A: 076K121 (2.7/2.9)

RO/SRO: Both

Level: M

Author: rfa

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

75. Which one of the following is correct, concerning HPSW pump operation with respect

to a loss of power to a main feeder bus (MFB)?

A. HPSW pumps are powered from MCC 1XE which is fed from load center 1X3

normally and from 1X2 as an alternate source. Therefore, the HPSW pumps will be

unaffected. However, if the HPSW pumps A and B are not running, they will BOTH

get an auto start signal upon loss of power to 1 X6 due to 1 X6 feeding breaker #15,

the power supply for EWST level control.

B. HPSW pumps are powered from the unit 1 MFBs. If one MFB is de-energized then

the remaining HPSW pumps are vulnerable to single failure of the other unit 1 MFB.

Backup power is NOT available.

C. HPSW pumps are powered from MCC 1XE which is fed from load center 1X3

normally and from 1X2 as an alternate source for units 1 and 2. Therefore, Unit 1

and 2s HPSW pumps will be unaffected. Unit 3s HPSW pumps are powered from

the unit 3 MFBs. If one Unit 3 MFB is de-energized then the remaining Unit 3

HPSW pumps are vulnerable to single failure of the other unit 3 MFB. Backup

power is NOT available.

D. HPSW pumps are powered from all three units MFBs. If one MFB is de-energized

then the remaining HPSW pumps can be powered from the other units MFBs.

A) B

Reference: Lesson Plans Vol X, OP-OC-SSS-HPW , page 27 of 33.

EO - 17.3

K/A:076K201 (2.7/2.7)

RO/SRO: BOTH

Level: C

Author: rfa

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

76. Which one of the following sets of IA/AlA symptoms is correct for an IA line break?

A. BOTH the IA AND the AIA systems will begin losing pressure. The IA check valves

will all close. The three AIA compressors will sequentially start, if in automatic, as

pressure drops from 88 psig to 85 psig.

B. ONLY the IA system will begin losing pressure because it operates at a much

higher pressure. The IA check valves will NOT close because the lower pressure

will tend to be on the AIA system side.

C. ONLY the IA system will begin losing pressure because it operates at a much

higher pressure. At 88 psig, AIA system pressure, the three AIA compressors will

start if in Automatic.

D. BOTH the IA AND the AIA systems will begin losing pressure. At 88 psig, AIA

system pressure, the three AIA compressors will start if in Automatic.

A) D

Reference: Lesson Plans Vol X, OP-OC-SSS-IA, page 37 of 49.

EO - 25 and 28

K/A:078K303 (3.0/3.4)

RO/SRO: BOTH

Level: C

Author: rfa

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

77. Given the following plant conditions:

- Reactor trip from full power.

- A fire is in progress on the startup transformer.

- A Loss of Offsite Power.

- Fire header pressure has decreased to 100 psig.

Which one of the

water pressure?

A.

B.

C.

D.

following will provide IMMEDIATE (within 5 seconds) fire fighting

HPSW pump "A" only.

HPSW pump "A" AND "B".

Jockey fire pump.

Elevated Water Storage Tank.

A) D

A. Keowee Units are NOT on line yet.

B. Keowee Units are NOT on line yet

C. Keowee Units are NOT on line yet

D. Correct answer - power independei

Keowee requires 15 seconds.

Reference: Vol I, Actions Following a Fire

Vol. IX, Keowee Hydro Generators.

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

78. Plant conditions:

- ICS is in full automatic (Integrated Mode)

- Control Rod Group 6 at 78% withdrawn

Which ONE of the following sets of plant conditions would cause the Asymmetric Rod

Runback logic to initiate an ICS runback?

Core Thermal Power Demand (CTPD) and NI Power are...

A. 65%; the Group 4 Diamond "out limit" is lost.

B. 55%; the Group 5 Diamond "in limit" is received.

C. 61%; the Group 6 Diamond "in limit" is received.

D. 68%; the Group 7 Diamond "in limit" is received.

A) C

A. INCORRECT - The out-limits for the safety groups must be accompanied by an

asymmetric fault.

B. INCORRECT - Power needs to be >60% to satisfy the AND gate.

C. CORRECT - If at gp 6 @ 78% and an in-limit received, this implies an asymmetric

fault must exist and group 5 > 80%.

D. INCORRECT - Group 6 must be >80% for a group 7 in-limit to generate runback.

K/A: AO1AA11 (3.7/3.7)

T1G2, T1G2

Bank

Reference:

Facility updated question bank question 41

IC020901

IC020901

ASYMMETRIC ROD RUNBACK LOGIC OP-OC-CRI-5.

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

79. Unit 1 conditions:

INITIAL CONDITIONS:

- Reactor power = 100%

CURRENT CONDITIONS:

- Spurious Turbine/Generator Trip

- CT-1 Transformer lockout

- 1T Transformer lockout

- 1A and 1B OTSG S/U levels = 35" and increasing

- CETCs = 548°F and decreasing

Which ONE of the following describes the correct operator action?

A. Take manual control of 1FDW-315 and 316 (EFDW Control Valves), and reduce

XSUR levels to 30" to prevent overcooling.

B. Throttle OTSG feedwater flow as required to minimize cooldown until a level of 240"

XSUR is reached.

C. Take manual control of 1 FDW-35 and 44 (Main FDW Control Valves), and reduce

OTSG levels to 25" SUR to stop overfeed.

D. Throttle OTSG feedwater flow as required to minimize cooldown until a level of 50%

Operating Range is reached.

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

A) B

A. Incorrect - Manual control of 315/316 is necessary but level should be established

to 240" since RCPs were tripped on the loss of electrical.

B. Correct - Required to prevent overcooling / pump/header flow limits being

exceeded.

C. Incorrect - This would be a correct statement if Main FDW was available and RCPs

are operating.

D. Incorrect - The first part of the statement is true concerning throttle feedwater but

level requirements are 240" XSUR not 50% OR.

K/A: A04AAI1 (3.5/3.3)

T1G2, T1 G2

Bank

Reference:

Facility updated question bank 47 CF023402 CF023402

CF-EF OBJ# 34 (37)

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

80. Which ONE of the following describes the operation of the AMSAC and the DSS

during an ATWS (Anticipated Transient Without Scram) with a complete loss of Main

Feedwater?

AMSAC trips the....

A.

regulating rods and starts the EFDWPs while DSS trips the main turbine.

B.

regulating rods while DSS trips the main turbine and starts the EFDWPs.

C.

main turbine and starts the EFDWPs while DSS trips the regulating rods.

D.

main turbine while DSS trips the regulating rods and starts the EFDWPs.

A) C

A. INCORRECT: AMSAC does not trip the regulating rods/ DSS does not trip the MT

B. INCORRECT: AMSAC does not trip the regulating rods / DSS does not trip the MT

or start EFWPT.

C. CORRECT: AMSAC trips the turbine, starts all EFDWPS, DSS trips the control rods

(also +125 added to setpoint/not part of this question).

D. INCORRECT: DSS does not start the EFDWPs.

Reference: Vol X, EFW System

E.O. 25

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

81. Unit 1 conditions:

INITIAL CONDITIONS:

- Reactor power = 20%

- Unit startup in progress

- All RCPs operating

CURRENT CONDITIONS:

- Reactor trip

- Reactor power = 1% and decreasing

- RCS pressure = 1950 psig and decreasing

- Condenser vacuum = 19 inches and decreasing

- 1A2 RCP tripped

Which ONE of the following is the cause of the reactor trip?

A. Low RCS pressure.

B. Power to flow to imbalance.

C. Main turbine anticipatory.

D. Loss of feedwater anticipatory trip.

A) D

A. Incorrect - RCS pressure > 1810 psig.

B. Incorrect - Rx power < min. flux/flow/imb trip setpoint.

C. Incorrect - Rx power < 29.75%, turb. anticipatory trip

bypassed.

D. Correct - Operating MFDWP tripped on low vacuum.

K/A E02EK11 (3.6/3.6)

T1G2, T1G2

Bank

Reference: Facility updated question bank (Question 5 IC090301

IC090301)

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

82. Unit 3 plant conditions:

- Reactor Building Pressure = 3.5 psig

- RCS Pressure (ICCM) = 800 psig

- RCS Tc = 4450F

- RCS Th = 465*F

- An average of ALL CETCs = 4890F

- An average of 5 highest CETCs (ICCM Tr.B) = 518'F

- An average of the 5 highest of ALL qualified CETC's = 5470F

Which ONE of the following is the correct Train "B" ICCM Core subcooling margin

indication the operator will observe on the SCM window LED on UBI?

SEE ATTACHMENT: EOP Encl. 5.18, P/T Curves

A. 0°F not flashing

B. (+) 90F not flashing

C. 00F flashing

D. (-) 90F flashing

A) C

A. incorrect - number "0" flashes in the sat. band

B. incorrect - uses average of all CETC's

C. correct - Average of the 5 highest CETC from B Train w/ 800 psig => saturated

condition

D. Incorrect - uses 5 highest of ALL CETC's

Required reference: EOP Encl. 5.18, P/T Curves

K/A: E03EK21 (3.4/3.8)

T1G1, T1G1

Bank

Reference:

Facility updated question bank 21 IC084302 IC084302

Enclosure 5.18

P/T Curves

EP/1/AI1800/001

Page 1 of 3

Normal Containment (P., < 3 psig):

Use OAC or ICCM.

Abnormal Containment (P.. > 3 psig): Use ICCM only.

I

I

I

I

I

I

UNACCEPTABLE REGION

Decrease Pressure

10

150

200

I

2400

2400

2200

20D0

1800

1600

1400

1200

1000

80o

600

400

200

0

/

)1

/

I.

I/

ThT~

11111

~ii~~ii

III .......

...

.....

t ... ....

I ... .......

1 .

1 1 ....

..

Ii

...

..

....

j ....

I....

.....

..

II.'I

IlgA

JAI

"Con'

"stat'

.4

S..........

.......

S......

.......

S......

... .....

..

Co.¢

1F'

'I

0

6

Co

St

0.

~~~~~~~~~~.

....

..

..

.

.

..

.

.

.

.

..

. . ..

. . .

. . .

. . . ..

. . ........

. ......

..

.......

~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~..

.

. . . . . . . . . .. . . ....

. . ..

. . . ....

..

. . . ..

. . ......

.

. ..

. .

......

..

..

.

. .....

.. ..

........

. ...

........

.

.. ........

.

.......

.. ....

.... .

. ..

....

.

. .........

.. ...... .

.~~

A

-=i

S. ..

..

..

. .. .

. ..

.. .

.. .. ...

. ..

......... 4 ..... ..

. ..

........

........

~~~~~~~..

..

.. ...

...

. .. . ..

. .. ...

. .......

...

...

.

....

...

... .........

R E IO

.....

...

..... .........

...

.....

I plement ICC Procedure

..

.

.. . .

. . . .

. .

.. . . .

. . ..

..... 4 ...... ...

.. ...................

...... ... ....... . ......

. .... ...

.... ..... .

.

.. ......

..... .

...

...

.

.... ..

... .......

.. ...... ... ... . .. ... ... . .. .

.. .. .. .

.. .....

...........

...... . ... .. .. .. ... . . .. ...

250

300

350

400

450

500

550

600

650

700

REACTOR COOLANT TEMPERATURE (OF)

4

C)

U)

0

U

Il/I

'-4"

-ti--H

lOll

LU

Draft AAA

...

.. .....

.4

Enclosure 5.18

P/T Curves

EP/1/A/1800/001

Page 3 of 3

Normal Containment (P,. < 3 psig):

Use OAC or ICCM.

Abnormal Containmenl (&. > 3 psig): Use ICCM only.

600

500

400

300

200

100

0

50

100

150

200

250

300

350

400

450

500

REACTOR COOLANT TEMPERATURE (0F)

1

0.

z

0

0

0

0

U

Draft AAA

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

83. Given the following plant conditions:

- The reactor is tripped.

- RCS subcooled margin is zero.

Which of the following actions would result in increasing RCS subcooling margin?

A.

Decrease RCS pressurizer level.

B.

Decrease RCS hot leg flow.

C.

Increase RCS loop pressure.

D.

Increase RCS hot leg temperature.

A) C

A- This would further reduce RCS pressure, if a bubble still exists in the PZR, level may

increase if voids are forming.

B- This would decrease the ability to transfer heat, and therefore would not increase SCM

C- CORRECT Raising pressure will increase the SCM by moving the RCS up and to the left on

the SPDS trace moving away from the saturation and zero SCM line.

D- This would move the RCS to the right on the ICCM trace and therefore decrease RCS SCM.

Reference: Vol V, Bk 1 of 2, Loss of Subcooling

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

84. Given the following plant conditions:

- Time is 15 minutes after a reactor trip due to loss of both Main Feedwater

Pumps.

- No Emergency Feedwater Pumps are operating.

- CETCs is 590°F and increasing.

- RCS pressure is 2325 psig and increasing.

- All 4 RCPs are running.

- "IA" OTSG level indicates 15 inches XSUR.

- "IN' OTSG pressure is 1010 psig and stable.

- "1 B" OTSG level indicates 13 inches XSUR.

- "1 B" OTSG pressure is 800 psig and decreasing.

- RCS heat up rate is +30°F / Hr.

- RCP "lAl" seal supply is 10 gpm.

Which of the following action(s) is required concerning operation of the RCPs?

A.

Stop one RCP per loop.

B.

Stop RCP lA1.

C.

Stop all 4 RCPs.

D.

Stop all but one RCP.

A) D

A. RNO Step 3 of the EOP's Loss of Heat transfer tab, reduces the running RCPs to 1 per loop

but this step does not apply because HPI F/C would have been initiated.

B. Misconception that leave 1 RCP for spray flow.

C. Do not place plant in NC with no other heat removal sources (OTSG), also have not

increased T incore 50° since the trip.

D. Correct; RULE 4 (Initiation of HPI Forced Cooling) will have been perfromed because RCS

pressure is > 2300 psig and no SG feed. RULE 4 reduces operating RCPs to one.

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

85. With Unit 1 operating at 100% power and the ICS in the fully integrated mode, a loss of

KI (ICS AUTO) occurs. Which ONE of the following will occur IF the reactor trips one

minute later?

ASSUME NO OPERATOR ACTION

A. Turbine Bypass Valves (TBVs) FAIL closed causing a RCS heatup.

B. Excessive Main FDW flow will cause RCS overcooling.

C. Turbine bypass valves fail open causing overcooling.

D. Reduced MFW flow will cause an RCS heatup.

A) B

A. Incorrect: TBVs are operable in manual on KU (hand) source.

B.Correct: Loss of KI reverts all stations to manual. FDW valves and pumps remain in manual

and FDW does not runback upon unit trip.

C.Incorrect: TBVs are operable in manual on KU (hand) source.

D.Incorrect: TBVs are operable in manual on KU (hand) source.

K/A: E05EA1 1 (4.2/4.2

T1G1, T1G1

Bank

Reference:

Facility updated question bank 31 STG123302 STG123302

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

86. Which one of the following is the reason why post LOCA boron dilution valves are

opened following a LOCA?

A. To limit localized boric acid concentrations in the core.

B. To limit localized boric acid concentrations in the RB Emergency Sump.

C. To prevent the moderator temperature coefficient from going positive.

D. To allow for RCS cooldown where injection flow only is required for cooling.

A) A

Reference: Book II of II, Vol 6, OP-OC-EAP-E31, page 11 of 11.

EO-4

K/A: E08EK22 (4.0/4.0)

RO/SRO: Both

Level: M

Author: rfa

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

87. Given the following plant conditions:

- Reactor trip has occurred.

- Natural Circulation in progress with Emergency Feedwater.

- 30 minutes later, a transition is made from EFW to MFW.

Which of the following identifies the resulting core delta T (Thot minus Tcold)

following this transition?

A.

Decreases because OTSG saturation temperature decreases.

B.

Decreases because natural circulation flow in the RCS decreases due to a

higher thermal center with MFW.

C.

Increases because natural circulation flow in the RCS decreases due to

hotter water with MFW.

D.

Remains the same because of the hotter water and lower thermal center

with MFW.

A) C

A. This only affects the OTSG Tcold.

B. The thermal center is lower with MFW.

C. CORRECT: Lower thermal center less driving head lower flow therefore higher delta T

D. With lower flow and lower center delta T has to change.

Reference: Vol VII, Accident Mitigation Core Cooling mechanics

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

88. Unit 3 plant conditions:

- Reactor power = 100%

- Statalarm 3SA-8/D3 (FDWPT A Turning Gear Motor Overload) actuates

- The CRSRO is in the OSC

Which ONE of the following is correct per NSD-509 (Site Standards in Support of

Operational Focus)?

After acknowledging the alarm the BOP must...

A. brief the OSM on the alarm OR call the WCC and communicate the alarm to the

WCC SRO.

B. page the CRSRO to the Control Room using the Plant PA system AND call the

WCC and communicate the alarm to the WCC SRO.

C. brief the CRSRO on the alarm upon return to the Control Room OR find the

CRSRO and communicate the alarm face-to-face.

D. page the CRSRO to the Control Room using the Plant PA system AND

communicate the alarm to the OSM.

A) C

Reference: NSD-509

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

89. Plant conditions:

INITIAL CONDITIONS:

- Reactor power = 75%

CURRENT CONDITIONS:

- A load rejection occurs

- Reactor power is decreasing

- Pressurizer subcooled

When looking at a Unit "Pressure vs. Temperature" or P/T screen, which ONE of the

following correctly describes the indication you would observe?

The yellow point would...

A. turn cyan and move down and left on the P/T screen.

B. turn cyan and "SUBCOOLED PZR" would appear on the lower right hand corner of

the screen.

C. stay yellow and "SUBCOOLED PZR" would appear on the lower right hand corner

of the screen.

D. stay yellow and move to the left and up on the P/T screen.

A) D

K/A: G2.1.19 (3.0/3.0)

RO - T3

Bank

Reference:

Facility updated question bank 37 SF100701

SF100701

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

90. Which one of the following set of requirements is correct for "Out of Sequencing of

Procedure Steps" as stated in OMP 1-9, "Use of Procedures?"

A. The performer AND the Operations Shift Manager shall initial the applicable step(s).

An evaluation of the consequences of the change shall be performed by the

Operations Shift Manager. An explanation for the sequence change shall be

documented on the procedure.

B. The performer ONLY shall initial the applicable step(s). The re-sequencing of the

step does not alter the acceptance criteria or overall intent of the procedure. An

evaluation of the consequences of the change shall be performed by the

Operations Shift Manager.

C. The performer AND the Operations Shift Manager shall initial the applicable step(s).

An evaluation of the consequences of the change shall be performed by the

Operations Shift Manager. The re-sequencing of the step MAY alter the

acceptance criteria or overall intent of the procedure.

D. The performer ONLY shall initial the applicable step(s). An evaluation of the

consequences of the change shall be performed by the Operations Shift Manager.

An explanation for the sequence change should be documented on the procedure.

A) A

Reference: Lesson Plans Vol X, OP-OC-BPS-BP, page 27 of 47.

EO - 5.5C.2

K/A: G2.1.20 (4.3/4.2)

RO/SRO: BOTH

Level: M

Author: rfa

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

91. Plant conditions:

"* A fire in the SSF Diesel Room has been detected

"* PBM Pushbutton is depressed for TWO seconds

Which ONE of the following is the response of the SSF Diesel Carbon Dioxide Fire

Suppression System?

A. Carbon dioxide is IMMEDIATELY discharged into the Diesel Room and stops

discharging after TWO seconds.

B. Carbon dioxide is IMMEDIATELY discharged into the Diesel Room and is

automatically stopped by a pre-set timer.

C. After -sixty (60) seconds, carbon dioxide is discharged into the Diesel Room and is

automatically stopped by a pre-set timer.

D. After -sixty (60) seconds, carbon dioxide is discharged into the Diesel Room for a

TWO second period.

A) C

A. Incorrect. If PBM pushbutton is used C02 does not actually discharge until about

60 sec. At the end of the first timer (60 sec.) another timer will actuate and a full

C02 system discharge will occur for about 60 sec.

B. Incorrect. See A

C. Correct. See A

D. Incorrect. See A

Reference: Lesson Plans Book 1 of 2 Vol V, OP-OC-EAP-SSF , page 46 of 83.

EO - 26.4

K/A: G2.1.28 (3.2/3.3)

RO/SRO: Both

Level: M

Author: rfa

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

92. Which ONE of the following is the MAXIMUM MVAR load when operating at 500 MW

at a .9 Power Factor, and 30 psig H2 in generator?

SEE ATTACHMENT: Generator Capability Curve

A. 675

B. 445

C. 321

D. 140

A) B

Reference:

EO - 7

Book I of II, Vol 2, OP-OC-STG-01 5, page 40 of 45.

K/A: G2.1.7 (3.7/4.4)

RO/SRO: Both

Level: C

Author: rfa

Enclosure 4.7

Capability Curve

Reference Use

I

C,,

S

0

C

0

C

OP/i/A/ 106/001

Page 1 of I

CURVE AB LIMITED BY FIELD HEATING

CURVE BC LIMITEO BY ARMATURE HEATING

CURVE CD LIMITED BY ARMATURE CORE END HEATING

A5/

'1.h7

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

93. Which of the following will REQUIRE INITIATION of a reactor shutdown per Technical

Specifications?

SEE ATTACHMENT: TS 3.4.13 (RCS Operational Leakage)

A.

Unidentified RCS leakage of 1 gpm for 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br />.

B.

Identified RCS leakage of 10 gpm for 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br />.

C.

300 gpd total primary to secondary leakage through ALL OSTG's OR 150

gpd primary to secondary leakage through any one OTSG for 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br />.

D.

300 gpd total primary to secondary leakage through ALL OSTG's AND 150

gpd primary to secondary leakage through any one OTSG for 5 hours5.787037e-5 days <br />0.00139 hours <br />8.267196e-6 weeks <br />1.9025e-6 months <br />.

A) D

Reference required: TS 3.4.13

K/A: 2.2.22 (3.4/4.1)

RO/SRO: Both

Level: M

Author: rfa

RCS Operational LEAKAGE

3.4.13

3.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (RCS)

3.4.13 RCS Operational LEAKAGE

LCO 3.4.13

RCS operational LEAKAGE shall be limited to:

a.

No pressure boundary LEAKAGE;

b.

1 gpm unidentified LEAKAGE;

C.

10 gpm identified LEAKAGE;

d.

300 gallon per day total primary to secondary LEAKAGE through all

steam generators (SGs); and

e.

150 gallon per day primary to secondary LEAKAGE

through any one SG.

APPLICABILITY:

MODES 1, 2, 3, and 4.

ACTIONS

CONDITION

REQUIRED ACTION

COMPLETION TIME

A.

RCS LEAKAGE not

A.1

Reduce LEAKAGE to

4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br />

within limits for reasons

within limits.

other than pressure

boundary LEAKAGE.

B. Required Action and

B.1

Be in MODE 3.

12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br />

associated Completion

Time of Condition A not

AND

met.

B.2

Be in MODE 5.

36 hours4.166667e-4 days <br />0.01 hours <br />5.952381e-5 weeks <br />1.3698e-5 months <br />

OR

Pressure boundary

LEAKAGE exists.

Amendment Nos. 300, 300, & 300

3.4.13-1

OCONEE UNITS 1, 2, & 3

RCS Operational LEAKAGE

3.4.13

SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS

SURVEILLANCE

FREQUENCY

SR 3.4.13.1


NOTE-


Not required to be performed until 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br />

after establishment of steady state operation.

Evaluate RCS Operational LEAKAGE.

72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br />

SR 3.4.13.2

Verify steam generator tube integrity is in

In accordance with the

accordance with the Steam Generator Tube

Steam Generator Tube

Surveillance Program.

Surveillance Program

Amendment Nos. 300. 300, & 300

OCONEE UNITS 1, 2, & 3

3.4.13-2

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

94. Given the following plant conditions:

- PZR off scale low

- RCS pressure 1200 psig and decreasing slowly

- Core Exit Thermocouples (CETCs) reading 950°F and increasing slowly

- NI-1/2 reading 5000 cps and increasing

- Self Powered Neutron Detectors (SPNDs) current readings increasing

Which one of the following would explain the excore detectors increasing value?

A.

Boron precipitation in the core.

B.

Fuel coefficients effects.

C.

Voiding in the downcomer.

D.

Temperature effects on the excore detectors.

A) C

A. Boron would be decreasing the neutron population.

B. Fuel coefficients would have a negative affect on neutron population.

C. CORRECT: Given the conditions with the plant in region 3 of ICC would have downcomer

voiding which will increase leakage for the excore detectors.

D. Temperature will not cause the indication to increase in the detectors.

Reference: Vol VIII, Ni's,

Vol VII, Loss of DHR

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

95. An individual has accumulated the following doses:

- Committed Dose Equivalent (CDE) is 2525 mr

- Deep Dose Equivalent (DDE) is 2355 mr

- Lens Dose Equivalent (LDE) is 744 mr

- Committed Effective Dose Equivalent (CEDE) is 605 mr

- Shallow Dose Equivalent (SDE) is 435 mr

Which ONE of the following is the individual's Total Effective Dose Equivalent (TEDE)?

A. 2790 mr

B. 2960 mr

C. 3534 mr

D. 4880 mr

A) B

A. 2355 + 435 = 2790

B. Correct. TEDE = 605 (CEDE) + 2355 (DDE) = 2960

C. 2355 + 744 + 435 = 3534

D. 2525 + 2355 = 4880

K/A: G2.3.1 (2.6/3.0)

T3, T3

Bank/Mod

Reference:

Facility updated question bank 61

RAD022501

RAD022501

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

96. A valve needs to be repositioned for the completion of a surveillance. The valve is

located in a high radiation area. Lead shielding is draped over the valve handwheel.

Which of the following is an accepted ALARA practice for repositioning the valve?

A.

Reposition the lead shielding along the valve piping enough to reposition

the valve; replace the shielding to its original position; inform Radiation

Protection when you have completed the task.

B.

Reposition the lead shielding so that it stays between you and the valve;

reposition the valve by reaching around the shielding; replace the shielding

to its original position.

C.

Remove the lead shielding; reposition the valve;contact the WCC SRO to

have the lead shielding replaced.

D.

Stop work, contact WCC SRO to have an evaluation performed.

A) D

Reasons:

Do not move or remove shielding without RP and engineering evaluation.

Reference: GET Manual, Page 44

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

97. Which one of the following is considered to be an equivalent to a dose of 1 REM?

A. A dose of 1 REM of gamma radiation, a dose of 1 RAD of beta, a dose of 0.1 RADs

of high energy protons, a dose of 0.5 RADs of alpha.

B. A dose of 1 RAD of gamma radiation, a dose of 1 RAD of beta, a dose of 0.05

RADs of neutrons, a dose of 0.1 RADs of alpha.

C. A dose of 1 REM of gamma radiation, a dose of 0.1 RADs of high energy protons, a

dose of 0.05 RADs of neutrons, a dose of 0.5 RADs of alpha.

D. A dose of 1 RAD of gamma radiation, a dose of 1 RAD of beta, a dose of 0.1 RADs

of high energy protons, a dose of 0.05 RADs of alpha.

A) D

Reference: Lesson Plans Vol 2, OP-OC-RAD-RPP, page 23 of 77.

EO - 1

K/A: G2.3.4 (2.5/3.1)

RO/SRO: BOTH

Level: M

Author: rfa

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

98. Given the following plant conditions:

- 100% power.

- A tube rupture occurs that results in an ES actuation on low RCS pressure.

- An ALERT is declared based on the Fission Product Barrier Matrix.

Which one of the following identifies the INITIAL notification requirements for the

NRC Operations Center, State and County agencies?

A.

Notify the NRC Operations Center within 75 minutes; notify the State and

County agencies as soon as possible.

B.

Notify the NRC Operations Center in less than one (1) hour; notify the

State and County agencies within 15 minutes.

C.

Notify the NRC Operations Center within 75 minutes; notify the State and

County agencies within 15 minutes.

D.

Notify the NRC Operations Center within 15 minutes; notify the State and

County agencies in less than one (1) hour.

A) B

A. Notify the NRC Operations Center in less than one (1) hour; notify the State and County

agencies within 15 minutes.

B. CORRECT: Notify the NRC Operations Center in less than one (1) hour; notify the State

and County agencies within 15 minutes.

C. Notify the NRC Operations Center in less than one (1) hour; notify the State and County

agencies within 15 minutes.

D. Notify the NRC Operations Center in less than one (1) hour; notify the State and County

agencies within 15 minutes.

Reference: Vol. V, Bk 1 of 2, OP-OC-EAP-SEP

Nuclear System Directives 114, 201,202

RP/1002, Enc, 4.2 Alert

E.O. 17.2

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

99. Given the following plant conditions:

- 100% power

- RCS pressure 2155 psig

- RCS temperature 5790F

- RCS makeup flow has increased from 40 to 45 gpm and stable

- Pressurizer level decreased and is now at setpoint and stable

- RIA-40, (CSAE Off-Gas Monitor) is in alarm

Which one of the following entry conditions has been met?

A.

A small break LOCA is in progress, enter the EOP and perform the

Immediate and Subsequent Actions.

B.

A small break LOCA is in progress, enter the SGTR tab section of the EOP.

C.

A tube leak is in progress, enter the EOP and perform the Immediate and

Subsequent Actions.

D.

A tube leak is in progress, enter AP/31, Primary to Secondary Leakage.

A) D

Reference: AP/31, Primary to Secondary Leakage

C/A

OCONEE NRC RO EXAM

02-18-2002

1 POINT

100. Plant conditions:

- A fire has occurred

- Appendix R pumps required for plant shutdown cannot be operated from their

normal power supply

Which ONE of the following is correct?

I&E will align power to these pumps from...

A. CT-5 (Lee Station feeder) through the Appendix R Switchgear.

B. CT-5 (Lee Station feeder) through motor starters on the back of the Appendix R

Portable Valve Control Panel.

C. CT-4 (Keowee underground feeder) through the Appendix R Switchgear.

D. CT-4 (Keowee underground feeder) through motor starters on the back of the

Appendix R Portable Valve Control Panel.

A) C

K/A: (2.9/3.4)

T3, T3

Bank

Reference:

Facility updated question bank 46 CP101202 CP101202

END OF EXAM